Screener based on Profitunity strategy for multiple timeframes
Screener based on Profitunity strategy by Bill Williams for multiple timeframes (max 5, including chart timeframe) and customizable symbol list. The screener analyzes the Alligator and Awesome Oscillator indicators, Divergent bars and high volume bars.
The maximum allowed number of requests (symbols and timeframes) is limited to 40 requests, for example, for 10 symbols by 4 requests of different timeframes. Therefore, the indicator automatically limits the number of displayed symbols depending on the number of timeframes for each symbol, if there are more symbols than are displayed in the screener table, then the ordinal numbers are displayed to the left of the symbols, in this case you can display the next group of symbols by increasing the value by 1 in the "Show tickers from" field, if the "Group" field is enabled, or specify the symbol number by 1 more than the last symbol in the screener table. 👀 When timeframe filtering is applied, the screener table displays only the columns of those timeframes for which the filtering value is selected, which allows displaying more symbols.
For each timeframe, in the "TIMEFRAMES > Prev" field, you can enable the display of data for the previous bar relative to the last (current) one, if the market is open for the requested symbol. In the "TIMEFRAMES > Y" field, you can enable filtering depending on the location of the last five bars relative to the Alligator indicator lines, which are designated by special symbols in the screener table:
⬆️ — if the Alligator is open upwards (Lips > Teeth > Jaw) and none of the bars is closed below the Lips line;
↗️ — if one of the bars, except for the penultimate one, is closed below Lips, or two bars, except for the last one, are closed below Lips, or the Alligator is open upwards only below four bars, but none of the bars is closed below Lips;
⬇️ — if the Alligator is open downwards (Lips < Teeth < Jaw), but none of the bars is closed above Lips;
↘️ — if one of the bars, except the penultimate one, is closed above the Lips, or two bars, except the last one, are closed above the Lips, or the Alligator is open down only above four bars, but none of the bars are closed above the Lips;
➡️ — in other cases, including when the Alligator lines intersect and one of the bars is closed behind the Lips line or two bars intersect one of the Alligator lines.
In the "TIMEFRAMES > Show bar change value for TF" field, you can add a column to the right of the selected timeframe column with the percentage change between the closing price of the last bar (current) and the closing price of the previous bar ((close – previous close) / previous close * 100). Depending on the percentage value, the background color of the screener table cell will change: dark red if <= -3%; red if <= -2%, light red if <= -0.5%; dark green if >= 3%; green if >= 2%; light green if >= 0.5%.
For each timeframe, the screener table displays the symbol of the latest (current) bar, depending on the closing price relative to the bar's midpoint ((high + low) / 2) and its location relative to the Alligator indicator lines: ⎾ — the bar's closing price is above its midpoint; ⎿ — the bar's closing price is below its midpoint; ├ — the bar's closing price is equal to its midpoint; 🟢 — Bullish Divergent bar, i.e. the bar's closing price is above its midpoint, the bar's high is below all Alligator lines, the bar's low is below the previous bar's low; 🔴 — Bearish Divergent bar, i.e. the bar's closing price is below its midpoint, the bar's low is above all Alligator lines, the bar's high is above the previous bar's high. When filtering is enabled in the "TIMEFRAMES > Filtering by Divergent bar" field, the data in the screener table cells will be displayed only for those timeframes that have a Divergent bar. A high bar volume signal is also displayed — 📶/📶² if the bar volume is greater than 40%/70% of the average volume value calculated using a simple moving average (SMA) in the 140 bar interval from the last bar.
In the indicator settings in the "SYMBOL LIST" field, each ticker (for example: OANDA:SPX500USD) must be on a separate line. If the market is closed, then the data for requested symbols will be limited to the time of the last (current) bar on the chart, for example, if the current symbol was traded yesterday, and the requested symbol is traded today, when requesting data for an hourly timeframe, the last bar will be for yesterday, if the timeframe of the current chart is not higher than 1 day. Therefore, by default, a warning will be displayed on the chart instead of the screener table that if the market is open, you must wait for the screener to load (after the first price change on the current chart), or if the highest timeframe in the screener is 1 day, you will be prompted to change the timeframe on the current chart to 1 week, if the screener requests data for the timeframe of 1 week, you will be prompted to change the timeframe on the current chart to 1 month, or switch to another symbol on the current chart for which the market is open (for example: BINANCE:BTCUSDT), or disable the warning in the field "SYMBOL LIST > Do not display screener if market is close".
The number of the last columns with the color of the AO indicator that will be displayed in the screener table for each timeframe is specified in the indicator settings in the "AWESOME OSCILLATOR > Number of columns" field.
For each timeframe, the direction of the trend between the price of the highest and lowest bars in the specified range of bars from the last bar is displayed — ↑ if the trend is up (the highest bar is to the right of the lowest), or ↓ if the trend is down (the lowest bar is to the right of the highest). If there is a divergence on the AO indicator in the specified interval, the symbol ∇ is also displayed. The average volume value is also calculated in the specified interval using a simple moving average (SMA). The number of bars is set in the indicator settings in the "INTERVAL FOR HIGHEST AND LOWEST BARS > Bars count" field.
In the indicator settings in the "STYLE" field you can change the position of the screener table relative to the chart window, the background color, the color and size of the text.
***
Скринер на основе стратегии Profitunity Билла Вильямса для нескольких таймфреймов (максимум 5, включая таймфрейм графика) и настраиваемого списка символов. Скринер анализирует индикаторы Alligator и Awesome Oscillator, Дивергентные бары и бары с высоким объемом.
Максимально допустимое количество запросов (символы и таймфреймы) ограничено 40 запросами, например, для 10 символов по 4 запроса разных таймфреймов. Поэтому в индикаторе автоматически ограничивается количество отображаемых символов в зависимости от количества таймфреймов для каждого символа, если символов больше чем отображено в таблице скринера, то слева от символов отображаются порядковые номера, в таком случае можно отобразить следующую группу символов, увеличив значение на 1 в настройках индикатора поле "Show tickers from", если включено поле "Group", или указать номер символа на 1 больше, чем последний символ в таблице скринера. 👀 Когда применяется фильтрация по таймфрейму, в таблице скринера отображаются только столбцы тех таймфреймов, для которых выбрано значение фильтрации, что позволяет отображать большее количество символов.
Для каждого таймфрейма в настройках индикатора в поле "TIMEFRAMES > Prev" можно включить отображение данных для предыдущего бара относительно последнего (текущего), если для запрашиваемого символа рынок открыт. В поле "TIMEFRAMES > Y" можно включить фильтрацию, в зависимости от расположения последних пяти баров относительно линий индикатора Alligator, которые обозначаются специальными символами в таблице скринера:
⬆️ — если Alligator открыт вверх (Lips > Teeth > Jaw) и ни один из баров не закрыт ниже линии Lips;
↗️ — если один из баров, кроме предпоследнего, закрыт ниже Lips, или два бара, кроме последнего, закрыты ниже Lips, или Alligator открыт вверх только ниже четырех баров, но ни один из баров не закрыт ниже Lips;
⬇️ — если Alligator открыт вниз (Lips < Teeth < Jaw), но ни один из баров не закрыт выше Lips;
↘️ — если один из баров, кроме предпоследнего, закрыт выше Lips, или два бара, кроме последнего, закрыты выше Lips, или Alligator открыт вниз только выше четырех баров, но ни один из баров не закрыт выше Lips;
➡️ — в остальных случаях, в то числе когда линии Alligator пересекаются и один из баров закрыт за линией Lips или два бара пересекают одну из линий Alligator.
В поле "TIMEFRAMES > Show bar change value for TF" можно добавить справа от выбранного столбца таймфрейма столбец с процентным изменением между ценой закрытия последнего бара (текущего) и ценой закрытия предыдущего бара ((close – previous close) / previous close * 100). В зависимости от величины процента будет меняться цвет фона ячейки таблицы скринера: темно-красный, если <= -3%; красный, если <= -2%, светло-красный, если <= -0.5%; темно-зеленый, если >= 3%; зеленый, если >= 2%; светло-зеленый, если >= 0.5%.
Для каждого таймфрейма в таблице скринера отображается символ последнего (текущего) бара, в зависимости от цены закрытия относительно середины бара ((high + low) / 2) и расположения относительно линий индикатора Alligator: ⎾ — цена закрытия бара выше его середины; ⎿ — цена закрытия бара ниже его середины; ├ — цена закрытия бара равна его середине; 🟢 — Бычий Дивергентный бар, т.е. цена закрытия бара выше его середины, максимум бара ниже всех линий Alligator, минимум бара ниже минимума предыдущего бара; 🔴 — Медвежий Дивергентный бар, т.е. цена закрытия бара ниже его середины, минимум бара выше всех линий Alligator, максимум бара выше максимума предыдущего бара. При включении фильтрации в поле "TIMEFRAMES > Filtering by Divergent bar" данные в ячейках таблицы скринера будут отображаться только для тех таймфреймов, где есть Дивергентный бар. Также отображается сигнал высокого объема бара — 📶/📶², если объем бара больше чем на 40%/70% среднего значения объема, рассчитанного с помощью простой скользящей средней (SMA) в интервале 140 баров от последнего бара.
В настройках индикатора в поле "SYMBOL LIST" каждый тикер (например: OANDA:SPX500USD) должен быть на отдельной строке. Если рынок закрыт, то данные для запрашиваемых символов будут ограничены временем последнего (текущего) бара на графике, например, если текущий символ торговался последний день вчера, а запрашиваемый символ торгуется сегодня, при запросе данных для часового таймфрейма, последний бар будет за вчерашний день, если таймфрейм текущего графика не выше 1 дня. Поэтому по умолчанию на графике будет отображаться предупреждение вместо таблицы скринера о том, что если рынок открыт, то необходимо дождаться загрузки скринера (после первого изменения цены на текущем графике), или если в скринере самый высокий таймфрейм 1 день, то будет предложено изменить на текущем графике таймфрейм на 1 неделю, если в скринере запрашиваются данные для таймфрейма 1 неделя, то будет предложено изменить на текущем графике таймфрейм на 1 месяц, или же переключиться на другой символ на текущем графике, для которого рынок открыт (например: BINANCE:BTCUSDT), или отключить предупреждение в поле "SYMBOL LIST > Do not display screener if market is close".
Количество последних столбцов с цветом индикатора AO, которые будут отображены в таблице скринера для каждого таймфрейма, указывается в настройках индикатора в поле "AWESOME OSCILLATOR > Number of columns".
Для каждого таймфрейма отображается направление тренда между ценой самого высокого и самого низкого баров в указанном интервале баров от последнего бара — ↑, если тренд направлен вверх (самый высокий бар справа от самого низкого), или ↓, если тренд направлен вниз (самый низкий бар справа от самого высокого). Если есть дивергенция на индикаторе AO в указанном интервале, то также отображается символ — ∇. В указанном интервале также рассчитывается среднее значение объема с помощью простой скользящей средней (SMA). Количество баров устанавливается в настройках индикатора в поле "INTERVAL FOR HIGHEST AND LOWEST BARS > Bars count".
В настройках индикатора в поле "STYLE" можно изменить положение таблицы скринера относительно окна графика, цвет фона, цвет и размер текста.
Tìm kiếm tập lệnh với "bar"
FvgCalculations█ OVERVIEW
This library provides the core calculation engine for identifying Fair Value Gaps (FVGs) across different timeframes and for processing their interaction with price. It includes functions to detect FVGs on both the current chart and higher timeframes, as well as to check for their full or partial mitigation.
█ CONCEPTS
The library's primary functions revolve around the concept of Fair Value Gaps and their lifecycle.
Fair Value Gap (FVG) Identification
An FVG, or imbalance, represents a price range where buying or selling pressure was significant enough to cause a rapid price movement, leaving an "inefficiency" in the market. This library identifies FVGs based on three-bar patterns:
Bullish FVG: Forms when the low of the current bar (bar 3) is higher than the high of the bar two periods prior (bar 1). The FVG is the space between the high of bar 1 and the low of bar 3.
Bearish FVG: Forms when the high of the current bar (bar 3) is lower than the low of the bar two periods prior (bar 1). The FVG is the space between the low of bar 1 and the high of bar 3.
The library provides distinct functions for detecting FVGs on the current (Low Timeframe - LTF) and specified higher timeframes (Medium Timeframe - MTF / High Timeframe - HTF).
FVG Mitigation
Mitigation refers to price revisiting an FVG.
Full Mitigation: An FVG is considered fully mitigated when price completely closes the gap. For a bullish FVG, this occurs if the current low price moves below or touches the FVG's bottom. For a bearish FVG, it occurs if the current high price moves above or touches the FVG's top.
Partial Mitigation (Entry/Fill): An FVG is partially mitigated when price enters the FVG's range but does not fully close it. The library tracks the extent of this fill. For a bullish FVG, if the current low price enters the FVG from above, that low becomes the new effective top of the remaining FVG. For a bearish FVG, if the current high price enters the FVG from below, that high becomes the new effective bottom of the remaining FVG.
FVG Interaction
This refers to any instance where the current bar's price range (high to low) touches or crosses into the currently unfilled portion of an active (visible and not fully mitigated) FVG.
Multi-Timeframe Data Acquisition
To detect FVGs on higher timeframes, specific historical bar data (high, low, and time of bars at indices and relative to the higher timeframe's last completed bar) is required. The requestMultiTFBarData function is designed to fetch this data efficiently.
█ CALCULATIONS AND USE
The functions in this library are typically used in a sequence to manage FVGs:
1. Data Retrieval (for MTF/HTF FVGs):
Call requestMultiTFBarData() with the desired higher timeframe string (e.g., "60", "D").
This returns a tuple of htfHigh1, htfLow1, htfTime1, htfHigh3, htfLow3, htfTime3.
2. FVG Detection:
For LTF FVGs: Call detectFvg() on each confirmed bar. It uses high , low, low , and high along with barstate.isconfirmed.
For MTF/HTF FVGs: Call detectMultiTFFvg() using the data obtained from requestMultiTFBarData().
Both detection functions return an fvgObject (defined in FvgTypes) if an FVG is found, otherwise na. They also can classify FVGs as "Large Volume" (LV) if classifyLV is true and the FVG size (top - bottom) relative to the tfAtr (Average True Range of the respective timeframe) meets the lvAtrMultiplier.
3. FVG State Updates (on each new bar for existing FVGs):
First, check for overall price interaction using fvgInteractionCheck(). This function determines if the current bar's high/low has touched or entered the FVG's currentTop or currentBottom.
If interaction occurs and the FVG is not already mitigated:
Call checkMitigation() to determine if the FVG has been fully mitigated by the current bar's currentHigh and currentLow. If true, the FVG's isMitigated status is updated.
If not fully mitigated, call checkPartialMitigation() to see if the price has further entered the FVG. This function returns the newLevel to which the FVG has been filled (e.g., currentLow for a bullish FVG, currentHigh for bearish). This newLevel is then used to update the FVG's currentTop or currentBottom.
The calling script (e.g., fvgMain.c) is responsible for storing and managing the array of fvgObject instances and passing them to these update functions.
█ NOTES
Bar State for LTF Detection: The detectFvg() function relies on barstate.isconfirmed to ensure FVG detection is based on closed bars, preventing FVGs from being detected prematurely on the currently forming bar.
Higher Timeframe Data (lookahead): The requestMultiTFBarData() function uses lookahead = barmerge.lookahead_on. This means it can access historical data from the higher timeframe that corresponds to the current bar on the chart, even if the higher timeframe bar has not officially closed. This is standard for multi-timeframe analysis aiming to plot historical HTF data accurately on a lower timeframe chart.
Parameter Typing: Functions like detectMultiTFFvg and detectFvg infer the type for boolean (classifyLV) and numeric (lvAtrMultiplier) parameters passed from the main script, while explicitly typed series parameters (like htfHigh1, currentAtr) expect series data.
fvgObject Dependency: The FVG detection functions return fvgObject instances, and fvgInteractionCheck takes an fvgObject as a parameter. This UDT is defined in the FvgTypes library, making it a dependency for using FvgCalculations.
ATR for LV Classification: The tfAtr (for MTF/HTF) and currentAtr (for LTF) parameters are expected to be the Average True Range values for the respective timeframes. These are used, if classifyLV is enabled, to determine if an FVG's size qualifies it as a "Large Volume" FVG based on the lvAtrMultiplier.
MTF/HTF FVG Appearance Timing: When displaying FVGs from a higher timeframe (MTF/HTF) on a lower timeframe (LTF) chart, users might observe that the most recent MTF/HTF FVG appears one LTF bar later compared to its appearance on a native MTF/HTF chart. This is an expected behavior due to the detection mechanism in `detectMultiTFFvg`. This function uses historical bar data from the MTF/HTF (specifically, data equivalent to `HTF_bar ` and `HTF_bar `) to identify an FVG. Therefore, all three bars forming the FVG on the MTF/HTF must be fully closed and have shifted into these historical index positions relative to the `request.security` call from the LTF chart before the FVG can be detected and displayed on the LTF. This ensures that the MTF/HTF FVG is identified based on confirmed, closed bars from the higher timeframe.
█ EXPORTED FUNCTIONS
requestMultiTFBarData(timeframe)
Requests historical bar data for specific previous bars from a specified higher timeframe.
It fetches H , L , T (for the bar before last) and H , L , T (for the bar three periods prior)
from the requested timeframe.
This is typically used to identify FVG patterns on MTF/HTF.
Parameters:
timeframe (simple string) : The higher timeframe to request data from (e.g., "60" for 1-hour, "D" for Daily).
Returns: A tuple containing: .
- htfHigh1 (series float): High of the bar at index 1 (one bar before the last completed bar on timeframe).
- htfLow1 (series float): Low of the bar at index 1.
- htfTime1 (series int) : Time of the bar at index 1.
- htfHigh3 (series float): High of the bar at index 3 (three bars before the last completed bar on timeframe).
- htfLow3 (series float): Low of the bar at index 3.
- htfTime3 (series int) : Time of the bar at index 3.
detectMultiTFFvg(htfHigh1, htfLow1, htfTime1, htfHigh3, htfLow3, htfTime3, tfAtr, classifyLV, lvAtrMultiplier, tfType)
Detects a Fair Value Gap (FVG) on a higher timeframe (MTF/HTF) using pre-fetched bar data.
Parameters:
htfHigh1 (float) : High of the first relevant bar (typically high ) from the higher timeframe.
htfLow1 (float) : Low of the first relevant bar (typically low ) from the higher timeframe.
htfTime1 (int) : Time of the first relevant bar (typically time ) from the higher timeframe.
htfHigh3 (float) : High of the third relevant bar (typically high ) from the higher timeframe.
htfLow3 (float) : Low of the third relevant bar (typically low ) from the higher timeframe.
htfTime3 (int) : Time of the third relevant bar (typically time ) from the higher timeframe.
tfAtr (float) : ATR value for the higher timeframe, used for Large Volume (LV) FVG classification.
classifyLV (bool) : If true, FVGs will be assessed to see if they qualify as Large Volume.
lvAtrMultiplier (float) : The ATR multiplier used to define if an FVG is Large Volume.
tfType (series tfType enum from no1x/FvgTypes/1) : The timeframe type (e.g., types.tfType.MTF, types.tfType.HTF) of the FVG being detected.
Returns: An fvgObject instance if an FVG is detected, otherwise na.
detectFvg(classifyLV, lvAtrMultiplier, currentAtr)
Detects a Fair Value Gap (FVG) on the current (LTF - Low Timeframe) chart.
Parameters:
classifyLV (bool) : If true, FVGs will be assessed to see if they qualify as Large Volume.
lvAtrMultiplier (float) : The ATR multiplier used to define if an FVG is Large Volume.
currentAtr (float) : ATR value for the current timeframe, used for LV FVG classification.
Returns: An fvgObject instance if an FVG is detected, otherwise na.
checkMitigation(isBullish, fvgTop, fvgBottom, currentHigh, currentLow)
Checks if an FVG has been fully mitigated by the current bar's price action.
Parameters:
isBullish (bool) : True if the FVG being checked is bullish, false if bearish.
fvgTop (float) : The top price level of the FVG.
fvgBottom (float) : The bottom price level of the FVG.
currentHigh (float) : The high price of the current bar.
currentLow (float) : The low price of the current bar.
Returns: True if the FVG is considered fully mitigated, false otherwise.
checkPartialMitigation(isBullish, currentBoxTop, currentBoxBottom, currentHigh, currentLow)
Checks for partial mitigation of an FVG by the current bar's price action.
It determines if the price has entered the FVG and returns the new fill level.
Parameters:
isBullish (bool) : True if the FVG being checked is bullish, false if bearish.
currentBoxTop (float) : The current top of the FVG box (this might have been adjusted by previous partial fills).
currentBoxBottom (float) : The current bottom of the FVG box (similarly, might be adjusted).
currentHigh (float) : The high price of the current bar.
currentLow (float) : The low price of the current bar.
Returns: The new price level to which the FVG has been filled (e.g., currentLow for a bullish FVG).
Returns na if no new partial fill occurred on this bar.
fvgInteractionCheck(fvg, highVal, lowVal)
Checks if the current bar's price interacts with the given FVG.
Interaction means the price touches or crosses into the FVG's
current (possibly partially filled) range.
Parameters:
fvg (fvgObject type from no1x/FvgTypes/1) : The FVG object to check.
Its isMitigated, isVisible, isBullish, currentTop, and currentBottom fields are used.
highVal (float) : The high price of the current bar.
lowVal (float) : The low price of the current bar.
Returns: True if price interacts with the FVG, false otherwise.
ORB Fusion🎯 CORE INNOVATION: INSTITUTIONAL ORB FRAMEWORK WITH FAILED BREAKOUT INTELLIGENCE
ORB Fusion represents a complete institutional-grade Opening Range Breakout system combining classic Market Profile concepts (Initial Balance, day type classification) with modern algorithmic breakout detection, failed breakout reversal logic, and comprehensive statistical tracking. Rather than simply drawing lines at opening range extremes, this system implements the full trading methodology used by professional floor traders and market makers—including the critical concept that failed breakouts are often higher-probability setups than successful breakouts .
The Opening Range Hypothesis:
The first 30-60 minutes of trading establishes the day's value area —the price range where the majority of participants agree on fair value. This range is formed during peak information flow (overnight news digestion, gap reactions, early institutional positioning). Breakouts from this range signal directional conviction; failures to hold breakouts signal trapped participants and create exploitable reversals.
Why Opening Range Matters:
1. Information Aggregation : Opening range reflects overnight news, pre-market sentiment, and early institutional orders. It's the market's initial "consensus" on value.
2. Liquidity Concentration : Stop losses cluster just outside opening range. Breakouts trigger these stops, creating momentum. Failed breakouts trap traders, forcing reversals.
3. Statistical Persistence : Markets exhibit range expansion tendency —when price accepts above/below opening range with volume, it often extends 1.0-2.0x the opening range size before mean reversion.
4. Institutional Behavior : Large players (market makers, institutions) use opening range as reference for the day's trading plan. They fade extremes in rotation days and follow breakouts in trend days.
Historical Context:
Opening Range Breakout methodology originated in commodity futures pits (1970s-80s) where floor traders noticed consistent patterns: the first 30-60 minutes established a "fair value zone," and directional moves occurred when this zone was violated with conviction. J. Peter Steidlmayer formalized this observation in Market Profile theory, introducing the "Initial Balance" concept—the first hour (two 30-minute periods) defining market structure.
📊 OPENING RANGE CONSTRUCTION
Four ORB Timeframe Options:
1. 5-Minute ORB (0930-0935 ET):
Captures immediate market direction during "opening drive"—the explosive first few minutes when overnight orders hit the tape.
Use Case:
• Scalping strategies
• High-frequency breakout trading
• Extremely liquid instruments (ES, NQ, SPY)
Characteristics:
• Very tight range (often 0.2-0.5% of price)
• Early breakouts common (7 of 10 days break within first hour)
• Higher false breakout rate (50-60%)
• Requires sub-minute chart monitoring
Psychology: Captures panic buyers/sellers reacting to overnight news. Range is small because sample size is minimal—only 5 minutes of price discovery. Early breakouts often fail because they're driven by retail FOMO rather than institutional conviction.
2. 15-Minute ORB (0930-0945 ET):
Balances responsiveness with statistical validity. Captures opening drive plus initial reaction to that drive.
Use Case:
• Day trading strategies
• Balanced scalping/swing hybrid
• Most liquid instruments
Characteristics:
• Moderate range (0.4-0.8% of price typically)
• Breakout rate ~60% of days
• False breakout rate ~40-45%
• Good balance of opportunity and reliability
Psychology: Includes opening panic AND the first retest/consolidation. Sophisticated traders (institutions, algos) start expressing directional bias. This is the "Goldilocks" timeframe—not too reactive, not too slow.
3. 30-Minute ORB (0930-1000 ET):
Classic ORB timeframe. Default for most professional implementations.
Use Case:
• Standard intraday trading
• Position sizing for full-day trades
• All liquid instruments (equities, indices, futures)
Characteristics:
• Substantial range (0.6-1.2% of price)
• Breakout rate ~55% of days
• False breakout rate ~35-40%
• Statistical sweet spot for extensions
Psychology: Full opening auction + first institutional repositioning complete. By 10:00 AM ET, headlines are digested, early stops are hit, and "real" directional players reveal themselves. This is when institutional programs typically finish their opening positioning.
Statistical Advantage: 30-minute ORB shows highest correlation with daily range. When price breaks and holds outside 30m ORB, probability of reaching 1.0x extension (doubling the opening range) exceeds 60% historically.
4. 60-Minute ORB (0930-1030 ET) - Initial Balance:
Steidlmayer's "Initial Balance"—the foundation of Market Profile theory.
Use Case:
• Swing trading entries
• Day type classification
• Low-frequency institutional setups
Characteristics:
• Wide range (0.8-1.5% of price)
• Breakout rate ~45% of days
• False breakout rate ~25-30% (lowest)
• Best for trend day identification
Psychology: Full first hour captures A-period (0930-1000) and B-period (1000-1030). By 10:30 AM ET, all early positioning is complete. Market has "voted" on value. Subsequent price action confirms (trend day) or rejects (rotation day) this value assessment.
Initial Balance Theory:
IB represents the market's accepted value area . When price extends significantly beyond IB (>1.5x IB range), it signals a Trend Day —strong directional conviction. When price remains within 1.0x IB, it signals a Rotation Day —mean reversion environment. This classification completely changes trading strategy.
🔬 LTF PRECISION TECHNOLOGY
The Chart Timeframe Problem:
Traditional ORB indicators calculate range using the chart's current timeframe. This creates critical inaccuracies:
Example:
• You're on a 5-minute chart
• ORB period is 30 minutes (0930-1000 ET)
• Indicator sees only 6 bars (30min ÷ 5min/bar = 6 bars)
• If any 5-minute bar has extreme wick, entire ORB is distorted
The Problem Amplifies:
• On 15-minute chart with 30-minute ORB: Only 2 bars sampled
• On 30-minute chart with 30-minute ORB: Only 1 bar sampled
• Opening spike or single large wick defines entire range (invalid)
Solution: Lower Timeframe (LTF) Precision:
ORB Fusion uses `request.security_lower_tf()` to sample 1-minute bars regardless of chart timeframe:
```
For 30-minute ORB on 15-minute chart:
- Traditional method: Uses 2 bars (15min × 2 = 30min)
- LTF Precision: Requests thirty 1-minute bars, calculates true high/low
```
Why This Matters:
Scenario: ES futures, 15-minute chart, 30-minute ORB
• Traditional ORB: High = 5850.00, Low = 5842.00 (range = 8 points)
• LTF Precision ORB: High = 5848.50, Low = 5843.25 (range = 5.25 points)
Difference: 2.75 points distortion from single 15-minute wick hitting 5850.00 at 9:31 AM then immediately reversing. LTF precision filters this out by seeing it was a fleeting wick, not a sustained high.
Impact on Extensions:
With inflated range (8 points vs 5.25 points):
• 1.5x extension projects +12 points instead of +7.875 points
• Difference: 4.125 points (nearly $200 per ES contract)
• Breakout signals trigger late; extension targets unreachable
Implementation:
```pinescript
getLtfHighLow() =>
float ha = request.security_lower_tf(syminfo.tickerid, "1", high)
float la = request.security_lower_tf(syminfo.tickerid, "1", low)
```
Function returns arrays of 1-minute high/low values, then finds true maximum and minimum across all samples.
When LTF Precision Activates:
Only when chart timeframe exceeds ORB session window:
• 5-minute chart + 30-minute ORB: LTF used (chart TF > session bars needed)
• 1-minute chart + 30-minute ORB: LTF not needed (direct sampling sufficient)
Recommendation: Always enable LTF Precision unless you're on 1-minute charts. The computational overhead is negligible, and accuracy improvement is substantial.
⚖️ INITIAL BALANCE (IB) FRAMEWORK
Steidlmayer's Market Profile Innovation:
J. Peter Steidlmayer developed Market Profile in the 1980s for the Chicago Board of Trade. His key insight: market structure is best understood through time-at-price (value area) rather than just price-over-time (traditional charts).
Initial Balance Definition:
IB is the price range established during the first hour of trading, subdivided into:
• A-Period : First 30 minutes (0930-1000 ET for US equities)
• B-Period : Second 30 minutes (1000-1030 ET)
A-Period vs B-Period Comparison:
The relationship between A and B periods forecasts the day:
B-Period Expansion (Bullish):
• B-period high > A-period high
• B-period low ≥ A-period low
• Interpretation: Buyers stepping in after opening assessed
• Implication: Bullish continuation likely
• Strategy: Buy pullbacks to A-period high (now support)
B-Period Expansion (Bearish):
• B-period low < A-period low
• B-period high ≤ A-period high
• Interpretation: Sellers stepping in after opening assessed
• Implication: Bearish continuation likely
• Strategy: Sell rallies to A-period low (now resistance)
B-Period Contraction:
• B-period stays within A-period range
• Interpretation: Market indecisive, digesting A-period information
• Implication: Rotation day likely, stay range-bound
• Strategy: Fade extremes, sell high/buy low within IB
IB Extensions:
Professional traders use IB as a ruler to project price targets:
Extension Levels:
• 0.5x IB : Initial probe outside value (minor target)
• 1.0x IB : Full extension (major target for normal days)
• 1.5x IB : Trend day threshold (classifies as trending)
• 2.0x IB : Strong trend day (rare, ~10-15% of days)
Calculation:
```
IB Range = IB High - IB Low
Bull Extension 1.0x = IB High + (IB Range × 1.0)
Bear Extension 1.0x = IB Low - (IB Range × 1.0)
```
Example:
ES futures:
• IB High: 5850.00
• IB Low: 5842.00
• IB Range: 8.00 points
Extensions:
• 1.0x Bull Target: 5850 + 8 = 5858.00
• 1.5x Bull Target: 5850 + 12 = 5862.00
• 2.0x Bull Target: 5850 + 16 = 5866.00
If price reaches 5862.00 (1.5x), day is classified as Trend Day —strategy shifts from mean reversion to trend following.
📈 DAY TYPE CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
Four Day Types (Market Profile Framework):
1. TREND DAY:
Definition: Price extends ≥1.5x IB range in one direction and stays there.
Characteristics:
• Opens and never returns to IB
• Persistent directional movement
• Volume increases as day progresses (conviction building)
• News-driven or strong institutional flow
Frequency: ~20-25% of trading days
Trading Strategy:
• DO: Follow the trend, trail stops, let winners run
• DON'T: Fade extremes, take early profits
• Key: Add to position on pullbacks to previous extension level
• Risk: Getting chopped in false trend (see Failed Breakout section)
Example: FOMC decision, payroll report, earnings surprise—anything creating one-sided conviction.
2. NORMAL DAY:
Definition: Price extends 0.5-1.5x IB, tests both sides, returns to IB.
Characteristics:
• Two-sided trading
• Extensions occur but don't persist
• Volume balanced throughout day
• Most common day type
Frequency: ~45-50% of trading days
Trading Strategy:
• DO: Take profits at extension levels, expect reversals
• DON'T: Hold for massive moves
• Key: Treat each extension as a profit-taking opportunity
• Risk: Holding too long when momentum shifts
Example: Typical day with no major catalysts—market balancing supply and demand.
3. ROTATION DAY:
Definition: Price stays within IB all day, rotating between high and low.
Characteristics:
• Never accepts outside IB
• Multiple tests of IB high/low
• Decreasing volume (no conviction)
• Classic range-bound action
Frequency: ~25-30% of trading days
Trading Strategy:
• DO: Fade extremes (sell IB high, buy IB low)
• DON'T: Chase breakouts
• Key: Enter at extremes with tight stops just outside IB
• Risk: Breakout finally occurs after multiple failures
Example: [/b> Pre-holiday trading, summer doldrums, consolidation after big move.
4. DEVELOPING:
Definition: Day type not yet determined (early in session).
Usage: Classification before 12:00 PM ET when IB extension pattern unclear.
ORB Fusion's Classification Algorithm:
```pinescript
if close > ibHigh:
ibExtension = (close - ibHigh) / ibRange
direction = "BULLISH"
else if close < ibLow:
ibExtension = (ibLow - close) / ibRange
direction = "BEARISH"
if ibExtension >= 1.5:
dayType = "TREND DAY"
else if ibExtension >= 0.5:
dayType = "NORMAL DAY"
else if close within IB:
dayType = "ROTATION DAY"
```
Why Classification Matters:
Same setup (bullish ORB breakout) has opposite implications:
• Trend Day : Hold for 2.0x extension, trail stops aggressively
• Normal Day : Take profits at 1.0x extension, watch for reversal
• Rotation Day : Fade the breakout immediately (likely false)
Knowing day type prevents catastrophic errors like fading a trend day or holding through rotation.
🚀 BREAKOUT DETECTION & CONFIRMATION
Three Confirmation Methods:
1. Close Beyond Level (Recommended):
Logic: Candle must close above ORB high (bull) or below ORB low (bear).
Why:
• Filters out wicks (temporary liquidity grabs)
• Ensures sustained acceptance above/below range
• Reduces false breakout rate by ~20-30%
Example:
• ORB High: 5850.00
• Bar high touches 5850.50 (wick above)
• Bar closes at 5848.00 (inside range)
• Result: NO breakout signal
vs.
• Bar high touches 5850.50
• Bar closes at 5851.00 (outside range)
• Result: BREAKOUT signal confirmed
Trade-off: Slightly delayed entry (wait for close) but much higher reliability.
2. Wick Beyond Level:
Logic: [/b> Any touch of ORB high/low triggers breakout.
Why:
• Earliest possible entry
• Captures aggressive momentum moves
Risk:
• High false breakout rate (60-70%)
• Stop runs trigger signals
• Requires very tight stops (difficult to manage)
Use Case: Scalping with 1-2 point profit targets where any penetration = trade.
3. Body Beyond Level:
Logic: [/b> Candle body (close vs open) must be entirely outside range.
Why:
• Strictest confirmation
• Ensures directional conviction (not just momentum)
• Lowest false breakout rate
Example: Trade-off: [/b> Very conservative—misses some valid breakouts but rarely triggers on false ones.
Volume Confirmation Layer:
All confirmation methods can require volume validation:
Volume Multiplier Logic: Rationale: [/b> True breakouts are driven by institutional activity (large size). Volume spike confirms real conviction vs. stop-run manipulation.
Statistical Impact: [/b>
• Breakouts with volume confirmation: ~65% success rate
• Breakouts without volume: ~45% success rate
• Difference: 20 percentage points edge
Implementation Note: [/b>
Volume confirmation adds complexity—you'll miss breakouts that work but lack volume. However, when targeting 1.5x+ extensions (ambitious goals), volume confirmation becomes critical because those moves require sustained institutional participation.
Recommended Settings by Strategy: [/b>
Scalping (1-2 point targets): [/b>
• Method: Close
• Volume: OFF
• Rationale: Quick in/out doesn't need perfection
Intraday Swing (5-10 point targets): [/b>
• Method: Close
• Volume: ON (1.5x multiplier)
• Rationale: Balance reliability and opportunity
Position Trading (full-day holds): [/b>
• Method: Body
• Volume: ON (2.0x multiplier)
• Rationale: Must be certain—large stops require high win rate
🔥 FAILED BREAKOUT SYSTEM
The Core Insight: [/b>
Failed breakouts are often more profitable [/b> than successful breakouts because they create trapped traders with predictable behavior.
Failed Breakout Definition: [/b>
A breakout that:
1. Initially penetrates ORB level with confirmation
2. Attracts participants (volume spike, momentum)
3. Fails to extend (stalls or immediately reverses)
4. Returns inside ORB range within N bars
Psychology of Failure: [/b>
When breakout fails:
• Breakout buyers are trapped [/b>: Bought at ORB high, now underwater
• Early longs reduce: Take profit, fearful of reversal
• Shorts smell blood: See failed breakout as reversal signal
• Result: Cascade of selling as trapped bulls exit + new shorts enter
Mirror image for failed bearish breakouts (trapped shorts cover + new longs enter).
Failure Detection Parameters: [/b>
1. Failure Confirmation Bars (default: 3): [/b>
How many bars after breakout to confirm failure?
Logic: Settings: [/b>
• 2 bars: Aggressive failure detection (more signals, more false failures)
• 3 bars Balanced (default)
• 5-10 bars: Conservative (wait for clear reversal)
Why This Matters:
Too few bars: You call "failed breakout" when price is just consolidating before next leg.
Too many bars: You miss the reversal entry (price already back in range).
2. Failure Buffer (default: 0.1 ATR): [/b>
How far inside ORB must price return to confirm failure?
Formula: Why Buffer Matters: clear rejection [/b> (not just hovering at level).
Settings: [/b>
• 0.0 ATR: No buffer, immediate failure signal
• 0.1 ATR: Small buffer (default) - filters noise
• [b>0.2-0.3 ATR: Large buffer - only dramatic failures count
Example: Reversal Entry System: [/b>
When failure confirmed, system generates complete reversal trade:
For Failed Bull Breakout (Short Reversal): [/b>
Entry: [/b> Current close when failure confirmed
Stop Loss: [/b> Extreme high since breakout + 0.10 ATR padding
Target 1: [/b> ORB High - (ORB Range × 0.5)
Target 2: Target 3: [/b> ORB High - (ORB Range × 1.5)
Example:
• ORB High: 5850, ORB Low: 5842, Range: 8 points
• Breakout to 5853, fails, reverses to 5848 (entry)
• Stop: 5853 + 1 = 5854 (6 point risk)
• T1: 5850 - 4 = 5846 (-2 points, 1:3 R:R)
• T2: 5850 - 8 = 5842 (-6 points, 1:1 R:R)
• T3: 5850 - 12 = 5838 (-10 points, 1.67:1 R:R)
[b>Why These Targets? [/b>
• T1 (0.5x ORB below high): Trapped bulls start panic
• T2 (1.0x ORB = ORB Mid): Major retracement, momentum fully reversed
• T3 (1.5x ORB): Reversal extended, now targeting opposite side
Historical Performance: [/b>
Failed breakout reversals in ORB Fusion's tracking system show:
• Win Rate: 65-75% (significantly higher than initial breakouts)
• Average Winner: 1.2x ORB range
• Average Loser: 0.5x ORB range (protected by stop at extreme)
• Expectancy: Strongly positive even with <70% win rate
Why Failed Breakouts Outperform: [/b>
1. Information Advantage: You now know what price did (failed to extend). Initial breakout trades are speculative; reversal trades are reactive to confirmed failure.
2. Trapped Participant Pressure: Every trapped bull becomes a seller. This creates sustained pressure.
3. Stop Loss Clarity: Extreme high is obvious stop (just beyond recent high). Breakout trades have ambiguous stops (ORB mid? Recent low? Too wide or too tight).
4. Mean Reversion Edge: Failed breakouts return to value (ORB mid). Initial breakouts try to escape value (harder to sustain).
Critical Insight: [/b>
"The best trade is often the one that trapped everyone else."
Failed breakouts create asymmetric opportunity because you're trading against [/b> trapped participants rather than with [/b> them. When you see a failed breakout signal, you're seeing real-time evidence that the market rejected directional conviction—that's exploitable.
📐 FIBONACCI EXTENSION SYSTEM
Six Extension Levels: [/b>
Extensions project how far price will travel after ORB breakout. Based on Fibonacci ratios + empirical market behavior.
1. 1.272x (27.2% Extension): [/b>
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 0.272)
Psychology: [/b> Initial probe beyond ORB. Early momentum + trapped shorts (on bull side) covering.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~75-80% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• First resistance/support after breakout
• Partial profit target (take 30-50% off)
• Watch for rejection here (could signal failure in progress)
Why 1.272? [/b> Related to harmonic patterns (1.272 is √1.618). Empirically, markets often stall at 25-30% extension before deciding whether to continue or fail.
2. 1.5x (50% Extension):
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 0.5)
Psychology: [/b> Breakout gaining conviction. Requires sustained buying/selling (not just momentum spike).
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~60-65% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• Major partial profit (take 50-70% off)
• Move stops to breakeven
• Trail remaining position
Why 1.5x? [/b> Classic halfway point to 2.0x. Markets often consolidate here before final push. If day type is "Normal," this is likely the high/low for the day.
3. 1.618x (Golden Ratio Extension): [/b>
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 0.618)
Psychology: [/b> Strong directional day. Institutional conviction + retail FOMO.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~45-50% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• Final partial profit (close 80-90%)
• Trail remainder with wide stop (allow breathing room)
Why 1.618? [/b> Fibonacci golden ratio. Appears consistently in market geometry. When price reaches 1.618x extension, move is "mature" and reversal risk increases.
4. 2.0x (100% Extension): [/b>
Formula: ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 1.0)
Psychology: [/b> Trend day confirmed. Opening range completely duplicated.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~30-35% after confirmed breakout
Trading: Why 2.0x? [/b> Psychological level—range doubled. Also corresponds to typical daily ATR in many instruments (opening range ~ 0.5 ATR, daily range ~ 1.0 ATR).
5. 2.618x (Super Extension):
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 1.618)
Psychology: [/b> Parabolic move. News-driven or squeeze.
Probability of Reach: [/b> ~10-15% after confirmed breakout
[b>Trading: Why 2.618? [/b> Fibonacci ratio (1.618²). Rare to reach—when it does, move is extreme. Often precedes multi-day consolidation or reversal.
6. 3.0x (Extreme Extension): [/b>
Formula: [/b> ORB High/Low + (ORB Range × 2.0)
Psychology: [/b> Market melt-up/crash. Only in extreme events.
[b>Probability of Reach: [/b> <5% after confirmed breakout
Trading: [/b>
• Close immediately if reached
• These are outlier events (black swans, flash crashes, squeeze-outs)
• Holding for more is greed—take windfall profit
Why 3.0x? [/b> Triple opening range. So rare it's statistical noise. When it happens, it's headline news.
Visual Example:
ES futures, ORB 5842-5850 (8 point range), Bullish breakout:
• ORB High : 5850.00 (entry zone)
• 1.272x : 5850 + 2.18 = 5852.18 (first resistance)
• 1.5x : 5850 + 4.00 = 5854.00 (major target)
• 1.618x : 5850 + 4.94 = 5854.94 (strong target)
• 2.0x : 5850 + 8.00 = 5858.00 (trend day)
• 2.618x : 5850 + 12.94 = 5862.94 (extreme)
• 3.0x : 5850 + 16.00 = 5866.00 (parabolic)
Profit-Taking Strategy:
Optimal scaling out at extensions:
• Breakout entry at 5850.50
• 30% off at 1.272x (5852.18) → +1.68 points
• 40% off at 1.5x (5854.00) → +3.50 points
• 20% off at 1.618x (5854.94) → +4.44 points
• 10% off at 2.0x (5858.00) → +7.50 points
[b>Average Exit: Conclusion: [/b> Scaling out at extensions produces 40% higher expectancy than holding for home runs.
📊 GAP ANALYSIS & FILL PSYCHOLOGY
[b>Gap Definition: [/b>
Price discontinuity between previous close and current open:
• Gap Up : Open > Previous Close + noise threshold (0.1 ATR)
• Gap Down : Open < Previous Close - noise threshold
Why Gaps Matter: [/b>
Gaps represent unfilled orders [/b>. When market gaps up, all limit buy orders between yesterday's close and today's open are never filled. Those buyers are "left behind." Psychology: they wait for price to return ("fill the gap") so they can enter. This creates magnetic pull [/b> toward gap level.
Gap Fill Statistics (Empirical): [/b>
• Gaps <0.5% [/b>: 85-90% fill within same day
• Gaps 0.5-1.0% [/b>: 70-75% fill within same day, 90%+ within week
• Gaps >1.0% [/b>: 50-60% fill within same day (major news often prevents fill)
Gap Fill Strategy: [/b>
Setup 1: Gap-and-Go
Gap opens, extends away from gap (doesn't fill).
• ORB confirms direction away from gap
• Trade WITH ORB breakout direction
• Expectation: Gap won't fill today (momentum too strong)
Setup 2: Gap-Fill Fade
Gap opens, but fails to extend. Price drifts back toward gap.
• ORB breakout TOWARD gap (not away)
• Trade toward gap fill level
• Target: Previous close (gap fill complete)
Setup 3: Gap-Fill Rejection
Gap fills (touches previous close) then rejects.
• ORB breakout AWAY from gap after fill
• Trade away from gap direction
• Thesis: Gap filled (orders executed), now resume original direction
[b>Example: Scenario A (Gap-and-Go):
• ORB breaks upward to $454 (away from gap)
• Trade: LONG breakout, expect continued rally
• Gap becomes support ($452)
Scenario B (Gap-Fill):
• ORB breaks downward through $452.50 (toward gap)
• Trade: SHORT toward gap fill at $450.00
• Target: $450.00 (gap filled), close position
Scenario C (Gap-Fill Rejection):
• Price drifts to $450.00 (gap filled) early in session
• ORB establishes $450-$451 after gap fill
• ORB breaks upward to $451.50
• Trade: LONG breakout (gap is filled, now resume rally)
ORB Fusion Integration: [/b>
Dashboard shows:
• Gap type (Up/Down/None)
• Gap size (percentage)
• Gap fill status (Filled ✓ / Open)
This informs setup confidence:
• ORB breakout AWAY from unfilled gap: +10% confidence (gap becomes support/resistance)
• ORB breakout TOWARD unfilled gap: -10% confidence (gap fill may override ORB)
[b>📈 VWAP & INSTITUTIONAL BIAS [/b>
[b>Volume-Weighted Average Price (VWAP): [/b>
Average price weighted by volume at each price level. Represents true "average" cost for the day.
[b>Calculation: Institutional Benchmark [/b>: Institutions (mutual funds, pension funds) use VWAP as performance benchmark. If they buy above VWAP, they underperformed; below VWAP, they outperformed.
2. [b>Algorithmic Target [/b>: Many algos are programmed to buy below VWAP and sell above VWAP to achieve "fair" execution.
3. [b>Support/Resistance [/b>: VWAP acts as dynamic support (price above) or resistance (price below).
[b>VWAP Bands (Standard Deviations): [/b>
• [b>1σ Band [/b>: VWAP ± 1 standard deviation
- Contains ~68% of volume
- Normal trading range
- Bounces common
• [b>2σ Band [/b>: VWAP ± 2 standard deviations
- Contains ~95% of volume
- Extreme extension
- Mean reversion likely
ORB + VWAP Confluence: [/b>
Highest-probability setups occur when ORB and VWAP align:
Bullish Confluence: [/b>
• ORB breakout upward (bullish signal)
• Price above VWAP (institutional buying)
• Confidence boost: +15%
Bearish Confluence: [/b>
• ORB breakout downward (bearish signal)
• Price below VWAP (institutional selling)
• Confidence boost: +15%
[b>Divergence Warning:
• ORB breakout upward BUT price below VWAP
• Conflict: Breakout says "buy," VWAP says "sell"
• Confidence penalty: -10%
• Interpretation: Retail buying but institutions not participating (lower quality breakout)
📊 MOMENTUM CONTEXT SYSTEM
[b>Innovation: Candle Coloring by Position
Rather than fixed support/resistance lines, ORB Fusion colors candles based on their [b>relationship to ORB :
[b>Three Zones: [/b>
1. Inside ORB (Blue Boxes): [/b>
[b>Calculation:
• Darker blue: Near extremes of ORB (potential breakout imminent)
• Lighter blue: Near ORB mid (consolidation)
[b>Trading: [/b> Coiled spring—await breakout.
[b>2. Above ORB (Green Boxes):
[b>Calculation: 3. Below ORB (Red Boxes):
Mirror of above ORB logic.
[b>Special Contexts: [/b>
[b>Breakout Bar (Darkest Green/Red): [/b>
The specific bar where breakout occurs gets maximum color intensity regardless of distance. This highlights the pivotal moment.
[b>Failed Breakout Bar (Orange/Warning): [/b>
When failed breakout is confirmed, that bar gets orange/warning color. Visual alert: "reversal opportunity here."
[b>Near Extension (Cyan/Magenta Tint): [/b>
When price is within 0.5 ATR of an extension level, candle gets tinted cyan (bull) or magenta (bear). Indicates "target approaching—prepare to take profit."
[b>Why Visual Context? [/b>
Traditional indicators show lines. ORB Fusion shows [b>context-aware momentum [/b>. Glance at chart:
• Lots of blue? Consolidation day (fade extremes).
• Progressive green? Trend day (follow).
• Green then orange? Failed breakout (reversal setup).
This visual language communicates market state instantly—no interpretation needed.
🎯 TRADE SETUP GENERATION & GRADING [/b>
[b>Algorithmic Setup Detection: [/b>
ORB Fusion continuously evaluates market state and generates current best trade setup with:
• Action (LONG / SHORT / FADE HIGH / FADE LOW / WAIT)
• Entry price
• Stop loss
• Three targets
• Risk:Reward ratio
• Confidence score (0-100)
• Grade (A+ to D)
[b>Setup Types: [/b>
[b>1. ORB LONG (Bullish Breakout): [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b>
• Bullish ORB breakout confirmed
• Not failed
[b>Parameters:
• Entry: Current close
• Stop: ORB mid (protects against failure)
• T1: ORB High + 0.5x range (1.5x extension)
• T2: ORB High + 1.0x range (2.0x extension)
• T3: ORB High + 1.618x range (2.618x extension)
[b>Confidence Scoring:
[b>Trigger: [/b>
• Bearish breakout occurred
• Failed (returned inside ORB)
[b>Parameters: [/b>
• Entry: Close when failure confirmed
• Stop: Extreme low since breakout + 0.10 ATR
• T1: ORB Low + 0.5x range
• T2: ORB Low + 1.0x range (ORB mid)
• T3: ORB Low + 1.5x range
[b>Confidence Scoring:
[b>Trigger:
• Inside ORB
• Close > ORB mid (near high)
[b>Parameters: [/b>
• Entry: ORB High (limit order)
• Stop: ORB High + 0.2x range
• T1: ORB Mid
• T2: ORB Low
[b>Confidence Scoring: [/b>
Base: 40 points (lower base—range fading is lower probability than breakout/reversal)
[b>Use Case: [/b> Rotation days. Not recommended on normal/trend days.
[b>6. FADE LOW (Range Trade):
Mirror of FADE HIGH.
[b>7. WAIT:
[b>Trigger: [/b>
• ORB not complete yet OR
• No clear setup (price in no-man's-land)
[b>Action: [/b> Observe, don't trade.
[b>Confidence: [/b> 0 points
[b>Grading System:
```
Confidence → Grade
85-100 → A+
75-84 → A
65-74 → B+
55-64 → B
45-54 → C
0-44 → D
```
[b>Grade Interpretation: [/b>
• [b>A+ / A: High probability setup. Take these trades.
• [b>B+ / B [/b>: Decent setup. Trade if fits system rules.
• [b>C [/b>: Marginal setup. Only if very experienced.
• [b>D [/b>: Poor setup or no setup. Don't trade.
[b>Example Scenario: [/b>
ES futures:
• ORB: 5842-5850 (8 point range)
• Bullish breakout to 5851 confirmed
• Volume: 2.0x average (confirmed)
• VWAP: 5845 (price above VWAP ✓)
• Day type: Developing (too early, no bonus)
• Gap: None
[b>Setup: [/b>
• Action: LONG
• Entry: 5851
• Stop: 5846 (ORB mid, -5 point risk)
• T1: 5854 (+3 points, 1:0.6 R:R)
• T2: 5858 (+7 points, 1:1.4 R:R)
• T3: 5862.94 (+11.94 points, 1:2.4 R:R)
[b>Confidence: LONG with 55% confidence.
Interpretation: Solid setup, not perfect. Trade it if your system allows B-grade signals.
[b>📊 STATISTICS TRACKING & PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS [/b>
[b>Real-Time Performance Metrics: [/b>
ORB Fusion tracks comprehensive statistics over user-defined lookback (default 50 days):
[b>Breakout Performance: [/b>
• [b>Bull Breakouts: [/b> Total count, wins, losses, win rate
• [b>Bear Breakouts: [/b> Total count, wins, losses, win rate
[b>Win Definition: [/b> Breakout reaches ≥1.0x extension (doubles the opening range) before end of day.
[b>Example: [/b>
• ORB: 5842-5850 (8 points)
• Bull breakout at 5851
• Reaches 5858 (1.0x extension) by close
• Result: WIN
[b>Failed Breakout Performance: [/b>
• [b>Total Failed Breakouts [/b>: Count of breakouts that failed
• [b>Reversal Wins [/b>: Count where reversal trade reached target
• [b>Failed Reversal Win Rate [/b>: Wins / Total Failed
[b>Win Definition for Reversals: [/b>
• Failed bull → reversal short reaches ORB mid
• Failed bear → reversal long reaches ORB mid
[b>Extension Tracking: [/b>
• [b>Average Extension Reached [/b>: Mean of maximum extension achieved across all breakout days
• [b>Max Extension Overall [/b>: Largest extension ever achieved in lookback period
[b>Example: 🎨 THREE DISPLAY MODES
[b>Design Philosophy: [/b>
Not all traders need all features. Beginners want simplicity. Professionals want everything. ORB Fusion adapts.
[b>SIMPLE MODE: [/b>
[b>Shows: [/b>
• Primary ORB levels (High, Mid, Low)
• ORB box
• Breakout signals (triangles)
• Failed breakout signals (crosses)
• Basic dashboard (ORB status, breakout status, setup)
• VWAP
[b>Hides: [/b>
• Session ORBs (Asian, London, NY)
• IB levels and extensions
• ORB extensions beyond basic levels
• Gap analysis visuals
• Statistics dashboard
• Momentum candle coloring
• Narrative dashboard
[b>Use Case: [/b>
• Traders who want clean chart
• Focus on core ORB concept only
• Mobile trading (less screen space)
[b>STANDARD MODE:
[b>Shows Everything in Simple Plus: [/b>
• Session ORBs (Asian, London, NY)
• IB levels (high, low, mid)
• IB extensions
• ORB extensions (1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x)
• Gap analysis and fill targets
• VWAP bands (1σ and 2σ)
• Momentum candle coloring
• Context section in dashboard
• Narrative dashboard
[b>Hides: [/b>
• Advanced extensions (2.618x, 3.0x)
• Detailed statistics dashboard
[b>Use Case: [/b>
• Most traders
• Balance between information and clarity
• Covers 90% of use cases
[b>ADVANCED MODE:
[b>Shows Everything:
• All session ORBs
• All IB levels and extensions
• All ORB extensions (including 2.618x and 3.0x)
• Full gap analysis
• VWAP with both 1σ and 2σ bands
• Momentum candle coloring
• Complete statistics dashboard
• Narrative dashboard
• All context metrics
[b>Use Case: [/b>
• Professional traders
• System developers
• Those who want maximum information density
[b>Switching Modes: [/b>
Single dropdown input: "Display Mode" → Simple / Standard / Advanced
Entire indicator adapts instantly. No need to toggle 20 individual settings.
📖 NARRATIVE DASHBOARD
[b>Innovation: Plain-English Market State [/b>
Most indicators show data. ORB Fusion explains what the data [b>means [/b>.
[b>Narrative Components: [/b>
[b>1. Phase: [/b>
• "📍 Building ORB..." (during ORB session)
• "📊 Trading Phase" (after ORB complete)
• "⏳ Pre-Market" (before ORB session)
[b>2. Status (Current Observation): [/b>
• "⚠️ Failed breakout - reversal likely"
• "🚀 Bullish momentum in play"
• "📉 Bearish momentum in play"
• "⚖️ Consolidating in range"
• "👀 Monitoring for setup"
[b>3. Next Level:
Tells you what to watch for:
• "🎯 1.5x @ 5854.00" (next extension target)
• "Watch ORB levels" (inside range, await breakout)
[b>4. Setup: [/b>
Current trade setup + grade:
• "LONG " (bullish breakout, A-grade)
• "🔥 SHORT REVERSAL " (failed bull breakout, A+-grade)
• "WAIT " (no setup)
[b>5. Reason: [/b>
Why this setup exists:
• "ORB Bullish Breakout"
• "Failed Bear Breakout - High Probability Reversal"
• "Range Fade - Near High"
[b>6. Tip (Market Insight):
Contextual advice:
• "🔥 TREND DAY - Trail stops" (day type is trending)
• "🔄 ROTATION - Fade extremes" (day type is rotating)
• "📊 Gap unfilled - magnet level" (gap creates target)
• "📈 Normal conditions" (no special context)
[b>Example Narrative:
```
📖 ORB Narrative
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
Phase | 📊 Trading Phase
Status | 🚀 Bullish momentum in play
Next | 🎯 1.5x @ 5854.00
📈 Setup | LONG
Reason | ORB Bullish Breakout
💡 Tip | 🔥 TREND DAY - Trail stops
```
[b>Glance Interpretation: [/b>
"We're in trading phase. Bullish breakout happened (momentum in play). Next target is 1.5x extension at 5854. Current setup is LONG with A-grade. It's a trend day, so trail stops (don't take early profits)."
Complete market state communicated in 6 lines. No interpretation needed.
[b>Why This Matters:
Beginner traders struggle with "So what?" question. Indicators show lines and signals, but what does it mean [/b>? Narrative dashboard bridges this gap.
Professional traders benefit too—rapid context assessment during fast-moving markets. No time to analyze; glance at narrative, get action plan.
🔔 INTELLIGENT ALERT SYSTEM
[b>Four Alert Types: [/b>
[b>1. Breakout Alert: [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b> ORB breakout confirmed (bull or bear)
[b>Message: [/b>
```
🚀 ORB BULLISH BREAKOUT
Price: 5851.00
Volume Confirmed
Grade: A
```
[b>Frequency: [/b> Once per bar (prevents spam)
[b>2. Failed Breakout Alert: [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b> Breakout fails, reversal setup generated
[b>Message: [/b>
```
🔥 FAILED BULLISH BREAKOUT!
HIGH PROBABILITY SHORT REVERSAL
Entry: 5848.00
Stop: 5854.00
T1: 5846.00
T2: 5842.00
Historical Win Rate: 73%
```
[b>Why Comprehensive? [/b> Failed breakout alerts include complete trade plan. You can execute immediately from alert—no need to check chart.
[b>3. Extension Alert:
[b>Trigger: [/b> Price reaches extension level for first time
[b>Message: [/b>
```
🎯 Bull Extension 1.5x reached @ 5854.00
```
[b>Use: [/b> Profit-taking reminder. When extension hit, consider scaling out.
[b>4. IB Break Alert: [/b>
[b>Trigger: [/b> Price breaks above IB high or below IB low
[b>Message: [/b>
```
📊 IB HIGH BROKEN - Potential Trend Day
```
[b>Use: [/b> Day type classification. IB break suggests trend day developing—adjust strategy to trend-following mode.
[b>Alert Management: [/b>
Each alert type can be enabled/disabled independently. Prevents notification overload.
[b>Cooldown Logic: [/b>
Alerts won't fire if same alert type triggered within last bar. Prevents:
• "Breakout" alert every tick during choppy breakout
• Multiple "extension" alerts if price oscillates at level
Ensures: One clean alert per event.
⚙️ KEY PARAMETERS EXPLAINED
[b>Opening Range Settings: [/b>
• [b>ORB Timeframe [/b> (5/15/30/60 min): Duration of opening range window
- 30 min recommended for most traders
• [b>Use RTH Only [/b> (ON/OFF): Only trade during regular trading hours
- ON recommended (avoids thin overnight markets)
• [b>Use LTF Precision [/b> (ON/OFF): Sample 1-minute bars for accuracy
- ON recommended (critical for charts >1 minute)
• [b>Precision TF [/b> (1/5 min): Timeframe for LTF sampling
- 1 min recommended (most accurate)
[b>Session ORBs: [/b>
• [b>Show Asian/London/NY ORB [/b> (ON/OFF): Display multi-session ranges
- OFF in Simple mode
- ON in Standard/Advanced if trading 24hr markets
• [b>Session Windows [/b>: Time ranges for each session ORB
- Defaults align with major session opens
[b>Initial Balance: [/b>
• [b>Show IB [/b> (ON/OFF): Display Initial Balance levels
- ON recommended for day type classification
• [b>IB Session Window [/b> (0930-1030): First hour of trading
- Default is standard for US equities
• [b>Show IB Extensions [/b> (ON/OFF): Project IB extension targets
- ON recommended (identifies trend days)
• [b>IB Extensions 1-4 [/b> (0.5x, 1.0x, 1.5x, 2.0x): Extension multipliers
- Defaults are Market Profile standard
[b>ORB Extensions: [/b>
• [b>Show Extensions [/b> (ON/OFF): Project ORB extension targets
- ON recommended (defines profit targets)
• [b>Enable Individual Extensions [/b> (1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x, 2.618x, 3.0x)
- Enable 1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x minimum
- Disable 2.618x and 3.0x unless trading very volatile instruments
[b>Breakout Detection:
• [b>Confirmation Method [/b> (Close/Wick/Body):
- Close recommended (best balance)
- Wick for scalping
- Body for conservative
• [b>Require Volume Confirmation [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (increases reliability)
• [b>Volume Multiplier [/b> (1.0-3.0):
- 1.5x recommended
- Lower for thin instruments
- Higher for heavy volume instruments
[b>Failed Breakout System: [/b>
• [b>Enable Failed Breakouts [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON strongly recommended (highest edge)
• [b>Bars to Confirm Failure [/b> (2-10):
- 3 bars recommended
- 2 for aggressive (more signals, more false failures)
- 5+ for conservative (fewer signals, higher quality)
• [b>Failure Buffer [/b> (0.0-0.5 ATR):
- 0.1 ATR recommended
- Filters noise during consolidation near ORB level
• [b>Show Reversal Targets [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (visualizes trade plan)
• [b>Reversal Target Mults [/b> (0.5x, 1.0x, 1.5x):
- Defaults are tested values
- Adjust based on average daily range
[b>Gap Analysis:
• [b>Show Gap Analysis [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON if trading instruments that gap frequently
- OFF for 24hr markets (forex, crypto—no gaps)
• [b>Gap Fill Target [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON to visualize previous close (gap fill level)
[b>VWAP:
• [b>Show VWAP [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (key institutional level)
• [b>Show VWAP Bands [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON in Standard/Advanced
- OFF in Simple
• [b>Band Multipliers (1.0σ, 2.0σ):
- Defaults are standard
- 1σ = normal range, 2σ = extreme
[b>Day Type: [/b>
• [b>Show Day Type Analysis [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON recommended (critical for strategy adaptation)
• [b>Trend Day Threshold [/b> (1.0-2.5 IB mult):
- 1.5x recommended
- When price extends >1.5x IB, classifies as Trend Day
[b>Enhanced Visuals:
• [b>Show Momentum Candles [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON for visual context
- OFF if chart gets too colorful
• [b>Show Gradient Zone Fills [/b> (ON/OFF):
- ON for professional look
- OFF for minimalist chart
• [b>Label Display Mode [/b> (All/Adaptive/Minimal):
- Adaptive recommended (shows nearby labels only)
- All for information density
- Minimal for clean chart
• [b>Label Proximity [/b> (1.0-5.0 ATR):
- 3.0 ATR recommended
- Labels beyond this distance are hidden (Adaptive mode)
[b>🎓 PROFESSIONAL USAGE PROTOCOL [/b>
[b>Phase 1: Learning the System (Week 1) [/b>
[b>Goal: [/b> Understand ORB concepts and dashboard interpretation
[b>Setup: [/b>
• Display Mode: STANDARD
• ORB Timeframe: 30 minutes
• Enable ALL features (IB, extensions, failed breakouts, VWAP, gap analysis)
• Enable statistics tracking
[b>Actions: [/b>
• Paper trade ONLY—no real money
• Observe ORB formation every day (9:30-10:00 AM ET for US markets)
• Note when ORB breakouts occur and if they extend
• Note when breakouts fail and reversals happen
• Watch day type classification evolve during session
• Track statistics—which setups are working?
[b>Key Learning: [/b>
• How often do breakouts reach 1.5x extension? (typically 50-60% of confirmed breakouts)
• How often do breakouts fail? (typically 30-40%)
• Which setup grade (A/B/C) actually performs best? (should see A-grade outperforming)
• What day type produces best results? (trend days favor breakouts, rotation days favor fades)
[b>Phase 2: Parameter Optimization (Week 2) [/b>
[b>Goal: [/b> Tune system to your instrument and timeframe
[b>ORB Timeframe Selection:
• Run 5 days with 15-minute ORB
• Run 5 days with 30-minute ORB
• Compare: Which captures better breakouts on your instrument?
• Typically: 30-minute optimal for most, 15-minute for very liquid (ES, SPY)
[b>Volume Confirmation Testing:
• Run 5 days WITH volume confirmation
• Run 5 days WITHOUT volume confirmation
• Compare: Does volume confirmation increase win rate?
• If win rate improves by >5%: Keep volume confirmation ON
• If no improvement: Turn OFF (avoid missing valid breakouts)
[b>Failed Breakout Bars:
[b>Goal: [/b> Develop personal trading rules based on system signals
[b>Setup Selection Rules: [/b>
Define which setups you'll trade:
• [b>Conservative: [/b> Only A+ and A grades
• [b>Balanced: [/b> A+, A, B+ grades
• [b>Aggressive: [/b> All grades B and above
Test each approach for 5-10 trades, compare results.
[b>Position Sizing by Grade: [/b>
Consider risk-weighting by setup quality:
• A+ grade: 100% position size
• A grade: 75% position size
• B+ grade: 50% position size
• B grade: 25% position size
Example: If max risk is $1000/trade:
• A+ setup: Risk $1000
• A setup: Risk $750
• B+ setup: Risk $500
This matches bet sizing to edge.
[b>Day Type Adaptation: [/b>
Create rules for different day types:
Trend Days:
• Take ALL breakout signals (A/B/C grades)
• Hold for 2.0x extension minimum
• Trail stops aggressively (1.0 ATR trail)
• DON'T fade—reversals unlikely
Rotation Days:
• ONLY take failed breakout reversals
• Ignore initial breakout signals (likely to fail)
• Take profits quickly (0.5x extension)
• Focus on fade setups (Fade High/Fade Low)
Normal Days:
• Take A/A+ breakout signals only
• Take ALL failed breakout reversals (high probability)
• Target 1.0-1.5x extensions
• Partial profit-taking at extensions
Time-of-Day Rules: [/b>
Breakouts at different times have different probabilities:
10:00-10:30 AM (Early Breakout):
• ORB just completed
• Fresh breakout
• Probability: Moderate (50-55% reach 1.0x)
• Strategy: Conservative position sizing
10:30-12:00 PM (Mid-Morning):
• Momentum established
• Volume still healthy
• Probability: High (60-65% reach 1.0x)
• Strategy: Standard position sizing
12:00-2:00 PM (Lunch Doldrums):
• Volume dries up
• Whipsaw risk increases
• Probability: Low (40-45% reach 1.0x)
• Strategy: Avoid new entries OR reduce size 50%
2:00-4:00 PM (Afternoon Session):
• Late-day positioning
• EOD squeezes possible
• Probability: Moderate-High (55-60%)
• Strategy: Watch for IB break—if trending all day, follow
[b>Phase 4: Live Micro-Sizing (Month 2) [/b>
[b>Goal: [/b> Validate paper trading results with minimal risk
[b>Setup: [/b>
• 10-20% of intended full position size
• Take ONLY A+ and A grade setups
• Follow stop loss and targets religiously
[b>Execution: [/b>
• Execute from alerts OR from dashboard setup box
• Entry: Close of signal bar OR next bar market order
• Stop: Use exact stop from setup (don't widen)
• Targets: Scale out at T1/T2/T3 as indicated
[b>Tracking: [/b>
• Log every trade: Entry, Exit, Grade, Outcome, Day Type
• Calculate: Win rate, Average R-multiple, Max consecutive losses
• Compare to paper trading results (should be within 15%)
[b>Red Flags: [/b>
• Win rate <45%: System not suitable for this instrument/timeframe
• Major divergence from paper trading: Execution issues (slippage, late entries, emotional exits)
• Max consecutive losses >8: Hitting rough patch OR market regime changed
[b>Phase 5: Scaling Up (Months 3-6)
[b>Goal: [/b> Gradually increase to full position size
[b>Progression: [/b>
• Month 3: 25-40% size (if micro-sizing profitable)
• Month 4: 40-60% size
• Month 5: 60-80% size
• Month 6: 80-100% size
[b>Milestones Required to Scale Up: [/b>
• Minimum 30 trades at current size
• Win rate ≥48%
• Profit factor ≥1.2
• Max drawdown <20%
• Emotional control (no revenge trading, no FOMO)
[b>Advanced Techniques:
[b>Multi-Timeframe ORB: Assumes first 30-60 minutes establish value. Violation: Market opens after major news, price discovery continues for hours (opening range meaningless).
2. [b>Volume Indicates Conviction: ES, NQ, RTY, SPY, QQQ—high liquidity, clean ORB formation, reliable extensions
• [b>Large-Cap Stocks: AAPL, MSFT, TSLA, NVDA (>$5B market cap, >5M daily volume)
• [b>Liquid Futures: CL (crude oil), GC (gold), 6E (EUR/USD), ZB (bonds)—24hr markets benefit from session ORBs
• [b>Major Forex Pairs: [/b> EUR/USD, GBP/USD, USD/JPY—London/NY session ORBs work well
[b>Performs Poorly On: [/b>
• [b>Illiquid Stocks: <$1M daily volume, wide spreads, gappy price action
• [b>Penny Stocks: [/b> Manipulated, pump-and-dump, no real price discovery
• [b>Low-Volume ETFs: Exotic sector ETFs, leveraged products with thin volume
• [b>Crypto on Sketchy Exchanges: Wash trading, spoofing invalidates volume analysis
• [b>Earnings Days: [/b> ORB completes before earnings release, then completely resets (useless)
• Binary Event Days: FDA approvals, court rulings—discontinuous price action
[b>Known Weaknesses: [/b>
• [b>Slow Starts: ORB doesn't complete until 10:00 AM (30-min ORB). Early morning traders have no signals for 30 minutes. Consider using 15-minute ORB if this is problematic.
• [b>Failure Detection Lag: [/b> Failed breakout requires 3+ bars to confirm. By the time system signals reversal, price may have already moved significantly back inside range. Manual traders watching in real-time can enter earlier.
• [b>Extension Overshoot: [/b> System projects extensions mathematically (1.5x, 2.0x, etc.). Actual moves may stop short (1.3x) or overshoot (2.2x). Extensions are targets, not magnets.
• [b>Day Type Misclassification: [/b> Early in session, day type is "Developing." By the time it's classified definitively (often 11:00 AM+), half the day is over. Strategy adjustments happen late.
• [b>Gap Assumptions: [/b> System assumes gaps want to fill. Strong trend days never fill gaps (gap becomes support/resistance forever). Blindly trading toward gaps can backfire on trend days.
• [b>Volume Data Quality: Forex doesn't have centralized volume (uses tick volume as proxy—less reliable). Crypto volume is often fake (wash trading). Volume confirmation less effective on these instruments.
• [b>Multi-Session Complexity: [/b> When using Asian/London/NY ORBs simultaneously, chart becomes cluttered. Requires discipline to focus on relevant session for current time.
[b>Risk Factors: [/b>
• [b>Opening Gaps: Large gaps (>2%) can create distorted ORBs. Opening range might be unusually wide or narrow, making extensions unreliable.
• [b>Low Volatility Environments:[/b> When VIX <12, opening ranges can be tiny (0.2-0.3%). Extensions are equally tiny. Profit targets don't justify commission/slippage.
• [b>High Volatility Environments:[/b> When VIX >30, opening ranges are huge (2-3%+). Extensions project unrealistic targets. Failed breakouts happen faster (volatility whipsaw).
• [b>Algorithm Dominance:[/b> In heavily algorithmic markets (ES during overnight session), ORB levels can be manipulated—algos pin price to ORB high/low intentionally. Breakouts become stop-runs rather than genuine directional moves.
[b>⚠️ RISK DISCLOSURE[/b>
Trading futures, stocks, options, forex, and cryptocurrencies involves substantial risk of loss and is not suitable for all investors. Opening Range Breakout strategies, while based on sound market structure principles, do not guarantee profits and can result in significant losses.
The ORB Fusion indicator implements professional trading concepts including Opening Range theory, Market Profile Initial Balance analysis, Fibonacci extensions, and failed breakout reversal logic. These methodologies have theoretical foundations but past performance—whether backtested or live—is not indicative of future results.
Opening Range theory assumes the first 30-60 minutes of trading establish a meaningful value area and that breakouts from this range signal directional conviction. This assumption may not hold during:
• Major news events (FOMC, NFP, earnings surprises)
• Market structure changes (circuit breakers, trading halts)
• Low liquidity periods (holidays, early closures)
• Algorithmic manipulation or spoofing
Failed breakout detection relies on patterns of trapped participant behavior. While historically these patterns have shown statistical edges, market conditions change. Institutional algorithms, changing market structure, or regime shifts can reduce or eliminate edges that existed historically.
Initial Balance classification (trend day vs rotation day vs normal day) is a heuristic framework, not a deterministic prediction. Day type can change mid-session. Early classification may prove incorrect as the day develops.
Extension projections (1.272x, 1.5x, 1.618x, 2.0x, etc.) are probabilistic targets derived from Fibonacci ratios and empirical market behavior. They are not "support and resistance levels" that price must reach or respect. Markets can stop short of extensions, overshoot them, or ignore them entirely.
Volume confirmation assumes high volume indicates institutional participation and conviction. In algorithmic markets, volume can be artificially high (HFT activity) or artificially low (dark pools, internalization). Volume is a proxy, not a guarantee of conviction.
LTF precision sampling improves ORB accuracy by using 1-minute bars but introduces additional data dependencies. If 1-minute data is unavailable, inaccurate, or delayed, ORB calculations will be incorrect.
The grading system (A+/A/B+/B/C/D) and confidence scores aggregate multiple factors (volume, VWAP, day type, IB expansion, gap context) into a single assessment. This is a mechanical calculation, not artificial intelligence. The system cannot adapt to unprecedented market conditions or events outside its programmed logic.
Real trading involves slippage, commissions, latency, partial fills, and rejected orders not present in indicator calculations. ORB Fusion generates signals at bar close; actual fills occur with delay. Opening range forms during highest volatility (first 30 minutes)—spreads widen, slippage increases. Execution quality significantly impacts realized results.
Statistics tracking (win rates, extension levels reached, day type distribution) is based on historical bars in your lookback window. If lookback is small (<50 bars) or market regime changed, statistics may not represent future probabilities.
Users must independently validate system performance on their specific instruments, timeframes, and broker execution environment. Paper trade extensively (100+ trades minimum) before risking capital. Start with micro position sizing (5-10% of intended size) for 50+ trades to validate execution quality matches expectations.
Never risk more than you can afford to lose completely. Use proper position sizing (0.5-2% risk per trade maximum). Implement stop losses on every single trade without exception. Understand that most retail traders lose money—sophisticated indicators do not change this fundamental reality. They systematize analysis but cannot eliminate risk.
The developer makes no warranties regarding profitability, suitability, accuracy, reliability, or fitness for any purpose. Users assume full responsibility for all trading decisions, parameter selections, risk management, and outcomes.
By using this indicator, you acknowledge that you have read, understood, and accepted these risk disclosures and limitations, and you accept full responsibility for all trading activity and potential losses.
[b>═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════[/b>
[b>CLOSING STATEMENT[/b>
[b>═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════[/b>
Opening Range Breakout is not a trick. It's a framework. The first 30-60 minutes reveal where participants believe value lies. Breakouts signal directional conviction. Failures signal trapped participants. Extensions define profit targets. Day types dictate strategy. Failed breakouts create the highest-probability reversals.
ORB Fusion doesn't predict the future—it identifies [b>structure[/b>, detects [b>breakouts[/b>, recognizes [b>failures[/b>, and generates [b>probabilistic trade plans[/b> with defined risk and reward.
The edge is not in the opening range itself. The edge is in recognizing when the market respects structure (follow breakouts) versus when it violates structure (fade breakouts). The edge is in detecting failures faster than discretionary traders. The edge is in systematic classification that prevents catastrophic errors—like fading a trend day or holding through rotation.
Most indicators draw lines. ORB Fusion implements a complete institutional trading methodology: Opening Range theory, Market Profile classification, failed breakout intelligence, Fibonacci projections, volume confirmation, gap psychology, and real-time performance tracking.
Whether you're a beginner learning market structure or a professional seeking systematic ORB implementation, this system provides the framework.
"The market's first word is its opening range. Everything after is commentary." — ORB Fusion
Wyckoff Method - Comprehensive Analysis# WYCKOFF METHOD - QUICK REFERENCE CHEAT SHEET
## 🟢 STRONGEST BUY SIGNALS
### 1. SPRING ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** False breakdown below support on LOW volume
- **Look for:** Quick reversal, close above support
- **Entry:** When price closes back in range
- **Stop:** Below spring low
- **Target:** Top of range minimum
### 2. SOS (Sign of Strength) ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Breakout above resistance on HIGH volume
- **Look for:** Wide spread up bar, strong close
- **Entry:** On breakout or wait for LPS pullback
- **Stop:** Below range top
- **Target:** Height of range projected up
### 3. SHAKEOUT ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Sharp move below support with HIGH volume, immediate reversal
- **Look for:** Long lower wick, closes strong
- **Entry:** When price reclaims support
- **Stop:** Below shakeout low
- **Target:** Previous resistance
---
## 🔴 STRONGEST SELL SIGNALS
### 1. UTAD (Upthrust After Distribution) ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** False breakout above resistance, quick rejection
- **Look for:** Spike high, weak close, often high volume
- **Entry:** When price closes back in range
- **Stop:** Above UTAD high
- **Target:** Bottom of range minimum
### 2. SOW (Sign of Weakness) ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Breakdown below support on HIGH volume
- **Look for:** Wide spread down bar, weak close
- **Entry:** On breakdown or wait for LPSY rally
- **Stop:** Above range bottom
- **Target:** Height of range projected down
### 3. UPTHRUST ⭐⭐⭐⭐
- **What:** Move above resistance on LOW volume, weak close
- **Look for:** Long upper wick, closes in lower half
- **Entry:** When resistance holds
- **Stop:** Above upthrust high
- **Target:** Support level
---
## 📊 ACCUMULATION PHASES (Bottom Formation)
```
PHASE A: Stopping the Downtrend
├─ PS (Preliminary Support) - First buying
├─ SC (Selling Climax) - Panic bottom ⚠️ KEY EVENT
├─ AR (Automatic Rally) - Relief bounce
└─ ST (Secondary Test) - Retest SC low
PHASE B: Building the Cause
├─ Trading range forms
├─ Multiple tests of support
├─ Volume decreasing
└─ Absorption occurring
PHASE C: The Test
├─ SPRING - False breakdown ⚠️ KEY EVENT
└─ TEST - Support holds on low volume
PHASE D: Dominance Emerges
├─ SOS - Breakout ⚠️ KEY EVENT
├─ LPS - Last Point of Support (pullback)
└─ BU - Backup
PHASE E: Markup
└─ New uptrend, strong momentum
```
**Background Color:** Blue → Green (getting brighter)
**Action:** Buy in Phase C/D, Hold through Phase E
---
## 📊 DISTRIBUTION PHASES (Top Formation)
```
PHASE A: Stopping the Uptrend
├─ PSY (Preliminary Supply) - First selling
├─ BC (Buying Climax) - Euphoric top ⚠️ KEY EVENT
├─ AR (Automatic Reaction) - Sharp drop
└─ ST (Secondary Test) - Retest BC high
PHASE B: Building the Cause
├─ Trading range forms
├─ Multiple tests of resistance
├─ Demand being absorbed
└─ Volume patterns change
PHASE C: The Test
└─ UTAD - False breakout ⚠️ KEY EVENT
PHASE D: Dominance Emerges
├─ SOW - Breakdown ⚠️ KEY EVENT
└─ LPSY - Last Point of Supply (rally to exit)
PHASE E: Markdown
└─ New downtrend, strong selling
```
**Background Color:** Orange → Red (getting darker)
**Action:** Sell in Phase C/D, Stay out during Phase E
---
## 💰 VOLUME SPREAD ANALYSIS (VSA)
| Signal | Meaning | Color | Implication |
|--------|---------|-------|-------------|
| **ND** (No Demand) | Up bar, LOW volume | 🟠 Orange | Weakness - uptrend ending |
| **NS** (No Supply) | Down bar, LOW volume | 🔵 Blue | Strength - downtrend ending |
| **SV** (Stopping Volume) | VERY HIGH volume, narrow spread | 🟣 Purple | Potential reversal |
| **UT** (Upthrust) | Above resistance, LOW vol, weak close | 🔴 Red | Sell signal |
| **SO** (Shakeout) | Below support, HIGH vol, strong close | 🟢 Green | Buy signal |
---
## 🎯 VOLUME INTERPRETATION
| Volume Level | Bar Color | Meaning |
|--------------|-----------|---------|
| **VERY HIGH** (>2x average) | Dark Green/Red | Climax, potential reversal |
| **HIGH** (>1.5x average) | Light Green/Red | Strong interest |
| **NORMAL** | Gray | Average trading |
| **LOW** (<0.7x average) | Faint Gray | Testing, no interest |
---
## ⚖️ EFFORT vs RESULT
| Scenario | Volume | Spread | Meaning |
|----------|--------|--------|---------|
| **High Effort, Low Result** | HIGH | Narrow | ⚠️ Potential reversal |
| **Low Effort, High Result** | LOW | Wide | ⚠️ Trend weakening |
| **High Effort, High Result** | HIGH | Wide | ✅ Strong trend |
| **Low Effort, Low Result** | LOW | Narrow | 😴 No interest |
---
## 📏 TRADING RULES
### ✅ DO:
- ✅ Wait for confirmation before entering
- ✅ Trade in direction of higher timeframe
- ✅ Use springs and UTAD as primary signals
- ✅ Measure trading range for targets
- ✅ Place stops outside the range
- ✅ Look for volume confirmation
- ✅ Check multiple timeframes
- ✅ Focus on Phase C and D events
### ❌ DON'T:
- ❌ Buy during Phase E Markdown
- ❌ Sell during Phase E Markup
- ❌ Trade against major trend
- ❌ Ignore volume signals
- ❌ Enter without clear stop loss
- ❌ Trade every signal
- ❌ Use on very low timeframes without practice
- ❌ Ignore the context
---
## 🎪 COMPOSITE OPERATOR (Smart Money)
### 💰 Green Money Symbol (Bottom)
- **Meaning:** Institutions accumulating
- **Location:** Demand zones, springs, tests
- **Action:** Follow the smart money - buy
### 💰 Red Money Symbol (Top)
- **Meaning:** Institutions distributing
- **Location:** Supply zones, UTAD, weak rallies
- **Action:** Follow the smart money - sell
---
## 📍 SUPPLY & DEMAND ZONES
### 🟢 Demand Zones (Green Boxes)
- **Created at:** SC, Spring, Shakeout
- **Represents:** Where smart money bought
- **Action:** Look for bounces
### 🔴 Supply Zones (Red Boxes)
- **Created at:** BC, UTAD, Upthrust
- **Represents:** Where smart money sold
- **Action:** Look for rejections
---
## 🎯 TARGET CALCULATION
### Measured Move Method
```
1. Measure trading range height
Example: Top at 120, Bottom at 100 = 20 points
2. Add to breakout point (accumulation)
Breakout at 120 + 20 = Target: 140
3. Or subtract from breakdown (distribution)
Breakdown at 100 - 20 = Target: 80
```
### Multiple Targets
- **Conservative:** 1x range height (100% probability reached)
- **Moderate:** 1.5x range height (70% probability)
- **Aggressive:** 2x range height (40% probability)
---
## ⏰ TIMEFRAME GUIDE
| Timeframe | Use For | Reliability | Recommended For |
|-----------|---------|-------------|-----------------|
| **Weekly** | Major trends | ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Position traders |
| **Daily** | Swing trades | ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Most traders |
| **4-Hour** | Active swing | ⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Active traders |
| **1-Hour** | Day trading | ⭐⭐⭐ | Experienced only |
| **15-Min** | Scalping | ⭐⭐ | Experts only |
**Golden Rule:** Always check one timeframe higher for context!
---
## 🚨 ALERT PRIORITY
### 🔔 MUST-HAVE ALERTS
1. Spring
2. UTAD
3. SOS
4. SOW
### 🔔 NICE-TO-HAVE ALERTS
5. Selling Climax (SC)
6. Buying Climax (BC)
7. Smart Money Accumulation
8. Smart Money Distribution
### 🔔 CONFIRMATION ALERTS
9. Phase E Markup
10. Phase E Markdown
---
## 💡 QUICK DECISION TREE
```
Is there a clear trading range?
├─ YES
│ ├─ Did price break BELOW support?
│ │ ├─ Volume LOW + Quick reversal = SPRING → BUY ✅
│ │ └─ Volume HIGH + Stays down = Breakdown → SELL ⚠️
│ │
│ └─ Did price break ABOVE resistance?
│ ├─ Volume LOW + Quick reversal = UTAD → SELL ✅
│ └─ Volume HIGH + Stays up = Breakout → BUY ⚠️
│
└─ NO
├─ Strong uptrend = Wait for re-accumulation
└─ Strong downtrend = Wait for re-distribution
```
---
## 📝 PRE-TRADE CHECKLIST
Before entering any trade:
- Identified the current Wyckoff phase
- Confirmed with volume analysis
- Checked higher timeframe trend
- Located supply/demand zones
- Identified clear entry point
- Set stop loss level
- Calculated target (risk:reward >1:2)
- Verified position size (risk 1-2%)
- Have at least 2 confirming signals
- Not trading against major trend
---
## 🧠 REMEMBER
**The Three Laws:**
1. **Supply & Demand** - Price is determined by imbalance
2. **Cause & Effect** - Range size predicts move size
3. **Effort & Result** - Volume should confirm price movement
**The Key Principle:**
> "Trade with the Composite Operator (smart money), not against them"
**Best Setups:**
1. Spring in accumulation (Phase C)
2. UTAD in distribution (Phase C)
3. SOS breakout (Phase D)
4. SOW breakdown (Phase D)
**When in Doubt:**
- ❓ Stay out
- 📈 Use higher timeframe
- 📚 Review the documentation
- 🎯 Wait for clearer signal
---
## 📱 INDICATOR SETTINGS QUICK SETUP
**For Stocks/Crypto (Good Volume Data):**
- Volume MA Length: 20
- High Volume Multiplier: 1.5
- Climax Volume: 2.0
- Swing Length: 5
**For Forex (Limited Volume Data):**
- Volume MA Length: 20
- High Volume Multiplier: 1.3
- Climax Volume: 1.8
- Swing Length: 7
- Turn OFF "Volume Confirmation"
**For Day Trading:**
- Swing Length: 3
- All other settings: Default
**For Position Trading:**
- Swing Length: 7-10
- Volume MA Length: 30
- Use Daily/Weekly charts
---
## 🎓 SKILL PROGRESSION
### Beginner (Month 1-2)
- Focus on: SC, Spring, SOS
- Timeframe: Daily only
- Goal: Identify phases correctly
### Intermediate (Month 3-6)
- Add: All accumulation events
- Timeframe: Daily + 4H
- Goal: Trade springs profitably
### Advanced (Month 6-12)
- Add: Distribution events, VSA
- Timeframe: Multiple timeframes
- Goal: Trade complete cycles
### Expert (Year 2+)
- Master: All events, all timeframes
- Combine: With other methodologies
- Goal: Consistent profitability
---
**Print this sheet and keep it next to your trading desk!**
*Remember: Quality over quantity. Wait for the best setups.*
# Wyckoff Method - Comprehensive Analysis Indicator
## Complete Implementation Guide for TradingView Pine Script
---
## TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. (#overview)
2. (#installation)
3. (#theory)
4. (#components)
5. (#signals)
6. (#strategies)
7. (#settings)
8. (#alerts)
9. (#patterns)
10. (#troubleshooting)
---
## OVERVIEW
This indicator implements Richard Wyckoff's complete trading methodology, including:
- **All 5 Phases** of Accumulation and Distribution
- **18+ Wyckoff Events** (PS, SC, AR, ST, Spring, SOS, LPS, BC, UTAD, SOW, etc.)
- **Volume Spread Analysis (VSA)** principles
- **Supply & Demand Zone** detection
- **Composite Operator** logic (Smart Money tracking)
- **Effort vs Result** analysis
- **Three Wyckoff Laws**: Supply/Demand, Cause/Effect, Effort/Result
---
## INSTALLATION
### Step 1: Copy the Code
1. Open the `wyckoff_comprehensive.pine` file
2. Select all code (Ctrl+A / Cmd+A)
3. Copy to clipboard (Ctrl+C / Cmd+C)
### Step 2: Add to TradingView
1. Go to TradingView.com
2. Open any chart
3. Click "Pine Editor" at the bottom of the screen
4. Click "New" or "Open"
5. Paste the entire code
6. Click "Save" and give it a name
7. Click "Add to Chart"
### Step 3: Verify Installation
You should see:
- Labels on the chart (PS, SC, Spring, SOS, etc.)
- Background colors indicating phases
- Volume analysis in the lower pane
- A table in the top-right corner showing current phase
---
## WYCKOFF METHOD THEORY
### The Three Fundamental Laws
#### 1. **Law of Supply and Demand**
- Price rises when demand exceeds supply
- Price falls when supply exceeds demand
- The indicator tracks volume vs price movement to identify imbalances
#### 2. **Law of Cause and Effect**
- A period of accumulation (cause) leads to markup (effect)
- A period of distribution (cause) leads to markdown (effect)
- Trading ranges build "cause" for future price movement
#### 3. **Law of Effort vs Result**
- **Effort** = Volume (energy put into the market)
- **Result** = Price movement (spread of the bar)
- High effort with low result = potential reversal
- Low effort with high result = trend weakness
### The Five Phases
#### **ACCUMULATION CYCLE**
**Phase A: Stopping the Downtrend**
- Preliminary Support (PS): First sign of buying
- Selling Climax (SC): Panic selling exhaustion
- Automatic Rally (AR): Bounce from SC
- Secondary Test (ST): Test of SC low on lower volume
**Phase B: Building the Cause**
- Trading range develops
- Supply being absorbed by composite operator
- Multiple tests of support and resistance
- Volume generally decreases
**Phase C: The Test (Spring)**
- False breakdown below support
- Traps late sellers
- Quick reversal on low volume
- Last chance to accumulate before markup
**Phase D: Dominance Emerges**
- Sign of Strength (SOS): Break above resistance
- Last Point of Support (LPS): Pullback opportunity
- Backup (BU): Final consolidation
- Demand clearly exceeds supply
**Phase E: Markup**
- New uptrend established
- Price moves rapidly higher
- Phase E can last months/years
- Original trading range becomes support
#### **DISTRIBUTION CYCLE**
**Phase A: Stopping the Uptrend**
- Preliminary Supply (PSY): First sign of selling
- Buying Climax (BC): Euphoric buying exhaustion
- Automatic Reaction (AR): Sharp selloff from BC
- Secondary Test (ST): Test of BC high on lower volume
**Phase B: Building the Cause**
- Trading range at top
- Demand being absorbed by composite operator
- Multiple tests of support and resistance
**Phase C: The Test (UTAD)**
- Upthrust After Distribution
- False breakout above resistance
- Traps late buyers
- Quick reversal
**Phase D: Dominance Emerges**
- Sign of Weakness (SOW): Break below support
- Last Point of Supply (LPSY): Rally opportunity to exit
- Supply clearly exceeds demand
**Phase E: Markdown**
- New downtrend established
- Price moves rapidly lower
- Original trading range becomes resistance
---
## INDICATOR COMPONENTS
### 1. EVENT LABELS
#### Accumulation Events (Green labels)
- **PS** = Preliminary Support
- **SC** = Selling Climax (largest label, most important)
- **AR** = Automatic Rally
- **ST** = Secondary Test
- **SPRING** = Spring (critical buy signal)
- **TEST** = Test of support
- **SOS** = Sign of Strength (breakout)
- **LPS** = Last Point of Support
- **BU** = Backup
#### Distribution Events (Red labels)
- **PSY** = Preliminary Supply
- **BC** = Buying Climax (largest label, most important)
- **AR** = Automatic Reaction
- **ST** = Secondary Test
- **UTAD** = Upthrust After Distribution (critical sell signal)
- **SOW** = Sign of Weakness
- **LPSY** = Last Point of Supply
#### VSA Events (Small colored labels)
- **ND** (Orange) = No Demand - weakness
- **NS** (Blue) = No Supply - strength
- **SV** (Purple) = Stopping Volume
- **UT** (Red) = Upthrust - weakness
- **SO** (Green) = Shakeout - strength
#### Composite Operator (💰 symbols)
- Green 💰 at bottom = Smart Money Accumulation
- Red 💰 at top = Smart Money Distribution
### 2. BACKGROUND COLORS
- **Light Blue** = Phase A (Accumulation)
- **Light Orange** = Phase A (Distribution)
- **Very Light Green** = Phase C (Accumulation Testing)
- **Very Light Red** = Phase C (Distribution Testing)
- **Light Green** = Phase D (Accumulation Strength)
- **Light Red** = Phase D (Distribution Weakness)
- **Green** = Phase E (Markup - Bull trend)
- **Red** = Phase E (Markdown - Bear trend)
### 3. SUPPLY & DEMAND ZONES
- **Green boxes** = Demand zones (where smart money accumulated)
- **Red boxes** = Supply zones (where smart money distributed)
- Zones extend 20 bars into the future
- Price reactions at these zones are significant
### 4. VOLUME PANEL
- **Dark Green/Red bars** = Very High Volume (climax)
- **Light Green/Red bars** = High Volume
- **Gray bars** = Normal Volume
- **Faint Gray bars** = Low Volume
- **Blue line** = Volume Moving Average
### 5. INFORMATION TABLE (Top Right)
Displays real-time analysis:
- **Current Phase** (A, B, C, D, or E)
- **Status** (description of what's happening)
- **Volume** (Very High, High, Normal, Low)
- **Spread** (Wide, Normal, Narrow)
- **Effort/Result** (Poor, Normal, Good)
- **Range** (YES if in trading range)
- **Bias** (BULLISH, BEARISH, or NEUTRAL)
---
## HOW TO READ THE SIGNALS
### STRONG BUY SIGNALS (in order of strength)
1. **SPRING** (strongest)
- False breakdown below support
- Look for: Low volume, quick reversal, close above support
- Entry: When price closes back above support level
- Stop: Below the spring low
2. **SOS (Sign of Strength)**
- Break above trading range resistance
- Look for: High volume, wide spread up bar
- Entry: On breakout or pullback to LPS
- Stop: Below trading range
3. **Shakeout (SO)**
- Similar to spring but more violent
- Look for: High volume, penetration of support, strong close
- Entry: When price reclaims support
- Stop: Below shakeout low
4. **LPS (Last Point of Support)**
- Pullback after SOS
- Look for: Low volume, shallow pullback
- Entry: When support holds
- Stop: Below LPS
5. **No Supply (NS)**
- Down bar on very low volume
- Indicates lack of selling pressure
- Confirms accumulation phase
### STRONG SELL SIGNALS (in order of strength)
1. **UTAD (Upthrust After Distribution)** (strongest)
- False breakout above resistance
- Look for: High volume spike, rejection, close below resistance
- Entry: When price closes back below resistance
- Stop: Above UTAD high
2. **SOW (Sign of Weakness)**
- Break below trading range support
- Look for: High volume, wide spread down bar
- Entry: On breakdown or rally to LPSY
- Stop: Above trading range
3. **Upthrust (UT)**
- Move above resistance on low volume, weak close
- Look for: Low volume, close in lower half of bar
- Entry: When resistance becomes resistance again
- Stop: Above upthrust high
4. **LPSY (Last Point of Supply)**
- Rally after SOW
- Look for: Low volume, weak rally
- Entry: When rally fails
- Stop: Above LPSY
5. **No Demand (ND)**
- Up bar on very low volume
- Indicates lack of buying pressure
- Confirms distribution phase
### NEUTRAL/WARNING SIGNALS
- **High Effort, Low Result** = Potential reversal coming
- **Stopping Volume** = Trend may be ending
- **Absorption** = Large volume with small movement (accumulation/distribution)
---
## TRADING STRATEGY EXAMPLES
### Strategy 1: Accumulation Range Breakout
**Setup:**
1. Identify trading range (blue background in Phase B)
2. Wait for Spring or Test (Phase C)
3. Wait for SOS breakout (Phase D)
**Entry:**
- Option A: Buy on SOS breakout
- Option B: Wait for LPS pullback (better risk/reward)
**Stop Loss:**
- Below the spring low or trading range bottom
**Target:**
- Measure height of trading range (cause)
- Project upward from breakout point (effect)
- Minimum target = range height
**Example:**
```
Trading Range: 100 to 120 (20 point range)
SOS Breakout at: 120
Target: 120 + 20 = 140 minimum
```
### Strategy 2: Distribution Range Breakdown
**Setup:**
1. Identify trading range after uptrend
2. Wait for UTAD (Phase C)
3. Wait for SOW breakdown (Phase D)
**Entry:**
- Option A: Sell on SOW breakdown
- Option B: Wait for LPSY rally (better risk/reward)
**Stop Loss:**
- Above the UTAD high or trading range top
**Target:**
- Measure height of trading range
- Project downward from breakdown point
- Minimum target = range height
### Strategy 3: Spring Trading
**Setup:**
1. Strong downtrend followed by range
2. Price breaks below range bottom
3. Volume is LOW on breakdown
4. Price quickly reverses and closes above support
**Entry:**
- When candle closes above support level
- Or on retest of support
**Stop Loss:**
- Below spring low (usually tight)
**Target:**
- Top of trading range
- Previous swing high
**Risk/Reward:**
- Typically 1:3 or better
### Strategy 4: Smart Money Tracking
**Setup:**
1. Look for 💰 symbols in demand zones
2. Multiple accumulation signals (PS, SC, ST, Test)
3. Volume decreasing during range
**Entry:**
- At next demand zone test
- On SOS breakout
**Confirmation:**
- Background turning green (Phase D/E)
- Table shows "BULLISH" bias
### Strategy 5: VSA Reversal
**Setup:**
1. Strong trend in place
2. Stopping Volume (SV) appears at extreme
3. Followed by No Demand (ND) or No Supply (NS)
**Entry:**
- When trend breaks down/up
- On retest of extreme
**Example (Bullish):**
```
Downtrend → Stopping Volume → No Supply → Up bar
Entry: Buy when price moves above SV bar
```
---
## SETTINGS & CUSTOMIZATION
### Volume Analysis Settings
**Volume MA Length** (default: 20)
- Shorter = More sensitive to volume changes
- Longer = Smoother, less noise
- Recommended: 15-25 for most timeframes
**High Volume Multiplier** (default: 1.5)
- Threshold for "high volume"
- Lower = More signals
- Higher = Only extreme volume
- Recommended: 1.3-2.0
**Climax Volume Multiplier** (default: 2.0)
- Threshold for climax events (SC, BC)
- Should be significantly higher than normal
- Recommended: 2.0-3.0
### Phase Detection Settings
**Swing Detection Length** (default: 5)
- How many bars to look left/right for swing points
- Shorter = More swings detected (more noise)
- Longer = Fewer swings (cleaner, might miss some)
- Recommended: 3-7
**Range Expansion Threshold** (default: 1.5)
- Multiplier for "wide spread" bars
- Higher = Only very wide bars qualify
- Recommended: 1.3-2.0
**Volume Confirmation** (default: ON)
- Requires volume confirmation for events
- Turn OFF for very low volume instruments
- Keep ON for stocks, forex, crypto
### Display Options
Toggle on/off:
- ✅ **Show Accumulation/Distribution Phases** - Background colors
- ✅ **Show Wyckoff Events** - All labeled events
- ✅ **Show Volume Spread Analysis** - VSA labels
- ✅ **Show Supply/Demand Zones** - Boxes on chart
- ✅ **Show Composite Operator Signals** - 💰 symbols
### Color Customization
- **Bullish Color** - All accumulation events
- **Bearish Color** - All distribution events
- **Neutral Color** - Range/neutral signals
---
## ALERT SETUP
### Available Alerts
1. **Selling Climax (SC)** - Potential bottom forming
2. **Spring** - Strong buy signal
3. **Sign of Strength (SOS)** - Bullish breakout
4. **Buying Climax (BC)** - Potential top forming
5. **UTAD** - Strong sell signal
6. **Sign of Weakness (SOW)** - Bearish breakdown
7. **Phase E Markup** - Uptrend confirmed
8. **Phase E Markdown** - Downtrend confirmed
9. **Smart Money Accumulation** - Institutions buying
10. **Smart Money Distribution** - Institutions selling
### How to Set Up Alerts
1. Click the "⏰" icon on TradingView
2. Select "Create Alert"
3. Condition: Choose the indicator and alert type
4. Example: "Wyckoff Method - Spring"
5. Set notification preferences (popup, email, webhook)
6. Click "Create"
### Recommended Alert Strategy
**Conservative Trader:**
- Spring
- SOS
- UTAD
- SOW
**Aggressive Trader:**
- Add: SC, BC, Smart Money signals
**Long-term Investor:**
- Phase E Markup
- Phase E Markdown
- Smart Money Accumulation
---
## COMMON PATTERNS
### Pattern 1: Classic Accumulation
```
Phase A: Downtrend → PS → SC → AR → ST
Phase B: Range building (4-12 weeks typical)
Phase C: Spring (false breakdown)
Phase D: SOS → LPS → BU
Phase E: Markup (new uptrend)
```
**What to do:**
- Mark the range boundaries
- Wait for spring
- Buy on LPS or SOS
- Hold through markup
### Pattern 2: Classic Distribution
```
Phase A: Uptrend → PSY → BC → AR → ST
Phase B: Range building (topping process)
Phase C: UTAD (false breakout)
Phase D: SOW → LPSY
Phase E: Markdown (new downtrend)
```
**What to do:**
- Mark the range boundaries
- Wait for UTAD
- Sell on LPSY or SOW
- Stay out during markdown
### Pattern 3: Re-Accumulation
```
Uptrend → Trading Range → Spring → Uptrend continues
```
- Occurs during existing uptrend
- Shorter accumulation period
- Often no clear SC (trend is already up)
- Spring is the key signal
### Pattern 4: Re-Distribution
```
Downtrend → Trading Range → UTAD → Downtrend continues
```
- Occurs during existing downtrend
- Shorter distribution period
- Often no clear BC (trend is already down)
- UTAD is the key signal
### Pattern 5: Failed Breakout
**Bullish Failed Breakout:**
```
Range → Breakdown → Immediate reversal (Spring)
```
- Price breaks support
- Volume is LOW
- Immediate strong reversal
- Very bullish
**Bearish Failed Breakout:**
```
Range → Breakout → Immediate reversal (UTAD)
```
- Price breaks resistance
- Volume may be high initially
- Quick rejection and reversal
- Very bearish
---
## TIMEFRAME RECOMMENDATIONS
### Daily Charts (Most Reliable)
- Best for swing trading
- Clear phases and events
- Less noise
- Recommended for beginners
### 4-Hour Charts
- Good for active swing traders
- Faster signals than daily
- Still reliable
### 1-Hour Charts
- For day traders
- More false signals
- Need to filter carefully
- Use in conjunction with higher timeframe
### 15-Minute / 5-Minute
- Only for experienced traders
- High noise level
- Many false signals
- Use daily chart for context
**Golden Rule:** Always check higher timeframe first!
---
## MULTI-TIMEFRAME ANALYSIS
### Top-Down Approach (Recommended)
1. **Weekly Chart** - Identify major trend and phase
2. **Daily Chart** - Find current accumulation/distribution
3. **4H Chart** - Identify entry timing
4. **Entry Timeframe** - Execute trade
### Example Analysis:
**Weekly:** Phase E Markup (bullish)
**Daily:** Phase B Re-accumulation
**4-Hour:** Spring detected
**Action:** Buy on daily LPS
---
## WYCKOFF + OTHER INDICATORS
### Complementary Tools
1. **Moving Averages**
- 20/50 SMA for trend context
- Already plotted on indicator
2. **RSI**
- Divergences at SC/BC
- Confirms overbought/oversold
3. **MACD**
- Confirms trend change in Phase D
- Divergences support Wyckoff events
4. **Volume Profile**
- Identifies value areas
- Confirms supply/demand zones
5. **Order Flow / Footprint Charts**
- See institutional activity
- Confirms smart money signals
**Don't Over-Complicate:**
- Wyckoff is a complete system
- Other indicators are supplementary
- When in doubt, trust Wyckoff
---
## TROUBLESHOOTING
### Issue: Too Many Labels
**Solution:**
- Increase swing length (Settings → 7 or 10)
- Increase volume multipliers
- Turn off VSA labels if not needed
- Focus on major events only (SC, Spring, SOS, BC, UTAD, SOW)
### Issue: Missing Expected Events
**Solution:**
- Decrease swing length (Settings → 3)
- Decrease volume multipliers
- Turn OFF volume confirmation
- Check timeframe (use daily chart)
### Issue: False Signals
**Solution:**
- Use higher timeframe
- Wait for confirmation
- Don't trade against major trend
- Look for multiple signal convergence
### Issue: Can't See Background Colors
**Solution:**
- Check "Show Phases" is enabled
- Increase monitor brightness
- Colors are subtle by design (not to obscure price)
### Issue: Volume Shows Incorrectly
**Solution:**
- Ensure volume data is available for your symbol
- Some symbols have poor volume data
- Forex spot pairs have no real volume
- Use futures or stock markets for best results
### Issue: No Trading Range Detected
**Solution:**
- Market may be trending strongly
- Trading range might be too small
- Wait for price to consolidate
- Not all markets have clear ranges
---
## ADVANCED TIPS
### 1. Count Point & Figure Charts
- Wyckoff used P&F to measure "cause"
- Width of range × height = minimum move target
- Longer accumulation = larger markup
### 2. Watch for Absorption
- High volume + narrow spread = someone absorbing
- In downtrend = accumulation
- In uptrend = distribution
### 3. Multiple Timeframe Springs
- Spring on daily + spring on weekly = very strong
- Increases probability significantly
### 4. Failed Signals Are Signals Too
- Failed spring = weakness, expect lower
- Failed UTAD = strength, expect higher
### 5. Context is King
- Don't buy during Phase E Markdown
- Don't sell during Phase E Markup
- Respect the major trend
### 6. Volume Precedes Price
- Study volume changes first
- Price follows volume
- Decreasing volume in range = building energy
### 7. Composite Operator Mindset
- Think like institutions
- Where would smart money buy/sell?
- They need liquidity (retail traders)
---
## RISK MANAGEMENT
### Position Sizing
**Conservative:**
- Risk 1% per trade
- Wider stops at range boundaries
**Moderate:**
- Risk 1-2% per trade
- Stops below spring/above UTAD
**Aggressive:**
- Risk 2-3% per trade
- Tight stops
- Higher win rate needed
### Stop Loss Placement
**Accumulation:**
- Below spring low
- Below trading range bottom
- Below demand zone
**Distribution:**
- Above UTAD high
- Above trading range top
- Above supply zone
### Take Profit Strategy
**Method 1: Measured Move**
- Range height = minimum target
- 2x range height = extended target
**Method 2: Fibonacci Extensions**
- 1.0 = range height
- 1.618 = extended target
- 2.618 = maximum target
**Method 3: Trail the Stop**
- Move stop to breakeven at 1R
- Trail under swing lows in markup
- Lock in profits progressively
---
## BACKTESTING CHECKLIST
Before trading with real money:
- Backtest on 50+ historical examples
- Record all signals in trading journal
- Calculate win rate (aim for >50%)
- Calculate average R:R (aim for >1:2)
- Test on multiple instruments
- Test on multiple timeframes
- Test in different market conditions
- Verify signal consistency
- Practice on demo account
- Start small with real money
---
## RECOMMENDED READING
### Books
1. **"Studies in Tape Reading"** - Richard D. Wyckoff
2. **"The Richard D. Wyckoff Method"** - Rubén Villahermosa
3. **"Charting the Stock Market: The Wyckoff Method"** - Jack Hutson
4. **"Master the Markets"** - Tom Williams (VSA)
### Courses
1. Wyckoff Analytics - Official Wyckoff course
2. TradeVSA - Volume Spread Analysis
3. StockCharts - Wyckoff education
### Communities
1. Wyckoff Analytics Forum
2. Reddit r/Wyckoff
3. TradingView Wyckoff ideas section
---
## FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
**Q: Can I use this on crypto?**
A: Yes, works well on major cryptocurrencies with good volume.
**Q: Does it work on forex?**
A: Yes, but use futures volume (like 6E for EUR/USD) for better accuracy.
**Q: What's the best timeframe?**
A: Daily chart for most traders. 4H for more active trading.
**Q: How long does accumulation last?**
A: Typically 2-12 weeks. Longer accumulation = bigger markup.
**Q: Can I automate this?**
A: You can use the alerts, but manual analysis is recommended.
**Q: What's the win rate?**
A: With proper filtering: 60-70% on major signals (Spring, UTAD, SOS, SOW).
**Q: Should I trade every signal?**
A: No. Focus on Spring, UTAD, SOS, and SOW in trending markets.
**Q: What if I see conflicting signals?**
A: Use higher timeframe for context. When in doubt, stay out.
**Q: How do I know which phase I'm in?**
A: Check the table in top-right corner. Also look at background color.
**Q: Can I use this for options trading?**
A: Yes, excellent for timing option entries (especially around Spring/UTAD).
---
## FINAL THOUGHTS
The Wyckoff Method is:
- **A complete trading system** (not just an indicator)
- **Based on 100+ years** of market wisdom
- **Used by institutions** and professional traders
- **Requires practice** and screen time
- **Highly effective** when applied correctly
**Success Tips:**
1. Start with daily charts
2. Focus on major events (SC, Spring, SOS, BC, UTAD, SOW)
3. Always check higher timeframe context
4. Wait for confirmation before entering
5. Manage risk properly
6. Keep a trading journal
7. Be patient - wait for the best setups
**Remember:**
- Not every range will have all events
- Some phases may be abbreviated
- Context and confluence matter most
- Practice makes perfect
---
## SUPPORT & UPDATES
For questions, improvements, or bug reports:
- Check TradingView script comments
- Join Wyckoff trading communities
- Study historical examples
- Practice on demo accounts
**Good luck and happy trading!**
---
*Disclaimer: This indicator is for educational purposes. Always do your own analysis and risk management. Past performance does not guarantee future results.*
# WYCKOFF VISUAL SETUP EXAMPLES
## ACCUMULATION SCHEMATIC #1 (Classic Bottom)
```
Price Chart View:
│ PHASE E
│ MARKUP
│ ╱
│ ╱
┌─SOS─────┤ ╱
│ │ ╱
┌───────────┤ ┌LPS │╱
│ PHASE B │ │ │
│ (Cause) └──┴──────┤
┌AR──┤ │
┌────┤ │ ┌─Spring │ PHASE D
│ └ST──┤ │ │
│ │ │ │
────SC────────┴─────────┴───────────┴──────────
│
PS
│ PHASE A
│
Downtrend
```
### PHASE A - Stopping the Downtrend
```
PS: │ High volume down bar
▼ First sign of support
■ Not bottom yet
SC: │ VERY HIGH volume
▼ Panic selling exhaustion
█ Long lower wick
█ This is the low
AR: │ Automatic rally
▲ Relief bounce
■ High volume acceptable
ST: │ Secondary test
▼ Low volume (KEY!)
■ Tests SC low
```
### PHASE B - Building the Cause
```
┌─────────┐
│ ~~~ │ Multiple tests
│ ~ ~ │ Volume decreases
│~ ~ │ Range gets tighter
└─────────┘
Duration: 2-12 weeks typical
The longer, the bigger the eventual move
```
### PHASE C - The Test (SPRING)
```
║ False breakdown
─────╨─────
▼ Low volume
█ Breaks below support
■
█ Quick reversal
▲ Closes ABOVE support
CRITICAL: Volume must be LOW
Close must be strong
Happens quickly (1-3 bars)
```
### PHASE D - Strength Emerges
```
SOS: ▲ Sign of Strength
────╥──── Break above resistance
║ High volume
║ Wide spread
LPS: ▼ Last Point Support
■ Pullback on LOW volume
▲ Great entry point
BU: ▲ Backup
■ Final consolidation
▲ Before markup
```
### PHASE E - Markup
```
╱
╱
╱ Strong uptrend
╱ High momentum
╱ Can last months/years
──╱──
```
---
## DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATIC #2 (Classic Top)
```
Price Chart View:
Uptrend
│
PSY
│ PHASE A
────BC────────┬─────────┬───────────┬──────────
│ │ UTAD │
│ PHASE B │ │ PHASE D
┌AR──┤ ┌LPSY │ │
│ │ │ └───────────┤
│ └──┴──────┐ │╲
└ST──┤ │ │ ╲
│ └───────────┤ ╲
└─SOW─────┤ │ ╲
│ │ ╲
│ PHASE C │ ╲
│ │ PHASE E
│ │ MARKDOWN
```
### PHASE A - Stopping the Uptrend
```
PSY: │ High volume up bar
▲ Preliminary supply
■ Selling starting
BC: │ VERY HIGH volume
▲ Buying climax
█ Euphoric top
█ Long upper wick
AR: │ Automatic reaction
▼ Sharp selloff
■ High volume
ST: │ Secondary test
▲ Low volume (KEY!)
■ Tests BC high
```
### PHASE C - The Test (UTAD)
```
▲ False breakout
────╥────
║ Breaks ABOVE resistance
║ Often high volume spike
▼
█ Rejection / weak close
█ Closes BELOW resistance
▼
CRITICAL: Closes weak
Quick rejection
Traps buyers
```
### PHASE D - Weakness Emerges
```
SOW: ▼ Sign of Weakness
────╨──── Break below support
║ High volume
║ Wide spread
LPSY: ▲ Last Point Supply
■ Rally on LOW volume
▼ Last chance to exit
```
---
## VOLUME PATTERNS (Critical to Understanding)
### ACCUMULATION Volume Pattern
```
Volume
│ SC
█
█ ST
■ ■ Spring
■ ■ ■ SOS LPS
──┴────┴────┴──────█───■────►
│ │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ │
A A C D D
Pattern: HIGH → low → low → HIGH → low
Key: Volume DECREASES during range
INCREASES on breakout
```
### DISTRIBUTION Volume Pattern
```
Volume
│ BC
█
█ ST
■ ■ UTAD
■ ■ ■ SOW LPSY
──┴────┴────┴──────█───■────►
│ │ │ │ │
│ │ │ │ │
A A C D D
Pattern: HIGH → low → varies → HIGH → low
Key: Volume MAY increase on UTAD
Definitely HIGH on breakdown (SOW)
```
---
## REAL TRADE SETUPS
### Setup #1: SPRING BUY
```
Entry Conditions:
1. Clear trading range identified
2. Price breaks BELOW support
3. Volume is LOW (critical!)
4. Price reverses QUICKLY
5. Closes ABOVE support level
Entry: Next bar or on retest
Stop: Below spring low
Target: Top of range (minimum)
Example:
Support: $100
Spring low: $98 (low volume)
Close: $101
Entry: $102
Stop: $97.50
Target: $120 (range top)
Risk/Reward: 1:4
```
### Setup #2: UTAD SELL
```
Entry Conditions:
1. Clear trading range identified (after uptrend)
2. Price breaks ABOVE resistance
3. Often high volume spike
4. Price reverses QUICKLY
5. Closes BELOW resistance level
Entry: Next bar or on retest
Stop: Above UTAD high
Target: Bottom of range (minimum)
Example:
Resistance: $200
UTAD high: $205 (spike)
Close: $198
Entry: $197
Stop: $206
Target: $180 (range bottom)
Risk/Reward: 1:2
```
### Setup #3: SOS BREAKOUT
```
Entry Conditions:
1. Clear accumulation range
2. Spring already occurred (ideal)
3. Price breaks ABOVE resistance
4. HIGH volume on breakout
5. Wide spread up bar
Entry Option A: On breakout ($120)
Entry Option B: Wait for LPS pullback ($115)
Stop: Below range or LPS
Target: Range height projected up
Example:
Range: $100-$120 (20 points)
SOS breakout: $120
Entry A: $120
Stop: $115
Target 1: $140 (100%)
Target 2: $150 (150%)
```
---
## VSA SPECIFIC PATTERNS
### Pattern 1: No Demand (Weakness)
```
▲
■ Up bar
■ Low volume ◄── KEY
▲ Small body
Context: After uptrend
Meaning: Buyers exhausted
Action: Prepare to sell
```
### Pattern 2: No Supply (Strength)
```
▼
■ Down bar
■ Low volume ◄── KEY
▼ Small body
Context: After downtrend
Meaning: Sellers exhausted
Action: Prepare to buy
```
### Pattern 3: Stopping Volume
```
═ Very high volume
█ Narrow spread ◄── KEY
═ Price not moving
Context: At extremes
Meaning: Absorption
Action: Expect reversal
```
---
## COMMON MISTAKES (What NOT to Do)
### ❌ Mistake 1: Buying Prematurely
```
WRONG:
SC
▼
█ ← DON'T BUY HERE
CORRECT:
Spring
─────╨─────
▼
█ ← BUY HERE
▲
```
### ❌ Mistake 2: Ignoring Volume
```
WRONG: "It broke below support, must be spring"
─────╨───── High volume
█
This is a BREAKDOWN, not a spring!
CORRECT Spring:
─────╨───── LOW volume ✓
■ Quick reversal ✓
▲
```
### ❌ Mistake 3: Trading Against Trend
```
WRONG:
Markdown Phase E
╲
╲ ← Trying to buy here
╲
╲
CORRECT:
Wait for new accumulation to complete
```
---
## MULTI-TIMEFRAME EXAMPLE
### Weekly Chart: Phase E Markup (Bullish)
```
╱
╱
╱ Long-term uptrend
╱
───╱─────
```
### Daily Chart: Re-Accumulation Phase C
```
┌─────────┐
│ Spring │ ← We are here
│ ▼ │
─────┴────█────┴─────
▲
```
### 4-Hour Chart: Entry Timing
```
Last 48 hours:
─────╨───── Spring occurred
█
▲ ← Enter now
■
```
**Result:** Triple confirmation across timeframes = High probability trade
---
## PROFIT TARGETS (Visual Guide)
### Method 1: Basic Measured Move
```
Resistance: 120 ┐ ─────────
│
│ 20 points
│
Support: 100 ┘ ─────────
Breakout: 120
Target: 120 + 20 = 140
╱╱╱ 140 (Target)
╱╱╱
╱╱╱
──────◄ 120 (Breakout)
│
Range │ 20
│
──────┘ 100
```
### Method 2: Multiple Targets
```
╱╱╱ 150 (Target 3: 2.5x) - 20% position
╱╱╱
╱╱╱ 140 (Target 2: 2x) - 30% position
╱╱╱
─────◄╱ 130 (Target 1: 1x) - 50% position
│
10 │ 120 (Breakout)
│
─────┘ 110 (Support)
```
### Method 3: Trailing Stop
```
1. Move stop to breakeven at Target 1
2. Trail stop under swing lows
3. Let winners run
╱╱╱
╱ ╱╱ ← Trail stop here
╱╱ ╱
╱ ╱ ← Then here
─────◄──╱
← Start here (breakeven)
```
---
## TIMING ENTRIES (Exact Bar Patterns)
### Perfect Spring Entry
```
Bar 1: ▼ Breaks below (Low vol)
█
Bar 2: ▲ Reverses (Closes strong)
█ ◄─ ENTER HERE
Bar 3: ■ Confirms
▲
DON'T WAIT for Bar 3!
Enter on Bar 2 close
```
### Perfect UTAD Entry
```
Bar 1: ▲ Breaks above (Spike vol OK)
█
Bar 2: ▼ Reverses (Closes weak)
█ ◄─ ENTER HERE
Bar 3: ■ Confirms
▼
SHORT on Bar 2 close
Don't wait for more confirmation
```
---
## COMPOSITE OPERATOR PSYCHOLOGY
### What Smart Money Does (Follow Them)
**Accumulation:**
```
1. Create fear (PS, SC)
2. Shake out weak hands (Spring)
3. Absorb supply quietly (Phase B)
4. Test for remaining supply (Test)
5. Mark it up (SOS → Phase E)
💰 They buy LOW when retail panics
```
**Distribution:**
```
1. Create euphoria (PSY, BC)
2. Trap late buyers (UTAD)
3. Distribute to buyers (Phase B)
4. Test for remaining demand (ST)
5. Mark it down (SOW → Phase E)
💰 They sell HIGH when retail buys
```
### Where to Look for Smart Money
```
💰 Buy signals appear at:
- Demand zones (green boxes)
- Springs and shakeouts
- Tests of support
- After selling climax
💰 Sell signals appear at:
- Supply zones (red boxes)
- UTAD and upthrusts
- Weak rallies (LPSY)
- After buying climax
```
---
## PRACTICE EXERCISES
### Exercise 1: Identify the Phase
Look at any chart and ask:
1. Is there a trading range? (Phase B likely)
2. Did we just stop a trend? (Phase A)
3. Was there a spring/UTAD? (Phase C)
4. Is there a breakout? (Phase D)
5. Is trend running? (Phase E)
### Exercise 2: Volume Analysis
For each bar, note:
- Volume level (High/Normal/Low)
- Spread (Wide/Normal/Narrow)
- Effort vs Result (Matching? Diverging?)
### Exercise 3: Find Historical Springs
Go back 6 months:
- Mark all springs you can find
- Note the setup before each
- Track what happened after
- Calculate win rate
---
## FINAL VISUALIZATION: The Complete Cycle
```
ACCUMULATION → MARKUP → DISTRIBUTION → MARKDOWN → ACCUMULATION...
Distribution Accumulation
(Top) (Bottom)
┌───────────────┐ ┌───────────────┐
│ BC UTAD │ │ Spring SC │
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
────┴───┴───┴───────┴─╲ ╱────────┴───┴───┴────
╲ ╱
Markdown ╲ ╱ Markup
(Phase E) ╲ ╱ (Phase E)
╲ ╱
╲ ╱
╲ ╱
╲ ╱
V
The market cycles endlessly
Your job: Identify where you are in the cycle
Trade accordingly
```
---
**Remember:**
- 📊 Study charts daily
- 📝 Journal every setup
- 🎯 Wait for the best signals
- 💰 Follow smart money
- ⏰ Be patient
- 🚀 Let winners run
**The indicator does the heavy lifting - you make the decisions!**
VV Moving Average Convergence Divergence # VMACDv3 - Volume-Weighted MACD with A/D Divergence Detection
## Overview
**VMACDv3** (Volume-Weighted Moving Average Convergence Divergence Version 3) is a momentum indicator that applies volume-weighting to traditional MACD calculations on price, while using the Accumulation/Distribution (A/D) line for divergence detection. This hybrid approach combines volume-weighted price momentum with volume distribution analysis for comprehensive market insight.
## Key Features
- **Volume-Weighted Price MACD**: Traditional MACD calculation on price but weighted by volume for earlier signals
- **A/D Divergence Detection**: Identifies when A/D trend diverges from MACD momentum
- **Volume Strength Filtering**: Distinguishes high-volume confirmations from low-volume noise
- **Color-Coded Histogram**: 4-color system showing momentum direction and volume strength
- **Real-Time Alerts**: Background colors and alert conditions for bullish/bearish divergences
## Difference from ACCDv3
| Aspect | VMACDv3 | ACCDv3 |
|--------|---------|---------|
| **MACD Input** | **Price (Close)** | **A/D Line** |
| **Volume Weighting** | Applied to price | Applied to A/D line |
| **Primary Signal** | Volume-weighted price momentum | Volume distribution momentum |
| **Use Case** | Price momentum with volume confirmation | Volume flow and accumulation/distribution |
| **Sensitivity** | More responsive to price changes | More responsive to volume patterns |
| **Best For** | Trend following, breakouts | Volume analysis, smart money tracking |
**Key Insight**: VMACDv3 shows *where price is going* with volume weight, while ACCDv3 shows *where volume is accumulating/distributing*.
## Components
### 1. Volume-Weighted MACD on Price
Unlike standard MACD that uses simple price EMAs, VMACDv3 weights each price by its corresponding volume:
```
Fast Line = EMA(Price × Volume, 12) / EMA(Volume, 12)
Slow Line = EMA(Price × Volume, 26) / EMA(Volume, 26)
MACD = Fast Line - Slow Line
```
**Benefits of Volume Weighting**:
- High-volume price movements have greater impact
- Filters out low-volume noise and false moves
- Provides earlier trend change signals
- Better reflects institutional activity
### 2. Accumulation/Distribution (A/D) Line
Used for divergence detection, measuring buying/selling pressure:
```
A/D = Σ ((2 × Close - Low - High) / (High - Low)) × Volume
```
- **Rising A/D**: Accumulation (buying pressure)
- **Falling A/D**: Distribution (selling pressure)
- **Doji Handling**: When High = Low, contribution is zero
### 3. Signal Lines
- **MACD Line** (Blue, #2962FF): The fast-slow difference showing momentum
- **Signal Line** (Orange, #FF6D00): EMA or SMA smoothing of MACD
- **Zero Line**: Reference for bullish (above) vs bearish (below) bias
### 4. Histogram Color System
The histogram uses 4 distinct colors based on **direction** and **volume strength**:
| Condition | Color | Meaning |
|-----------|-------|---------|
| Rising + High Volume | **Dark Green** (#1B5E20) | Strong bullish momentum with volume confirmation |
| Rising + Low Volume | **Light Teal** (#26A69A) | Bullish momentum but weak volume (less reliable) |
| Falling + High Volume | **Dark Red** (#B71C1C) | Strong bearish momentum with volume confirmation |
| Falling + Low Volume | **Light Pink** (#FFCDD2) | Bearish momentum but weak volume (less reliable) |
Additional shading:
- **Light Cyan** (#B2DFDB): Positive but not rising (momentum stalling)
- **Bright Red** (#FF5252): Negative and accelerating down
### 5. Divergence Detection
VMACDv3 compares A/D trend against volume-weighted price MACD:
#### Bullish Divergence (Green Background)
- **Condition**: A/D is trending up BUT MACD is negative and trending down
- **Interpretation**: Volume is accumulating while price momentum appears weak
- **Signal**: Smart money accumulation, potential bullish reversal
- **Action**: Look for long entries, especially at support levels
#### Bearish Divergence (Red Background)
- **Condition**: A/D is trending down BUT MACD is positive and trending up
- **Interpretation**: Volume is distributing while price momentum appears strong
- **Signal**: Smart money distribution, potential bearish reversal
- **Action**: Consider exits, avoid new longs, watch for breakdown
## Parameters
| Parameter | Default | Range | Description |
|-----------|---------|-------|-------------|
| **Source** | Close | OHLC/HLC3/etc | Price source for MACD calculation |
| **Fast Length** | 12 | 1-50 | Period for fast EMA (shorter = more sensitive) |
| **Slow Length** | 26 | 1-100 | Period for slow EMA (longer = smoother) |
| **Signal Smoothing** | 9 | 1-50 | Period for signal line (MACD smoothing) |
| **Signal Line MA Type** | EMA | SMA/EMA | Moving average type for signal calculation |
| **Volume MA Length** | 20 | 5-100 | Period for volume average (strength filter) |
## Usage Guide
### Reading the Indicator
1. **MACD Lines (Blue & Orange)**
- **Blue Line (MACD)**: Volume-weighted price momentum
- **Orange Line (Signal)**: Smoothed trend of MACD
- **Crossovers**: Blue crosses above orange = bullish, below = bearish
- **Distance**: Wider gap = stronger momentum
- **Zero Line Position**: Above = bullish bias, below = bearish bias
2. **Histogram Colors**
- **Dark Green (#1B5E20)**: Strong bullish move with high volume - **most reliable buy signal**
- **Light Teal (#26A69A)**: Bullish but low volume - wait for confirmation
- **Dark Red (#B71C1C)**: Strong bearish move with high volume - **most reliable sell signal**
- **Light Pink (#FFCDD2)**: Bearish but low volume - may be temporary dip
3. **Background Divergence Alerts**
- **Green Background**: A/D accumulating while price weak - potential bottom
- **Red Background**: A/D distributing while price strong - potential top
- Most powerful at key support/resistance levels
### Trading Strategies
#### Strategy 1: Volume-Confirmed Trend Following
1. Wait for MACD to cross above zero line
2. Look for **dark green** histogram bars (high volume confirmation)
3. Enter long on second consecutive dark green bar
4. Hold while histogram remains green
5. Exit when histogram turns light green or red appears
6. Set stop below recent swing low
**Example**:
```
Price: 26,400 → 26,450 (rising)
MACD: -50 → +20 (crosses zero)
Histogram: Light teal → Dark green → Dark green
Volume: 50k → 75k → 90k (increasing)
```
#### Strategy 2: Divergence Reversal Trading
1. Identify divergence background (green = bullish, red = bearish)
2. Confirm with price structure (support/resistance, chart patterns)
3. Wait for MACD to cross signal line in divergence direction
4. Enter on first **dark colored** histogram bar after divergence
5. Set stop beyond divergence area
6. Target previous swing high/low
**Example - Bullish Divergence**:
```
Price: Making lower lows (26,350 → 26,300 → 26,250)
A/D: Rising (accumulation)
MACD: Below zero but starting to curve up
Background: Green shading appears
Entry: MACD crosses signal line + dark green bar
Stop: Below 26,230
Target: 26,450 (previous high)
```
#### Strategy 3: Momentum Scalping
1. Trade only in direction of MACD zero line (above = long, below = short)
2. Enter on dark colored bars only
3. Exit on first light colored bar or opposite color
4. Quick in and out (1-5 minute holds)
5. Tight stops (0.2-0.5% depending on instrument)
#### Strategy 4: Histogram Pattern Trading
**V-Bottom Reversal (Bullish)**:
- Red histogram bars start rising (becoming less negative)
- Forms "V" shape at the bottom
- Transitions to light red → light teal → **dark green**
- Entry: First dark green bar
- Signal: Momentum reversal with volume
**Λ-Top Reversal (Bearish)**:
- Green histogram bars start falling (becoming less positive)
- Forms inverted "V" at the top
- Transitions to light green → light pink → **dark red**
- Entry: First dark red bar
- Signal: Momentum exhaustion with volume
### Multi-Timeframe Analysis
**Recommended Approach**:
1. **Higher Timeframe (15m/1h)**: Identify overall trend direction
2. **Trading Timeframe (5m)**: Time entries using VMACDv3 signals
3. **Lower Timeframe (1m)**: Fine-tune entry prices
**Example Setup**:
```
15-minute: MACD above zero (bullish bias)
5-minute: Dark green histogram appears after pullback
1-minute: Enter on break of recent high with volume
```
### Volume Strength Interpretation
The volume filter compares current volume to 20-period average:
- **Volume > Average**: Dark colors (green/red) - high confidence signals
- **Volume < Average**: Light colors (teal/pink) - lower confidence signals
**Trading Rules**:
- ✓ **Aggressive**: Take all dark colored signals
- ✓ **Conservative**: Only take dark colors that follow 2+ light colors of same type
- ✗ **Avoid**: Trading light colored signals during high volatility
- ✗ **Avoid**: Ignoring volume context during news events
## Technical Details
### Volume-Weighted Calculation
```pine
// Volume-weighted fast EMA
fast_ma = ta.ema(src * volume, fast_length) / ta.ema(volume, fast_length)
// Volume-weighted slow EMA
slow_ma = ta.ema(src * volume, slow_length) / ta.ema(volume, slow_length)
// MACD is the difference
macd = fast_ma - slow_ma
// Signal line smoothing
signal = ta.ema(macd, signal_length) // or ta.sma() if SMA selected
// Histogram
hist = macd - signal
```
### Divergence Detection Logic
```pine
// A/D trending up if above its 5-period SMA
ad_trend = ad > ta.sma(ad, 5)
// MACD trending up if above zero
macd_trend = macd > 0
// Divergence when trends oppose each other
divergence = ad_trend != macd_trend
// Specific conditions for alerts
bullish_divergence = ad_trend and not macd_trend and macd < 0
bearish_divergence = not ad_trend and macd_trend and macd > 0
```
### Histogram Coloring Logic
```pine
hist_color = (hist >= 0
? (hist < hist
? (vol_strength ? #1B5E20 : #26A69A) // Rising: dark/light green
: #B2DFDB) // Positive but falling: cyan
: (hist < hist
? (vol_strength ? #B71C1C : #FFCDD2) // Rising (less negative): dark/light red
: #FF5252)) // Falling more: bright red
```
## Alerts
Built-in alert conditions for divergence detection:
### Bullish Divergence Alert
- **Trigger**: A/D trending up, MACD negative and trending down
- **Message**: "Bullish Divergence: A/D trending up but MACD trending down"
- **Use Case**: Potential reversal or continuation after pullback
- **Action**: Look for long entry setups
### Bearish Divergence Alert
- **Trigger**: A/D trending down, MACD positive and trending up
- **Message**: "Bearish Divergence: A/D trending down but MACD trending up"
- **Use Case**: Potential top or trend reversal
- **Action**: Consider exits or short entries
### Setting Up Alerts
1. Click "Create Alert" in TradingView
2. Condition: Select "VMACDv3"
3. Choose alert type: "Bullish Divergence" or "Bearish Divergence"
4. Configure: Email, SMS, webhook, or popup
5. Set frequency: "Once Per Bar Close" recommended
## Comparison Tables
### VMACDv3 vs Standard MACD
| Feature | Standard MACD | VMACDv3 |
|---------|---------------|---------|
| **Price Weighting** | Equal weight all bars | Volume-weighted |
| **Sensitivity** | Fixed | Adaptive to volume |
| **False Signals** | More during low volume | Fewer (volume filter) |
| **Divergence** | Price vs MACD | A/D vs MACD |
| **Volume Analysis** | None | Built-in |
| **Color System** | 2 colors | 4+ colors |
| **Best For** | Simple trend following | Volume-confirmed trading |
### VMACDv3 vs ACCDv3
| Aspect | VMACDv3 | ACCDv3 |
|--------|---------|--------|
| **Focus** | Price momentum | Volume distribution |
| **Reactivity** | Faster to price moves | Faster to volume shifts |
| **Best Markets** | Trending, breakouts | Accumulation/distribution phases |
| **Signal Type** | Where price + volume going | Where smart money positioning |
| **Divergence Meaning** | Volume vs price disagreement | A/D vs momentum disagreement |
| **Use Together?** | ✓ Yes, complementary | ✓ Yes, different perspectives |
## Example Trading Scenarios
### Scenario 1: Strong Bullish Breakout
```
Time: 9:30 AM (market open)
Price: Breaks above 26,400 resistance
MACD: Crosses above zero line
Histogram: Dark green bars (#1B5E20)
Volume: 2x average (150k vs 75k avg)
A/D: Rising (no divergence)
Action: Enter long at 26,405
Stop: 26,380 (below breakout)
Target 1: 26,450 (risk:reward 1:2)
Target 2: 26,500 (risk:reward 1:4)
Result: High probability setup with volume confirmation
```
### Scenario 2: False Breakout (Avoided)
```
Time: 2:30 PM (slow period)
Price: Breaks above 26,400 resistance
MACD: Slightly positive
Histogram: Light teal bars (#26A69A)
Volume: 0.5x average (40k vs 75k avg)
A/D: Flat/declining
Action: Avoid trade
Reason: Low volume, no conviction, potential false breakout
Outcome: Price reverses back below 26,400 within 10 minutes
Saved: Avoided losing trade due to volume filter
```
### Scenario 3: Bullish Divergence Bottom
```
Time: 11:00 AM
Price: Making lower lows (26,350 → 26,300 → 26,280)
MACD: Below zero but curving upward
Histogram: Red bars getting shorter (V-bottom forming)
Background: Green shading (divergence alert)
A/D: Rising despite price falling
Volume: Increasing on down bars
Setup:
1. Divergence appears at 26,280 (green background)
2. Wait for MACD to cross signal line
3. First dark green bar appears at 26,290
4. Enter long: 26,295 (next bar open)
5. Stop: 26,265 (below divergence low)
6. Target: 26,350 (previous swing high)
Result: +55 points (30 point risk, 1.8:1 reward)
Key: Divergence + volume confirmation = high probability reversal
```
### Scenario 4: Bearish Divergence Top
```
Time: 1:45 PM
Price: Making higher highs (26,500 → 26,520 → 26,540)
MACD: Positive but flattening
Histogram: Green bars getting shorter (Λ-top forming)
Background: Red shading (bearish divergence)
A/D: Declining despite rising price
Volume: Decreasing on up bars
Setup:
1. Bearish divergence at 26,540 (red background)
2. MACD crosses below signal line
3. First dark red bar appears at 26,535
4. Enter short: 26,530
5. Stop: 26,555 (above divergence high)
6. Target: 26,475 (support level)
Result: +55 points (25 point risk, 2.2:1 reward)
Key: Distribution while price rising = smart money exiting
```
### Scenario 5: V-Bottom Reversal
```
Downtrend in progress
MACD: Deep below zero (-150)
Histogram: Series of dark red bars
Pattern Development:
Bar 1: Dark red, hist = -80, falling
Bar 2: Dark red, hist = -95, falling
Bar 3: Dark red, hist = -100, falling (extreme)
Bar 4: Light pink, hist = -98, rising!
Bar 5: Light pink, hist = -90, rising
Bar 6: Light teal, hist = -75, rising (crosses to positive momentum)
Bar 7: Dark green, hist = -55, rising + volume
Action: Enter long on Bar 7
Reason: V-bottom confirmed with volume
Stop: Below Bar 3 low
Target: Zero line on histogram (mean reversion)
```
## Best Practices
### Entry Rules
✓ **Wait for dark colors**: High-volume confirmation is key
✓ **Confirm divergences**: Use with price support/resistance
✓ **Trade with zero line**: Long above, short below for best odds
✓ **Multiple timeframes**: Align 1m, 5m, 15m signals
✓ **Watch for patterns**: V-bottoms and Λ-tops are reliable
### Exit Rules
✓ **Partial profits**: Take 50% at first target
✓ **Trail stops**: Use histogram color changes
✓ **Respect signals**: Exit on opposite dark color
✓ **Time stops**: Close positions before major news
✓ **End of day**: Square up before close
### Avoid
✗ **Don't chase light colors**: Low volume = low confidence
✗ **Don't ignore divergence**: Early warning system
✗ **Don't overtrade**: Wait for clear setups
✗ **Don't fight the trend**: Zero line dictates bias
✗ **Don't skip stops**: Always use risk management
## Risk Management
### Position Sizing
- **Dark green/red signals**: 1-2% account risk
- **Light signals**: 0.5% account risk or skip
- **Divergence plays**: 1% account risk (higher uncertainty)
- **Multiple confirmations**: Up to 2% account risk
### Stop Loss Placement
- **Trend trades**: Below/above recent swing (20-30 points typical)
- **Breakout trades**: Below/above breakout level (15-25 points)
- **Divergence trades**: Beyond divergence extreme (25-40 points)
- **Scalp trades**: Tight stops at 10-15 points
### Profit Targets
- **Minimum**: 1.5:1 reward to risk ratio
- **Scalps**: 15-25 points (quick in/out)
- **Swing**: 50-100 points (hold through pullbacks)
- **Runners**: Trail with histogram color changes
## Timeframe Recommendations
| Timeframe | Trading Style | Typical Hold | Advantages | Challenges |
|-----------|---------------|--------------|------------|------------|
| **1-minute** | Scalping | 1-5 minutes | Fast profits, many setups | Noisy, high false signals |
| **5-minute** | Intraday | 15-60 minutes | Balance of speed/clarity | Still requires quick decisions |
| **15-minute** | Swing | 1-4 hours | Clearer trends, less noise | Fewer opportunities |
| **1-hour** | Position | 4-24 hours | Strong signals, less monitoring | Wider stops required |
**Recommendation**: Start with 5-minute for best balance of signal quality and opportunity frequency.
## Combining with Other Indicators
### VMACDv3 + ACCDv3
- **Use**: Confirm volume flow with price momentum
- **Signal**: Both showing dark green = highest conviction long
- **Divergence**: VMACDv3 bullish + ACCDv3 bearish = examine price action
### VMACDv3 + RSI
- **Use**: Overbought/oversold with momentum confirmation
- **Signal**: RSI < 30 + dark green VMACD = strong reversal
- **Caution**: RSI > 70 + light green VMACD = potential false breakout
### VMACDv3 + Elder Impulse
- **Use**: Bar coloring + histogram confirmation
- **Signal**: Green Elder bars + dark green VMACD = aligned momentum
- **Exit**: Blue Elder bars + light colors = momentum stalling
## Limitations
- **Requires volume data**: Will not work on instruments without volume feed
- **Lagging indicator**: MACD inherently follows price (2-3 bar delay)
- **Consolidation noise**: Generates false signals in tight ranges
- **Gap handling**: Large gaps can distort volume-weighted values
- **Not standalone**: Should combine with price action and support/resistance
## Troubleshooting
**Problem**: Too many light colored signals
**Solution**: Increase Volume MA Length to 30-40 for stricter filtering
**Problem**: Missing entries due to waiting for dark colors
**Solution**: Lower Volume MA Length to 10-15 for more signals (accept lower quality)
**Problem**: Divergences not appearing
**Solution**: Verify volume data available; check if A/D line is calculating
**Problem**: Histogram colors not changing
**Solution**: Ensure real-time data feed; refresh indicator
## Version History
- **v3**: Removed traditional MACD, using volume-weighted MACD on price with A/D divergence
- **v2**: Added A/D divergence detection, volume strength filtering, enhanced histogram colors
- **v1**: Basic volume-weighted MACD on price
## Related Indicators
**Companion Tools**:
- **ACCDv3**: Volume-weighted MACD on A/D line (distribution focus)
- **RSIv2**: RSI with A/D divergence detection
- **DMI**: Directional Movement Index with A/D divergence
- **Elder Impulse**: Bar coloring system using volume-weighted MACD
**Use Together**: VMACDv3 (momentum) + ACCDv3 (distribution) + Elder Impulse (bar colors) = complete volume-based trading system
---
*This indicator is for educational purposes. Past performance does not guarantee future results. Always practice proper risk management and never risk more than you can afford to lose.*
Ultimate RSI [captainua]Ultimate RSI
Overview
This indicator combines multiple RSI calculations with volume analysis, divergence detection, and trend filtering to provide a comprehensive RSI-based trading system. The script calculates RSI using three different periods (6, 14, 24) and applies various smoothing methods to reduce noise while maintaining responsiveness. The combination of these features creates a multi-layered confirmation system that reduces false signals by requiring alignment across multiple indicators and timeframes.
The script includes optimized configuration presets for instant setup: Scalping, Day Trading, Swing Trading, and Position Trading. Simply select a preset to instantly configure all settings for your trading style, or use Custom mode for full manual control. All settings include automatic input validation to prevent configuration errors and ensure optimal performance.
Configuration Presets
The script includes preset configurations optimized for different trading styles, allowing you to instantly configure the indicator for your preferred trading approach. Simply select a preset from the "Configuration Preset" dropdown menu:
- Scalping: Optimized for fast-paced trading with shorter RSI periods (4, 7, 9) and minimal smoothing. Noise reduction is automatically disabled, and momentum confirmation is disabled to allow faster signal generation. Designed for quick entries and exits in volatile markets.
- Day Trading: Balanced configuration for intraday trading with moderate RSI periods (6, 9, 14) and light smoothing. Momentum confirmation is enabled for better signal quality. Ideal for day trading strategies requiring timely but accurate signals.
- Swing Trading: Configured for medium-term positions with standard RSI periods (14, 14, 21) and moderate smoothing. Provides smoother signals suitable for swing trading timeframes. All noise reduction features remain active.
- Position Trading: Optimized for longer-term trades with extended RSI periods (24, 21, 28) and heavier smoothing. Filters are configured for highest-quality signals. Best for position traders holding trades over multiple days or weeks.
- Custom: Full manual control over all settings. All input parameters are available for complete customization. This is the default mode and maintains full backward compatibility with previous versions.
When a preset is selected, it automatically adjusts RSI periods, smoothing lengths, and filter settings to match the trading style. The preset configurations ensure optimal settings are applied instantly, eliminating the need for manual configuration. All settings can still be manually overridden if needed, providing flexibility while maintaining ease of use.
Input Validation and Error Prevention
The script includes comprehensive input validation to prevent configuration errors:
- Cross-Input Validation: Smoothing lengths are automatically validated to ensure they are always less than their corresponding RSI period length. If you set a smoothing length greater than or equal to the RSI length, the script automatically adjusts it to (RSI Length - 1). This prevents logical errors and ensures valid configurations.
- Input Range Validation: All numeric inputs have minimum and maximum value constraints enforced by TradingView's input system, preventing invalid parameter values.
- Smart Defaults: Preset configurations use validated default values that are tested and optimized for each trading style. When switching between presets, all related settings are automatically updated to maintain consistency.
Core Calculations
Multi-Period RSI:
The script calculates RSI using the standard Wilder's RSI formula: RSI = 100 - (100 / (1 + RS)), where RS = Average Gain / Average Loss over the specified period. Three separate RSI calculations run simultaneously:
- RSI(6): Uses 6-period lookback for high sensitivity to recent price changes, useful for scalping and early signal detection
- RSI(14): Standard 14-period RSI for balanced analysis, the most commonly used RSI period
- RSI(24): Longer 24-period RSI for trend confirmation, provides smoother signals with less noise
Each RSI can be smoothed using EMA, SMA, RMA (Wilder's smoothing), WMA, or Zero-Lag smoothing. Zero-Lag smoothing uses the formula: ZL-RSI = RSI + (RSI - RSI ) to reduce lag while maintaining signal quality. You can apply individual smoothing lengths to each RSI period, or use global smoothing where all three RSIs share the same smoothing length.
Dynamic Overbought/Oversold Thresholds:
Static thresholds (default 70/30) are adjusted based on market volatility using ATR. The formula: Dynamic OB = Base OB + (ATR × Volatility Multiplier × Base Percentage / 100), Dynamic OS = Base OS - (ATR × Volatility Multiplier × Base Percentage / 100). This adapts to volatile markets where traditional 70/30 levels may be too restrictive. During high volatility, the dynamic thresholds widen, and during low volatility, they narrow. The thresholds are clamped between 0-100 to remain within RSI bounds. The ATR is cached for performance optimization, updating on confirmed bars and real-time bars.
Adaptive RSI Calculation:
An adaptive RSI adjusts the standard RSI(14) based on current volatility relative to average volatility. The calculation: Adaptive Factor = (Current ATR / SMA of ATR over 20 periods) × Volatility Multiplier. If SMA of ATR is zero (edge case), the adaptive factor defaults to 0. The adaptive RSI = Base RSI × (1 + Adaptive Factor), clamped to 0-100. This makes the indicator more responsive during high volatility periods when traditional RSI may lag. The adaptive RSI is used for signal generation (buy/sell signals) but is not plotted on the chart.
Overbought/Oversold Fill Zones:
The script provides visual fill zones between the RSI line and the threshold lines when RSI is in overbought or oversold territory. The fill logic uses inclusive conditions: fills are shown when RSI is currently in the zone OR was in the zone on the previous bar. This ensures complete coverage of entry and exit boundaries. A minimum gap of 0.1 RSI points is maintained between the RSI plot and threshold line to ensure reliable polygon rendering in TradingView. The fill uses invisible plots at the threshold levels and the RSI value, with the fill color applied between them. You can select which RSI (6, 14, or 24) to use for the fill zones.
Divergence Detection
Regular Divergence:
Bullish divergence: Price makes a lower low (current low < lowest low from previous lookback period) while RSI makes a higher low (current RSI > lowest RSI from previous lookback period). Bearish divergence: Price makes a higher high (current high > highest high from previous lookback period) while RSI makes a lower high (current RSI < highest RSI from previous lookback period). The script compares current price/RSI values to the lowest/highest values from the previous lookback period using ta.lowest() and ta.highest() functions with index to reference the previous period's extreme.
Pivot-Based Divergence:
An enhanced divergence detection method that uses actual pivot points instead of simple lowest/highest comparisons. This provides more accurate divergence detection by identifying significant pivot lows/highs in both price and RSI. The pivot-based method uses a tolerance-based approach with configurable constants: 1% tolerance for price comparisons (priceTolerancePercent = 0.01) and 1.0 RSI point absolute tolerance for RSI comparisons (pivotTolerance = 1.0). Minimum divergence threshold is 1.0 RSI point (minDivergenceThreshold = 1.0). It looks for two recent pivot points and compares them: for bullish divergence, price makes a lower low (at least 1% lower) while RSI makes a higher low (at least 1.0 point higher). This method reduces false divergences by requiring actual pivot points rather than just any low/high within a period. When enabled, pivot-based divergence replaces the traditional method for more accurate signal generation.
Strong Divergence:
Regular divergence is confirmed by an engulfing candle pattern. Bullish engulfing requires: (1) Previous candle is bearish (close < open ), (2) Current candle is bullish (close > open), (3) Current close > previous open, (4) Current open < previous close. Bearish engulfing is the inverse: previous bullish, current bearish, current close < previous open, current open > previous close. Strong divergence signals are marked with visual indicators (🐂 for bullish, 🐻 for bearish) and have separate alert conditions.
Hidden Divergence:
Continuation patterns that signal trend continuation rather than reversal. Bullish hidden divergence: Price makes a higher low (current low > lowest low from previous period) but RSI makes a lower low (current RSI < lowest RSI from previous period). Bearish hidden divergence: Price makes a lower high (current high < highest high from previous period) but RSI makes a higher high (current RSI > highest RSI from previous period). These patterns indicate the trend is likely to continue in the current direction.
Volume Confirmation System
Volume threshold filtering requires current volume to exceed the volume SMA multiplied by the threshold factor. The formula: Volume Confirmed = Volume > (Volume SMA × Threshold). If the threshold is set to 0.1 or lower, volume confirmation is effectively disabled (always returns true). This allows you to use the indicator without volume filtering if desired.
Volume Climax is detected when volume exceeds: Volume SMA + (Volume StdDev × Multiplier). This indicates potential capitulation moments where extreme volume accompanies price movements. Volume Dry-Up is detected when volume falls below: Volume SMA - (Volume StdDev × Multiplier), indicating low participation periods that may produce unreliable signals. The volume SMA is cached for performance, updating on confirmed and real-time bars.
Multi-RSI Synergy
The script generates signals when multiple RSI periods align in overbought or oversold zones. This creates a confirmation system that reduces false signals. In "ALL" mode, all three RSIs (6, 14, 24) must be simultaneously above the overbought threshold OR all three must be below the oversold threshold. In "2-of-3" mode, any two of the three RSIs must align in the same direction. The script counts how many RSIs are in each zone: twoOfThreeOB = ((rsi6OB ? 1 : 0) + (rsi14OB ? 1 : 0) + (rsi24OB ? 1 : 0)) >= 2.
Synergy signals require: (1) Multi-RSI alignment (ALL or 2-of-3), (2) Volume confirmation, (3) Reset condition satisfied (enough bars since last synergy signal), (4) Additional filters passed (RSI50, Trend, ADX, Volume Dry-Up avoidance). Separate reset conditions track buy and sell signals independently. The reset condition uses ta.barssince() to count bars since the last trigger, returning true if the condition never occurred (allowing first signal) or if enough bars have passed.
Regression Forecasting
The script uses historical RSI values to forecast future RSI direction using four methods. The forecast horizon is configurable (1-50 bars ahead). Historical data is collected into an array, and regression coefficients are calculated based on the selected method.
Linear Regression: Calculates the least-squares fit line (y = mx + b) through the last N RSI values. The calculation: meanX = sumX / horizon, meanY = sumY / horizon, denominator = sumX² - horizon × meanX², m = (sumXY - horizon × meanX × meanY) / denominator, b = meanY - m × meanX. The forecast projects this line forward: forecast = b + m × i for i = 1 to horizon.
Polynomial Regression: Fits a quadratic curve (y = ax² + bx + c) to capture non-linear trends. The system of equations is solved using Cramer's rule with a 3×3 determinant. If the determinant is too small (< 0.0001), the system falls back to linear regression. Coefficients are calculated by solving: n×c + sumX×b + sumX²×a = sumY, sumX×c + sumX²×b + sumX³×a = sumXY, sumX²×c + sumX³×b + sumX⁴×a = sumX²Y. Note: Due to the O(n³) computational complexity of polynomial regression, the forecast horizon is automatically limited to a maximum of 20 bars when using polynomial regression to maintain optimal performance. If you set a horizon greater than 20 bars with polynomial regression, it will be automatically capped at 20 bars.
Exponential Smoothing: Applies exponential smoothing with adaptive alpha = 2/(horizon+1). The smoothing iterates from oldest to newest value: smoothed = alpha × series + (1 - alpha) × smoothed. Trend is calculated by comparing current smoothed value to an earlier smoothed value (at 60% of horizon): trend = (smoothed - earlierSmoothed) / (horizon - earlierIdx). Forecast: forecast = base + trend × i.
Moving Average: Uses the difference between short MA (horizon/2) and long MA (horizon) to estimate trend direction. Trend = (maShort - maLong) / (longLen - shortLen). Forecast: forecast = maShort + trend × i.
Confidence bands are calculated using RMSE (Root Mean Squared Error) of historical forecast accuracy. The error calculation compares historical values with forecast values: RMSE = sqrt(sumSquaredError / count). If insufficient data exists, it falls back to calculating standard deviation of recent RSI values. Confidence bands = forecast ± (RMSE × confidenceLevel). All forecast values and confidence bands are clamped to 0-100 to remain within RSI bounds. The regression functions include comprehensive safety checks: horizon validation (must not exceed array size), empty array handling, edge case handling for horizon=1 scenarios, division-by-zero protection, and bounds checking for all array access operations to prevent runtime errors.
Strong Top/Bottom Detection
Strong buy signals require three conditions: (1) RSI is at its lowest point within the bottom period: rsiVal <= ta.lowest(rsiVal, bottomPeriod), (2) RSI is below the oversold threshold minus a buffer: rsiVal < (oversoldThreshold - rsiTopBottomBuffer), where rsiTopBottomBuffer = 2.0 RSI points, (3) The absolute difference between current RSI and the lowest RSI exceeds the threshold value: abs(rsiVal - ta.lowest(rsiVal, bottomPeriod)) > threshold. This indicates a bounce from extreme levels with sufficient distance from the absolute low.
Strong sell signals use the inverse logic: RSI at highest point, above overbought threshold + rsiTopBottomBuffer (2.0 RSI points), and difference from highest exceeds threshold. Both signals also require: volume confirmation, reset condition satisfied (separate reset for buy vs sell), and all additional filters passed (RSI50, Trend, ADX, Volume Dry-Up avoidance).
The reset condition uses separate logic for buy and sell: resetCondBuy checks bars since isRSIAtBottom, resetCondSell checks bars since isRSIAtTop. This ensures buy signals reset based on bottom conditions and sell signals reset based on top conditions, preventing incorrect signal blocking.
Filtering System
RSI(50) Filter: Only allows buy signals when RSI(14) > 50 (bullish momentum) and sell signals when RSI(14) < 50 (bearish momentum). This filter ensures you're buying in uptrends and selling in downtrends from a momentum perspective. The filter is optional and can be disabled. Recommended to enable for noise reduction.
Trend Filter: Uses a long-term EMA (default 200) to determine trend direction. Buy signals require price above EMA, sell signals require price below EMA. The EMA slope is calculated as: emaSlope = ema - ema . Optional EMA slope filter additionally requires the EMA to be rising (slope > 0) for buy signals or falling (slope < 0) for sell signals. This provides stronger trend confirmation by requiring both price position and EMA direction.
ADX Filter: Uses the Directional Movement Index (calculated via ta.dmi()) to measure trend strength. Signals only fire when ADX exceeds the threshold (default 20), indicating a strong trend rather than choppy markets. The ADX calculation uses separate length and smoothing parameters. This filter helps avoid signals during sideways/consolidation periods.
Volume Dry-Up Avoidance: Prevents signals during periods of extremely low volume relative to average. If volume dry-up is detected and the filter is enabled, signals are blocked. This helps avoid unreliable signals that occur during low participation periods.
RSI Momentum Confirmation: Requires RSI to be accelerating in the signal direction before confirming signals. For buy signals, RSI must be consistently rising (recovering from oversold) over the lookback period. For sell signals, RSI must be consistently falling (declining from overbought) over the lookback period. The momentum check verifies that all consecutive changes are in the correct direction AND the cumulative change is significant. This filter ensures signals only fire when RSI momentum aligns with the signal direction, reducing false signals from weak momentum.
Multi-Timeframe Confirmation: Requires higher timeframe RSI to align with the signal direction. For buy signals, current RSI must be below the higher timeframe RSI by at least the confirmation threshold. For sell signals, current RSI must be above the higher timeframe RSI by at least the confirmation threshold. This ensures signals align with the larger trend context, reducing counter-trend trades. The higher timeframe RSI is fetched using request.security() from the selected timeframe.
All filters use the pattern: filterResult = not filterEnabled OR conditionMet. This means if a filter is disabled, it always passes (returns true). Filters can be combined, and all must pass for a signal to fire.
RSI Centerline and Period Crossovers
RSI(50) Centerline Crossovers: Detects when the selected RSI source crosses above or below the 50 centerline. Bullish crossover: ta.crossover(rsiSource, 50), bearish crossover: ta.crossunder(rsiSource, 50). You can select which RSI (6, 14, or 24) to use for these crossovers. These signals indicate momentum shifts from bearish to bullish (above 50) or bullish to bearish (below 50).
RSI Period Crossovers: Detects when different RSI periods cross each other. Available pairs: RSI(6) × RSI(14), RSI(14) × RSI(24), or RSI(6) × RSI(24). Bullish crossover: fast RSI crosses above slow RSI (ta.crossover(rsiFast, rsiSlow)), indicating momentum acceleration. Bearish crossover: fast RSI crosses below slow RSI (ta.crossunder(rsiFast, rsiSlow)), indicating momentum deceleration. These crossovers can signal shifts in momentum before price moves.
StochRSI Calculation
Stochastic RSI applies the Stochastic oscillator formula to RSI values instead of price. The calculation: %K = ((RSI - Lowest RSI) / (Highest RSI - Lowest RSI)) × 100, where the lookback is the StochRSI length. If the range is zero, %K defaults to 50.0. %K is then smoothed using SMA with the %K smoothing length. %D is calculated as SMA of smoothed %K with the %D smoothing length. All values are clamped to 0-100. You can select which RSI (6, 14, or 24) to use as the source for StochRSI calculation.
RSI Bollinger Bands
Bollinger Bands are applied to RSI(14) instead of price. The calculation: Basis = SMA(RSI(14), BB Period), StdDev = stdev(RSI(14), BB Period), Upper = Basis + (StdDev × Deviation Multiplier), Lower = Basis - (StdDev × Deviation Multiplier). This creates dynamic zones around RSI that adapt to RSI volatility. When RSI touches or exceeds the bands, it indicates extreme conditions relative to recent RSI behavior.
Noise Reduction System
The script includes a comprehensive noise reduction system to filter false signals and improve accuracy. When enabled, signals must pass multiple quality checks:
Signal Strength Requirement: RSI must be at least X points away from the centerline (50). For buy signals, RSI must be at least X points below 50. For sell signals, RSI must be at least X points above 50. This ensures signals only trigger when RSI is significantly in oversold/overbought territory, not just near neutral.
Extreme Zone Requirement: RSI must be deep in the OB/OS zone. For buy signals, RSI must be at least X points below the oversold threshold. For sell signals, RSI must be at least X points above the overbought threshold. This ensures signals only fire in extreme conditions where reversals are more likely.
Consecutive Bar Confirmation: The signal condition must persist for N consecutive bars before triggering. This reduces false signals from single-bar spikes or noise. The confirmation checks that the signal condition was true for all bars in the lookback period.
Zone Persistence (Optional): Requires RSI to remain in the OB/OS zone for N consecutive bars, not just touch it. This ensures RSI is truly in an extreme state rather than just briefly touching the threshold. When enabled, this provides stricter filtering for higher-quality signals.
RSI Slope Confirmation (Optional): Requires RSI to be moving in the expected signal direction. For buy signals, RSI should be rising (recovering from oversold). For sell signals, RSI should be falling (declining from overbought). This ensures momentum is aligned with the signal direction. The slope is calculated by comparing current RSI to RSI N bars ago.
All noise reduction filters can be enabled/disabled independently, allowing you to customize the balance between signal frequency and accuracy. The default settings provide a good balance, but you can adjust them based on your trading style and market conditions.
Alert System
The script includes separate alert conditions for each signal type: buy/sell (adaptive RSI crossovers), divergence (regular, strong, hidden), crossovers (RSI50 centerline, RSI period crossovers), synergy signals, and trend breaks. Each alert type has its own alertcondition() declaration with a unique title and message.
An optional cooldown system prevents alert spam by requiring a minimum number of bars between alerts of the same type. The cooldown check: canAlert = na(lastAlertBar) OR (bar_index - lastAlertBar >= cooldownBars). If the last alert bar is na (first alert), it always allows the alert. Each alert type maintains its own lastAlertBar variable, so cooldowns are independent per signal type. The default cooldown is 10 bars, which is recommended for noise reduction.
Higher Timeframe RSI
The script can display RSI from a higher timeframe using request.security(). This allows you to see the RSI context from a larger timeframe (e.g., daily RSI on an hourly chart). The higher timeframe RSI uses RSI(14) calculation from the selected timeframe. This provides context for the current timeframe's RSI position relative to the larger trend.
RSI Pivot Trendlines
The script can draw trendlines connecting pivot highs and lows on RSI(6). This feature helps visualize RSI trends and identify potential trend breaks.
Pivot Detection: Pivots are detected using a configurable period. The script can require pivots to have minimum strength (RSI points difference from surrounding bars) to filter out weak pivots. Lower minPivotStrength values detect more pivots (more trendlines), while higher values detect only stronger pivots (fewer but more significant trendlines). Pivot confirmation is optional: when enabled, the script waits N bars to confirm the pivot remains the extreme, reducing repainting. Pivot confirmation functions (f_confirmPivotLow and f_confirmPivotHigh) are always called on every bar for consistency, as recommended by TradingView. When pivot bars are not available (na), safe default values are used, and the results are then used conditionally based on confirmation settings. This ensures consistent calculations and prevents calculation inconsistencies.
Trendline Drawing: Uptrend lines connect confirmed pivot lows (green), and downtrend lines connect confirmed pivot highs (red). By default, only the most recent trendline is shown (old trendlines are deleted when new pivots are confirmed). This keeps the chart clean and uncluttered. If "Keep Historical Trendlines" is enabled, the script preserves up to N historical trendlines (configurable via "Max Trendlines to Keep", default 5). When historical trendlines are enabled, old trendlines are saved to arrays instead of being deleted, allowing you to see multiple trendlines simultaneously for better trend analysis. The arrays are automatically limited to prevent memory accumulation.
Trend Break Detection: Signals are generated when RSI breaks above or below trendlines. Uptrend breaks (RSI crosses below uptrend line) generate buy signals. Downtrend breaks (RSI crosses above downtrend line) generate sell signals. Optional trend break confirmation requires the break to persist for N bars and optionally include volume confirmation. Trendline angle filtering can exclude flat/weak trendlines from generating signals (minTrendlineAngle > 0 filters out weak/flat trendlines).
How Components Work Together
The combination of multiple RSI periods provides confirmation across different timeframes, reducing false signals. RSI(6) catches early moves, RSI(14) provides balanced signals, and RSI(24) confirms longer-term trends. When all three align (synergy), it indicates strong consensus across timeframes.
Volume confirmation ensures signals occur with sufficient market participation, filtering out low-volume false breakouts. Volume climax detection identifies potential reversal points, while volume dry-up avoidance prevents signals during unreliable low-volume periods.
Trend filters align signals with the overall market direction. The EMA filter ensures you're trading with the trend, and the EMA slope filter adds an additional layer by requiring the trend to be strengthening (rising EMA for buys, falling EMA for sells).
ADX filter ensures signals only fire during strong trends, avoiding choppy/consolidation periods. RSI(50) filter ensures momentum alignment with the trade direction.
Momentum confirmation requires RSI to be accelerating in the signal direction, ensuring signals only fire when momentum is aligned. Multi-timeframe confirmation ensures signals align with higher timeframe trends, reducing counter-trend trades.
Divergence detection identifies potential reversals before they occur, providing early warning signals. Pivot-based divergence provides more accurate detection by using actual pivot points. Hidden divergence identifies continuation patterns, useful for trend-following strategies.
The noise reduction system combines multiple filters (signal strength, extreme zone, consecutive bars, zone persistence, RSI slope) to significantly reduce false signals. These filters work together to ensure only high-quality signals are generated.
The synergy system requires alignment across all RSI periods for highest-quality signals, significantly reducing false positives. Regression forecasting provides forward-looking context, helping anticipate potential RSI direction changes.
Pivot trendlines provide visual trend analysis and can generate signals when RSI breaks trendlines, indicating potential reversals or continuations.
Reset conditions prevent signal spam by requiring a minimum number of bars between signals. Separate reset conditions for buy and sell signals ensure proper signal management.
Usage Instructions
Configuration Presets (Recommended): The script includes optimized preset configurations for instant setup. Simply select your trading style from the "Configuration Preset" dropdown:
- Scalping Preset: RSI(4, 7, 9) with minimal smoothing. Noise reduction disabled, momentum confirmation disabled for fastest signals.
- Day Trading Preset: RSI(6, 9, 14) with light smoothing. Momentum confirmation enabled for better signal quality.
- Swing Trading Preset: RSI(14, 14, 21) with moderate smoothing. Balanced configuration for medium-term trades.
- Position Trading Preset: RSI(24, 21, 28) with heavier smoothing. Optimized for longer-term positions with all filters active.
- Custom Mode: Full manual control over all settings. Default behavior matches previous script versions.
Presets automatically configure RSI periods, smoothing lengths, and filter settings. You can still manually adjust any setting after selecting a preset if needed.
Getting Started: The easiest way to get started is to select a configuration preset matching your trading style (Scalping, Day Trading, Swing Trading, or Position Trading) from the "Configuration Preset" dropdown. This instantly configures all settings for optimal performance. Alternatively, use "Custom" mode for full manual control. The default configuration (Custom mode) shows RSI(6), RSI(14), and RSI(24) with their default smoothing. Overbought/oversold fill zones are enabled by default.
Customizing RSI Periods: Adjust the RSI lengths (6, 14, 24) based on your trading timeframe. Shorter periods (6) for scalping, standard (14) for day trading, longer (24) for swing trading. You can disable any RSI period you don't need.
Smoothing Selection: Choose smoothing method based on your needs. EMA provides balanced smoothing, RMA (Wilder's) is traditional, Zero-Lag reduces lag but may increase noise. Adjust smoothing lengths individually or use global smoothing for consistency. Note: Smoothing lengths are automatically validated to ensure they are always less than the corresponding RSI period length. If you set smoothing >= RSI length, it will be auto-adjusted to prevent invalid configurations.
Dynamic OB/OS: The dynamic thresholds automatically adapt to volatility. Adjust the volatility multiplier and base percentage to fine-tune sensitivity. Higher values create wider thresholds in volatile markets.
Volume Confirmation: Set volume threshold to 1.2 (default) for standard confirmation, higher for stricter filtering, or 0.1 to disable volume filtering entirely.
Multi-RSI Synergy: Use "ALL" mode for highest-quality signals (all 3 RSIs must align), or "2-of-3" mode for more frequent signals. Adjust the reset period to control signal frequency.
Filters: Enable filters gradually to find your preferred balance. Start with volume confirmation, then add trend filter, then ADX for strongest confirmation. RSI(50) filter is useful for momentum-based strategies and is recommended for noise reduction. Momentum confirmation and multi-timeframe confirmation add additional layers of accuracy but may reduce signal frequency.
Noise Reduction: The noise reduction system is enabled by default with balanced settings. Adjust minSignalStrength (default 3.0) to control how far RSI must be from centerline. Increase requireConsecutiveBars (default 1) to require signals to persist longer. Enable requireZonePersistence and requireRsiSlope for stricter filtering (higher quality but fewer signals). Start with defaults and adjust based on your needs.
Divergence: Enable divergence detection and adjust lookback periods. Strong divergence (with engulfing confirmation) provides higher-quality signals. Hidden divergence is useful for trend-following strategies. Enable pivot-based divergence for more accurate detection using actual pivot points instead of simple lowest/highest comparisons. Pivot-based divergence uses tolerance-based matching (1% for price, 1.0 RSI point for RSI) for better accuracy.
Forecasting: Enable regression forecasting to see potential RSI direction. Linear regression is simplest, polynomial captures curves, exponential smoothing adapts to trends. Adjust horizon based on your trading timeframe. Confidence bands show forecast uncertainty - wider bands indicate less reliable forecasts.
Pivot Trendlines: Enable pivot trendlines to visualize RSI trends and identify trend breaks. Adjust pivot detection period (default 5) - higher values detect fewer but stronger pivots. Enable pivot confirmation (default ON) to reduce repainting. Set minPivotStrength (default 1.0) to filter weak pivots - lower values detect more pivots (more trendlines), higher values detect only stronger pivots (fewer trendlines). Enable "Keep Historical Trendlines" to preserve multiple trendlines instead of just the most recent one. Set "Max Trendlines to Keep" (default 5) to control how many historical trendlines are preserved. Enable trend break confirmation for more reliable break signals. Adjust minTrendlineAngle (default 0.0) to filter flat trendlines - set to 0.1-0.5 to exclude weak trendlines.
Alerts: Set up alerts for your preferred signal types. Enable cooldown to prevent alert spam. Each signal type has its own alert condition, so you can be selective about which signals trigger alerts.
Visual Elements and Signal Markers
The script uses various visual markers to indicate signals and conditions:
- "sBottom" label (green): Strong bottom signal - RSI at extreme low with strong buy conditions
- "sTop" label (red): Strong top signal - RSI at extreme high with strong sell conditions
- "SyBuy" label (lime): Multi-RSI synergy buy signal - all RSIs aligned oversold
- "SySell" label (red): Multi-RSI synergy sell signal - all RSIs aligned overbought
- 🐂 emoji (green): Strong bullish divergence detected
- 🐻 emoji (red): Strong bearish divergence detected
- 🔆 emoji: Weak divergence signals (if enabled)
- "H-Bull" label: Hidden bullish divergence
- "H-Bear" label: Hidden bearish divergence
- ⚡ marker (top of pane): Volume climax detected (extreme volume) - positioned at top for visibility
- 💧 marker (top of pane): Volume dry-up detected (very low volume) - positioned at top for visibility
- ↑ triangle (lime): Uptrend break signal - RSI breaks below uptrend line
- ↓ triangle (red): Downtrend break signal - RSI breaks above downtrend line
- Triangle up (lime): RSI(50) bullish crossover
- Triangle down (red): RSI(50) bearish crossover
- Circle markers: RSI period crossovers
All markers are positioned at the RSI value where the signal occurs, using location.absolute for precise placement.
Signal Priority and Interpretation
Signals are generated independently and can occur simultaneously. Higher-priority signals generally indicate stronger setups:
1. Multi-RSI Synergy signals (SyBuy/SySell) - Highest priority: Requires alignment across all RSI periods plus volume and filter confirmation. These are the most reliable signals.
2. Strong Top/Bottom signals (sTop/sBottom) - High priority: Indicates extreme RSI levels with strong bounce conditions. Requires volume confirmation and all filters.
3. Divergence signals - Medium-High priority: Strong divergence (with engulfing) is more reliable than regular divergence. Hidden divergence indicates continuation rather than reversal.
4. Adaptive RSI crossovers - Medium priority: Buy when adaptive RSI crosses below dynamic oversold, sell when it crosses above dynamic overbought. These use volatility-adjusted RSI for more accurate signals.
5. RSI(50) centerline crossovers - Medium priority: Momentum shift signals. Less reliable alone but useful when combined with other confirmations.
6. RSI period crossovers - Lower priority: Early momentum shift indicators. Can provide early warning but may produce false signals in choppy markets.
Best practice: Wait for multiple confirmations. For example, a synergy signal combined with divergence and volume climax provides the strongest setup.
Chart Requirements
For proper script functionality and compliance with TradingView requirements, ensure your chart displays:
- Symbol name: The trading pair or instrument name should be visible
- Timeframe: The chart timeframe should be clearly displayed
- Script name: "Ultimate RSI " should be visible in the indicator title
These elements help traders understand what they're viewing and ensure proper script identification. The script automatically includes this information in the indicator title and chart labels.
Performance Considerations
The script is optimized for performance:
- ATR and Volume SMA are cached using var variables, updating only on confirmed and real-time bars to reduce redundant calculations
- Forecast line arrays are dynamically managed: lines are reused when possible, and unused lines are deleted to prevent memory accumulation
- Calculations use efficient Pine Script functions (ta.rsi, ta.ema, etc.) which are optimized by TradingView
- Array operations are minimized where possible, with direct calculations preferred
- Polynomial regression automatically caps the forecast horizon at 20 bars (POLYNOMIAL_MAX_HORIZON constant) to prevent performance degradation, as polynomial regression has O(n³) complexity. This safeguard ensures optimal performance even with large horizon settings
- Pivot detection includes edge case handling to ensure reliable calculations even on early bars with limited historical data. Regression forecasting functions include comprehensive safety checks: horizon validation (must not exceed array size), empty array handling, edge case handling for horizon=1 scenarios, and division-by-zero protection in all mathematical operations
The script should perform well on all timeframes. On very long historical data, forecast lines may accumulate if the horizon is large; consider reducing the forecast horizon if you experience performance issues. The polynomial regression performance safeguard automatically prevents performance issues for that specific regression type.
Known Limitations and Considerations
- Forecast lines are forward-looking projections and should not be used as definitive predictions. They provide context but are not guaranteed to be accurate.
- Dynamic OB/OS thresholds can exceed 100 or go below 0 in extreme volatility scenarios, but are clamped to 0-100 range. This means in very volatile markets, the dynamic thresholds may not widen as much as the raw calculation suggests.
- Volume confirmation requires sufficient historical volume data. On new instruments or very short timeframes, volume calculations may be less reliable.
- Higher timeframe RSI uses request.security() which may have slight delays on some data feeds.
- Regression forecasting requires at least N bars of history (where N = forecast horizon) before it can generate forecasts. Early bars will not show forecast lines.
- StochRSI calculation requires the selected RSI source to have sufficient history. Very short RSI periods on new charts may produce less reliable StochRSI values initially.
Practical Use Cases
The indicator can be configured for different trading styles and timeframes:
Swing Trading: Select the "Swing Trading" preset for instant optimal configuration. This preset uses RSI periods (14, 14, 21) with moderate smoothing. Alternatively, manually configure: Use RSI(24) with Multi-RSI Synergy in "ALL" mode, combined with trend filter (EMA 200) and ADX filter. This configuration provides high-probability setups with strong confirmation across multiple RSI periods.
Day Trading: Select the "Day Trading" preset for instant optimal configuration. This preset uses RSI periods (6, 9, 14) with light smoothing and momentum confirmation enabled. Alternatively, manually configure: Use RSI(6) with Zero-Lag smoothing for fast signal detection. Enable volume confirmation with threshold 1.2-1.5 for reliable entries. Combine with RSI(50) filter to ensure momentum alignment. Strong top/bottom signals work well for day trading reversals.
Trend Following: Enable trend filter (EMA) and EMA slope filter for strong trend confirmation. Use RSI(14) or RSI(24) with ADX filter to avoid choppy markets. Hidden divergence signals are useful for trend continuation entries.
Reversal Trading: Focus on divergence detection (regular and strong) combined with strong top/bottom signals. Enable volume climax detection to identify capitulation moments. Use RSI(6) for early reversal signals, confirmed by RSI(14) and RSI(24).
Forecasting and Planning: Enable regression forecasting with polynomial or exponential smoothing methods. Use forecast horizon of 10-20 bars for swing trading, 5-10 bars for day trading. Confidence bands help assess forecast reliability.
Multi-Timeframe Analysis: Enable higher timeframe RSI to see context from larger timeframes. For example, use daily RSI on hourly charts to understand the larger trend context. This helps avoid counter-trend trades.
Scalping: Select the "Scalping" preset for instant optimal configuration. This preset uses RSI periods (4, 7, 9) with minimal smoothing, disables noise reduction, and disables momentum confirmation for faster signals. Alternatively, manually configure: Use RSI(6) with minimal smoothing (or Zero-Lag) for ultra-fast signals. Disable most filters except volume confirmation. Use RSI period crossovers (RSI(6) × RSI(14)) for early momentum shifts. Set volume threshold to 1.0-1.2 for less restrictive filtering.
Position Trading: Select the "Position Trading" preset for instant optimal configuration. This preset uses extended RSI periods (24, 21, 28) with heavier smoothing, optimized for longer-term trades. Alternatively, manually configure: Use RSI(24) with all filters enabled (Trend, ADX, RSI(50), Volume Dry-Up avoidance). Multi-RSI Synergy in "ALL" mode provides highest-quality signals.
Practical Tips and Best Practices
Getting Started: The fastest way to get started is to select a configuration preset that matches your trading style. Simply choose "Scalping", "Day Trading", "Swing Trading", or "Position Trading" from the "Configuration Preset" dropdown to instantly configure all settings optimally. For advanced users, use "Custom" mode for full manual control. The default configuration (Custom mode) is balanced and works well across different markets. After observing behavior, customize settings to match your trading style.
Reducing Repainting: All signals are based on confirmed bars, minimizing repainting. The script uses confirmed bar data for all calculations to ensure backtesting accuracy.
Signal Quality: Multi-RSI Synergy signals in "ALL" mode provide the highest-quality signals because they require alignment across all three RSI periods. These signals have lower frequency but higher reliability. For more frequent signals, use "2-of-3" mode. The noise reduction system further improves signal quality by requiring multiple confirmations (signal strength, extreme zone, consecutive bars, optional zone persistence and RSI slope). Adjust noise reduction settings to balance signal frequency vs. accuracy.
Filter Combinations: Start with volume confirmation, then add trend filter for trend alignment, then ADX filter for trend strength. Combining all three filters significantly reduces false signals but also reduces signal frequency. Find your balance based on your risk tolerance.
Volume Filtering: Set volume threshold to 0.1 or lower to effectively disable volume filtering if you trade instruments with unreliable volume data or want to test without volume confirmation. Standard confirmation uses 1.2-1.5 threshold.
RSI Period Selection: RSI(6) is most sensitive and best for scalping or early signal detection. RSI(14) provides balanced signals suitable for day trading. RSI(24) is smoother and better for swing trading and trend confirmation. You can disable any RSI period you don't need to reduce visual clutter.
Smoothing Methods: EMA provides balanced smoothing with moderate lag. RMA (Wilder's smoothing) is traditional and works well for RSI. Zero-Lag reduces lag but may increase noise. WMA gives more weight to recent values. Choose based on your preference for responsiveness vs. smoothness.
Forecasting: Linear regression is simplest and works well for trending markets. Polynomial regression captures curves and works better in ranging markets. Exponential smoothing adapts to trends. Moving average method is most conservative. Use confidence bands to assess forecast reliability.
Divergence: Strong divergence (with engulfing confirmation) is more reliable than regular divergence. Hidden divergence indicates continuation rather than reversal, useful for trend-following strategies. Pivot-based divergence provides more accurate detection by using actual pivot points instead of simple lowest/highest comparisons. Adjust lookback periods based on your timeframe: shorter for day trading, longer for swing trading. Pivot divergence period (default 5) controls the sensitivity of pivot detection.
Dynamic Thresholds: Dynamic OB/OS thresholds automatically adapt to volatility. In volatile markets, thresholds widen; in calm markets, they narrow. Adjust the volatility multiplier and base percentage to fine-tune sensitivity. Higher values create wider thresholds in volatile markets.
Alert Management: Enable alert cooldown (default 10 bars, recommended) to prevent alert spam. Each alert type has its own cooldown, so you can set different cooldowns for different signal types. For example, use shorter cooldown for synergy signals (high quality) and longer cooldown for crossovers (more frequent). The cooldown system works independently for each signal type, preventing spam while allowing different signal types to fire when appropriate.
Technical Specifications
- Pine Script Version: v6
- Indicator Type: Non-overlay (displays in separate panel below price chart)
- Repainting Behavior: Minimal - all signals are based on confirmed bars, ensuring accurate backtesting results
- Performance: Optimized with caching for ATR and volume calculations. Forecast arrays are dynamically managed to prevent memory accumulation.
- Compatibility: Works on all timeframes (1 minute to 1 month) and all instruments (stocks, forex, crypto, futures, etc.)
- Edge Case Handling: All calculations include safety checks for division by zero, NA values, and boundary conditions. Reset conditions and alert cooldowns handle edge cases where conditions never occurred or values are NA.
- Reset Logic: Separate reset conditions for buy signals (based on bottom conditions) and sell signals (based on top conditions) ensure logical correctness.
- Input Parameters: 60+ customizable parameters organized into logical groups for easy configuration. Configuration presets available for instant setup (Scalping, Day Trading, Swing Trading, Position Trading, Custom).
- Noise Reduction: Comprehensive noise reduction system with multiple filters (signal strength, extreme zone, consecutive bars, zone persistence, RSI slope) to reduce false signals.
- Pivot-Based Divergence: Enhanced divergence detection using actual pivot points for improved accuracy.
- Momentum Confirmation: RSI momentum filter ensures signals only fire when RSI is accelerating in the signal direction.
- Multi-Timeframe Confirmation: Optional higher timeframe RSI alignment for trend confirmation.
- Enhanced Pivot Trendlines: Trendline drawing with strength requirements, confirmation, and trend break detection.
Technical Notes
- All RSI values are clamped to 0-100 range to ensure valid oscillator values
- ATR and Volume SMA are cached for performance, updating on confirmed and real-time bars
- Reset conditions handle edge cases: if a condition never occurred, reset returns true (allows first signal)
- Alert cooldown handles na values: if no previous alert, cooldown allows the alert
- Forecast arrays are dynamically sized based on horizon, with unused lines cleaned up
- Fill logic uses a minimum gap (0.1) to ensure reliable polygon rendering in TradingView
- All calculations include safety checks for division by zero and boundary conditions. Regression functions validate that horizon doesn't exceed array size, and all array access operations include bounds checking to prevent out-of-bounds errors
- The script uses separate reset conditions for buy signals (based on bottom conditions) and sell signals (based on top conditions) for logical correctness
- Background coloring uses a fallback system: dynamic color takes priority, then RSI(6) heatmap, then monotone if both are disabled
- Noise reduction filters are applied after accuracy filters, providing multiple layers of signal quality control
- Pivot trendlines use strength requirements to filter weak pivots, reducing noise in trendline drawing. Historical trendlines are stored in arrays and automatically limited to prevent memory accumulation when "Keep Historical Trendlines" is enabled
- Volume climax and dry-up markers are positioned at the top of the pane for better visibility
- All calculations are optimized with conditional execution - features only calculate when enabled (performance optimization)
- Input Validation: Automatic cross-input validation ensures smoothing lengths are always less than RSI period lengths, preventing configuration errors
- Configuration Presets: Four optimized preset configurations (Scalping, Day Trading, Swing Trading, Position Trading) for instant setup, plus Custom mode for full manual control
- Constants Management: Magic numbers extracted to documented constants for improved maintainability and easier tuning (pivot tolerance, divergence thresholds, fill gap, etc.)
- TradingView Function Consistency: All TradingView functions (ta.crossover, ta.crossunder, ta.atr, ta.lowest, ta.highest, ta.lowestbars, ta.highestbars, etc.) and custom functions that depend on historical results (f_consecutiveBarConfirmation, f_rsiSlopeConfirmation, f_rsiZonePersistence, f_applyAllFilters, f_rsiMomentum, f_forecast, f_confirmPivotLow, f_confirmPivotHigh) are called on every bar for consistency, as recommended by TradingView. Results are then used conditionally when needed. This ensures consistent calculations and prevents calculation inconsistencies.
Hellenic EMA Matrix - PremiumHellenic EMA Matrix - Alpha Omega Premium
Complete User Guide
Table of Contents
Introduction
Indicator Philosophy
Mathematical Constants
EMA Types
Settings
Trading Signals
Visualization
Usage Strategies
FAQ
Introduction
Hellenic EMA Matrix is a premium indicator based on mathematical constants of nature: Phi (Phi - Golden Ratio), Pi (Pi), e (Euler's number). The indicator uses these universal constants to create dynamic EMAs that adapt to the natural rhythms of the market.
Key Features:
6 EMA types based on mathematical constants
Premium visualization with Neon Glow and Gradient Clouds
Automatic Fast/Mid/Slow EMA sorting
STRONG signals for powerful trends
Pulsing Ribbon Bar for instant trend assessment
Works on all timeframes (M1 - MN)
Indicator Philosophy
Why Mathematical Constants?
Traditional EMAs use arbitrary periods (9, 21, 50, 200). Hellenic Matrix goes further, using universal mathematical constants found in nature:
Phi (1.618) - Golden Ratio: galaxy spirals, seashells, human body proportions
Pi (3.14159) - Pi: circles, waves, cycles
e (2.71828) - Natural logarithm base: exponential growth, radioactive decay
Markets are also a natural system composed of millions of participants. Using mathematical constants allows tuning into the natural rhythms of market cycles.
Mathematical Constants
Phi (Phi) - Golden Ratio
Phi = 1.618033988749895
Properties:
Phi² = Phi + 1 = 2.618
Phi³ = 4.236
Phi⁴ = 6.854
Application: Ideal for trending movements and Fibonacci corrections
Pi (Pi) - Pi Number
Pi = 3.141592653589793
Properties:
2Pi = 6.283 (full circle)
3Pi = 9.425
4Pi = 12.566
Application: Excellent for cyclical markets and wave structures
e (Euler) - Euler's Number
e = 2.718281828459045
Properties:
e² = 7.389
e³ = 20.085
e⁴ = 54.598
Application: Suitable for exponential movements and volatile markets
EMA Types
1. Phi (Phi) - Golden Ratio EMA
Description: EMA based on the golden ratio
Period Formula:
Period = Phi^n × Base Multiplier
Parameters:
Phi Power Level (1-8): Power of Phi
Phi¹ = 1.618 → ~16 period (with Base=10)
Phi² = 2.618 → ~26 period
Phi³ = 4.236 → ~42 period (recommended)
Phi⁴ = 6.854 → ~69 period
Recommendations:
Phi² or Phi³ for day trading
Phi⁴ or Phi⁵ for swing trading
Works excellently as Fast EMA
2. Pi (Pi) - Circular EMA
Description: EMA based on Pi for cyclical movements
Period Formula:
Period = Pi × Multiple × Base Multiplier
Parameters:
Pi Multiple (1-10): Pi multiplier
1Pi = 3.14 → ~31 period (with Base=10)
2Pi = 6.28 → ~63 period (recommended)
3Pi = 9.42 → ~94 period
Recommendations:
2Pi ideal as Mid or Slow EMA
Excellently identifies cycles and waves
Use on volatile markets (crypto, forex)
3. e (Euler) - Natural EMA
Description: EMA based on natural logarithm
Period Formula:
Period = e^n × Base Multiplier
Parameters:
e Power Level (1-6): Power of e
e¹ = 2.718 → ~27 period (with Base=10)
e² = 7.389 → ~74 period (recommended)
e³ = 20.085 → ~201 period
Recommendations:
e² works excellently as Slow EMA
Ideal for stocks and indices
Filters noise well on lower timeframes
4. Delta (Delta) - Adaptive EMA
Description: Adaptive EMA that changes period based on volatility
Period Formula:
Period = Base Period × (1 + (Volatility - 1) × Factor)
Parameters:
Delta Base Period (5-200): Base period (default 20)
Delta Volatility Sensitivity (0.5-5.0): Volatility sensitivity (default 2.0)
How it works:
During low volatility → period decreases → EMA reacts faster
During high volatility → period increases → EMA smooths noise
Recommendations:
Works excellently on news and sharp movements
Use as Fast EMA for quick adaptation
Sensitivity 2.0-3.0 for crypto, 1.0-2.0 for stocks
5. Sigma (Sigma) - Composite EMA
Description: Composite EMA combining multiple active EMAs
Composition Methods:
Weighted Average (default):
Sigma = (Phi + Pi + e + Delta) / 4
Simple average of all active EMAs
Geometric Mean:
Sigma = fourth_root(Phi × Pi × e × Delta)
Geometric mean (more conservative)
Harmonic Mean:
Sigma = 4 / (1/Phi + 1/Pi + 1/e + 1/Delta)
Harmonic mean (more weight to smaller values)
Recommendations:
Enable for additional confirmation
Use as Mid EMA
Weighted Average - most universal method
6. Lambda (Lambda) - Wave EMA
Description: Wave EMA with sinusoidal period modulation
Period Formula:
Period = Base Period × (1 + Amplitude × sin(2Pi × bar / Frequency))
Parameters:
Lambda Base Period (10-200): Base period
Lambda Wave Amplitude (0.1-2.0): Wave amplitude
Lambda Wave Frequency (10-200): Wave frequency in bars
How it works:
Period pulsates sinusoidally
Creates wave effect following market cycles
Recommendations:
Experimental EMA for advanced users
Works well on cyclical markets
Frequency = 50 for day trading, 100+ for swing
Settings
Matrix Core Settings
Base Multiplier (1-100)
Multiplies all EMA periods
Base = 1: Very fast EMAs (Phi³ = 4, 2Pi = 6, e² = 7)
Base = 10: Standard (Phi³ = 42, 2Pi = 63, e² = 74)
Base = 20: Slow EMAs (Phi³ = 85, 2Pi = 126, e² = 148)
Recommendations by timeframe:
M1-M5: Base = 5-10
M15-H1: Base = 10-15 (recommended)
H4-D1: Base = 15-25
W1-MN: Base = 25-50
Matrix Source
Data source selection for EMA calculation:
close - closing price (standard)
open - opening price
high - high
low - low
hl2 - (high + low) / 2
hlc3 - (high + low + close) / 3
ohlc4 - (open + high + low + close) / 4
When to change:
hlc3 or ohlc4 for smoother signals
high for aggressive longs
low for aggressive shorts
Manual EMA Selection
Critically important setting! Determines which EMAs are used for signal generation.
Use Manual Fast/Slow/Mid Selection
Enabled (default): You select EMAs manually
Disabled: Automatic selection by periods
Fast EMA
Fast EMA - reacts first to price changes
Recommendations:
Phi Golden (recommended) - universal choice
Delta Adaptive - for volatile markets
Must be fastest (smallest period)
Slow EMA
Slow EMA - determines main trend
Recommendations:
Pi Circular (recommended) - excellent trend filter
e Natural - for smoother trend
Must be slowest (largest period)
Mid EMA
Mid EMA - additional signal filter
Recommendations:
e Natural (recommended) - excellent middle level
Pi Circular - alternative
None - for more frequent signals (only 2 EMAs)
IMPORTANT: The indicator automatically sorts selected EMAs by their actual periods:
Fast = EMA with smallest period
Mid = EMA with middle period
Slow = EMA with largest period
Therefore, you can select any combination - the indicator will arrange them correctly!
Premium Visualization
Neon Glow
Enable Neon Glow for EMAs - adds glowing effect around EMA lines
Glow Strength:
Light - subtle glow
Medium (recommended) - optimal balance
Strong - bright glow (may be too bright)
Effect: 2 glow layers around each EMA for 3D effect
Gradient Clouds
Enable Gradient Clouds - fills space between EMAs with gradient
Parameters:
Cloud Transparency (85-98): Cloud transparency
95-97 (recommended)
Higher = more transparent
Dynamic Cloud Intensity - automatically changes transparency based on EMA distance
Cloud Colors:
Phi-Pi Cloud:
Blue - when Pi above Phi (bullish)
Gold - when Phi above Pi (bearish)
Pi-e Cloud:
Green - when e above Pi (bullish)
Blue - when Pi above e (bearish)
2 layers for volumetric effect
Pulsing Ribbon Bar
Enable Pulsing Indicator Bar - pulsing strip at bottom/top of chart
Parameters:
Ribbon Position: Top / Bottom (recommended)
Pulse Speed: Slow / Medium (recommended) / Fast
Symbols and colors:
Green filled square - STRONG BULLISH
Pink filled square - STRONG BEARISH
Blue hollow square - Bullish (regular)
Red hollow square - Bearish (regular)
Purple rectangle - Neutral
Effect: Pulsation with sinusoid for living market feel
Signal Bar Highlights
Enable Signal Bar Highlights - highlights bars with signals
Parameters:
Highlight Transparency (88-96): Highlight transparency
Highlight Style:
Light Fill (recommended) - bar background fill
Thin Line - bar outline only
Highlights:
Golden Cross - green
Death Cross - pink
STRONG BUY - green
STRONG SELL - pink
Show Greek Labels
Shows Greek alphabet letters on last bar:
Phi - Phi EMA (gold)
Pi - Pi EMA (blue)
e - Euler EMA (green)
Delta - Delta EMA (purple)
Sigma - Sigma EMA (pink)
When to use: For education or presentations
Show Old Background
Old background style (not recommended):
Green background - STRONG BULLISH
Pink background - STRONG BEARISH
Blue background - Bullish
Red background - Bearish
Not recommended - use new Gradient Clouds and Pulsing Bar
Info Table
Show Info Table - table with indicator information
Parameters:
Position: Top Left / Top Right (recommended) / Bottom Left / Bottom Right
Size: Tiny / Small (recommended) / Normal / Large
Table contents:
EMA list - periods and current values of all active EMAs
Effects - active visual effects
TREND - current trend state:
STRONG UP - strong bullish
STRONG DOWN - strong bearish
Bullish - regular bullish
Bearish - regular bearish
Neutral - neutral
Momentum % - percentage deviation of price from Fast EMA
Setup - current Fast/Slow/Mid configuration
Trading Signals
Show Golden/Death Cross
Golden Cross - Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from below (bullish signal) Death Cross - Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from above (bearish signal)
Symbols:
Yellow dot "GC" below - Golden Cross
Dark red dot "DC" above - Death Cross
Show STRONG Signals
STRONG BUY and STRONG SELL - the most powerful indicator signals
Conditions for STRONG BULLISH:
EMA Alignment: Fast > Mid > Slow (all EMAs aligned)
Trend: Fast > Slow (clear uptrend)
Distance: EMAs separated by minimum 0.15%
Price Position: Price above Fast EMA
Fast Slope: Fast EMA rising
Slow Slope: Slow EMA rising
Mid Trending: Mid EMA also rising (if enabled)
Conditions for STRONG BEARISH:
Same but in reverse
Visual display:
Green label "STRONG BUY" below bar
Pink label "STRONG SELL" above bar
Difference from Golden/Death Cross:
Golden/Death Cross = crossing moment (1 bar)
STRONG signal = sustained trend (lasts several bars)
IMPORTANT: After fixes, STRONG signals now:
Work on all timeframes (M1 to MN)
Don't break on small retracements
Work with any Fast/Mid/Slow combination
Automatically adapt thanks to EMA sorting
Show Stop Loss/Take Profit
Automatic SL/TP level calculation on STRONG signal
Parameters:
Stop Loss (ATR) (0.5-5.0): ATR multiplier for stop loss
1.5 (recommended) - standard
1.0 - tight stop
2.0-3.0 - wide stop
Take Profit R:R (1.0-5.0): Risk/reward ratio
2.0 (recommended) - standard (risk 1.5 ATR, profit 3.0 ATR)
1.5 - conservative
3.0-5.0 - aggressive
Formulas:
LONG:
Stop Loss = Entry - (ATR × Stop Loss ATR)
Take Profit = Entry + (ATR × Stop Loss ATR × Take Profit R:R)
SHORT:
Stop Loss = Entry + (ATR × Stop Loss ATR)
Take Profit = Entry - (ATR × Stop Loss ATR × Take Profit R:R)
Visualization:
Red X - Stop Loss
Green X - Take Profit
Levels remain active while STRONG signal persists
Trading Signals
Signal Types
1. Golden Cross
Description: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from below
Signal: Beginning of bullish trend
How to trade:
ENTRY: On bar close with Golden Cross
STOP: Below local low or below Slow EMA
TARGET: Next resistance level or 2:1 R:R
Strengths:
Simple and clear
Works well on trending markets
Clear entry point
Weaknesses:
Lags (signal after movement starts)
Many false signals in ranging markets
May be late on fast moves
Optimal timeframes: H1, H4, D1
2. Death Cross
Description: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from above
Signal: Beginning of bearish trend
How to trade:
ENTRY: On bar close with Death Cross
STOP: Above local high or above Slow EMA
TARGET: Next support level or 2:1 R:R
Application: Mirror of Golden Cross
3. STRONG BUY
Description: All EMAs aligned + trend + all EMAs rising
Signal: Powerful bullish trend
How to trade:
ENTRY: On bar close with STRONG BUY or on pullback to Fast EMA
STOP: Below Fast EMA or automatic SL (if enabled)
TARGET: Automatic TP (if enabled) or by levels
TRAILING: Follow Fast EMA
Entry strategies:
Aggressive: Enter immediately on signal
Conservative: Wait for pullback to Fast EMA, then enter on bounce
Pyramiding: Add positions on pullbacks to Mid EMA
Position management:
Hold while STRONG signal active
Exit on STRONG SELL or Death Cross appearance
Move stop behind Fast EMA
Strengths:
Most reliable indicator signal
Doesn't break on pullbacks
Catches large moves
Works on all timeframes
Weaknesses:
Appears less frequently than other signals
Requires confirmation (multiple conditions)
Optimal timeframes: All (M5 - D1)
4. STRONG SELL
Description: All EMAs aligned down + downtrend + all EMAs falling
Signal: Powerful bearish trend
How to trade: Mirror of STRONG BUY
Visual Signals
Pulsing Ribbon Bar
Quick market assessment at a glance:
Symbol Color State
Filled square Green STRONG BULLISH
Filled square Pink STRONG BEARISH
Hollow square Blue Bullish
Hollow square Red Bearish
Rectangle Purple Neutral
Pulsation: Sinusoidal, creates living effect
Signal Bar Highlights
Bars with signals are highlighted:
Green highlight: STRONG BUY or Golden Cross
Pink highlight: STRONG SELL or Death Cross
Gradient Clouds
Colored space between EMAs shows trend strength:
Wide clouds - strong trend
Narrow clouds - weak trend or consolidation
Color change - trend change
Info Table
Quick reference in corner:
TREND: Current state (STRONG UP, Bullish, Neutral, Bearish, STRONG DOWN)
Momentum %: Movement strength
Effects: Active visual effects
Setup: Fast/Slow/Mid configuration
Usage Strategies
Strategy 1: "Golden Trailing"
Idea: Follow STRONG signals using Fast EMA as trailing stop
Settings:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Slow: e Natural (e²)
Base Multiplier: 10
Timeframe: H1, H4
Entry rules:
Wait for STRONG BUY
Enter on bar close or on pullback to Fast EMA
Stop below Fast EMA
Management:
Hold position while STRONG signal active
Move stop behind Fast EMA daily
Exit on STRONG SELL or Death Cross
Take Profit:
Partially close at +2R
Trail remainder until exit signal
For whom: Swing traders, trend followers
Pros:
Catches large moves
Simple rules
Emotionally comfortable
Cons:
Requires patience
Possible extended drawdowns on pullbacks
Strategy 2: "Scalping Bounces"
Idea: Scalp bounces from Fast EMA during STRONG trend
Settings:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 15, Sensitivity 2.0)
Mid: Phi Golden (Phi²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base Multiplier: 5
Timeframe: M5, M15
Entry rules:
STRONG signal must be active
Wait for price pullback to Fast EMA
Enter on bounce (candle closes above/below Fast EMA)
Stop behind local extreme (15-20 pips)
Take Profit:
+1.5R or to Mid EMA
Or to next level
For whom: Active day traders
Pros:
Many signals
Clear entry point
Quick profits
Cons:
Requires constant monitoring
Not all bounces work
Requires discipline for frequent trading
Strategy 3: "Triple Filter"
Idea: Enter only when all 3 EMAs and price perfectly aligned
Settings:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi)
Base Multiplier: 15
Timeframe: H4, D1
Entry rules (LONG):
STRONG BUY active
Price above all three EMAs
Fast > Mid > Slow (all aligned)
All EMAs rising (slope up)
Gradient Clouds wide and bright
Entry:
On bar close meeting all conditions
Or on next pullback to Fast EMA
Stop:
Below Mid EMA or -1.5 ATR
Take Profit:
First target: +3R
Second target: next major level
Trailing: Mid EMA
For whom: Conservative swing traders, investors
Pros:
Very reliable signals
Minimum false entries
Large profit potential
Cons:
Rare signals (2-5 per month)
Requires patience
Strategy 4: "Adaptive Scalper"
Idea: Use only Delta Adaptive EMA for quick volatility reaction
Settings:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 10, Sensitivity 3.0)
Mid: None
Slow: Delta Adaptive (Base 30, Sensitivity 2.0)
Base Multiplier: 3
Timeframe: M1, M5
Feature: Two different Delta EMAs with different settings
Entry rules:
Golden Cross between two Delta EMAs
Both Delta EMAs must be rising/falling
Enter on next bar
Stop:
10-15 pips or below Slow Delta EMA
Take Profit:
+1R to +2R
Or Death Cross
For whom: Scalpers on cryptocurrencies and forex
Pros:
Instant volatility adaptation
Many signals on volatile markets
Quick results
Cons:
Much noise on calm markets
Requires fast execution
High commissions may eat profits
Strategy 5: "Cyclical Trader"
Idea: Use Pi and Lambda for trading cyclical markets
Settings:
Fast: Pi Circular (1Pi)
Mid: Lambda Wave (Base 30, Amplitude 0.5, Frequency 50)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi)
Base Multiplier: 10
Timeframe: H1, H4
Entry rules:
STRONG signal active
Lambda Wave EMA synchronized with trend
Enter on bounce from Lambda Wave
For whom: Traders of cyclical assets (some altcoins, commodities)
Pros:
Catches cyclical movements
Lambda Wave provides additional entry points
Cons:
More complex to configure
Not for all markets
Lambda Wave may give false signals
Strategy 6: "Multi-Timeframe Confirmation"
Idea: Use multiple timeframes for confirmation
Scheme:
Higher TF (D1): Determine trend direction (STRONG signal)
Middle TF (H4): Wait for STRONG signal in same direction
Lower TF (M15): Look for entry point (Golden Cross or bounce from Fast EMA)
Settings for all TFs:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base Multiplier: 10
Rules:
All 3 TFs must show one trend
Entry on lower TF
Stop by lower TF
Target by higher TF
For whom: Serious traders and investors
Pros:
Maximum reliability
Large profit targets
Minimum false signals
Cons:
Rare setups
Requires analysis of multiple charts
Experience needed
Practical Tips
DOs
Use STRONG signals as primary - they're most reliable
Let signals develop - don't exit on first pullback
Use trailing stop - follow Fast EMA
Combine with levels - S/R, Fibonacci, volumes
Test on demo before real
Adjust Base Multiplier for your timeframe
Enable visual effects - they help see the picture
Use Info Table - quick situation assessment
Watch Pulsing Bar - instant state indicator
Trust auto-sorting of Fast/Mid/Slow
DON'Ts
Don't trade against STRONG signal - trend is your friend
Don't ignore Mid EMA - it adds reliability
Don't use too small Base Multiplier on higher TFs
Don't enter on Golden Cross in range - check for trend
Don't change settings during open position
Don't forget risk management - 1-2% per trade
Don't trade all signals in row - choose best ones
Don't use indicator in isolation - combine with Price Action
Don't set too tight stops - let trade breathe
Don't over-optimize - simplicity = reliability
Optimal Settings by Asset
US Stocks (SPY, AAPL, TSLA)
Recommendation:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base: 10-15
Timeframe: H4, D1
Features:
Use on daily for swing
STRONG signals very reliable
Works well on trending stocks
Forex (EUR/USD, GBP/USD)
Recommendation:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 15, Sens 2.0)
Mid: Phi Golden (Phi²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base: 8-12
Timeframe: M15, H1, H4
Features:
Delta Adaptive works excellently on news
Many signals on M15-H1
Consider spreads
Cryptocurrencies (BTC, ETH, altcoins)
Recommendation:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 10, Sens 3.0)
Mid: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Slow: e Natural (e²)
Base: 5-10
Timeframe: M5, M15, H1
Features:
High volatility - adaptation needed
STRONG signals can last days
Be careful with scalping on M1-M5
Commodities (Gold, Oil)
Recommendation:
Fast: Pi Circular (1Pi)
Mid: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi)
Base: 12-18
Timeframe: H4, D1
Features:
Pi works excellently on cyclical commodities
Gold responds especially well to Phi
Oil volatile - use wide stops
Indices (S&P500, Nasdaq, DAX)
Recommendation:
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Base: 15-20
Timeframe: H4, D1, W1
Features:
Very trending instruments
STRONG signals last weeks
Good for position trading
Alerts
The indicator supports 6 alert types:
1. Golden Cross
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: GOLDEN CROSS - Fast EMA crossed above Slow EMA - Bullish trend starting!"
When: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from below
2. Death Cross
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: DEATH CROSS - Fast EMA crossed below Slow EMA - Bearish trend starting!"
When: Fast EMA crosses Slow EMA from above
3. STRONG BULLISH
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: STRONG BULLISH SIGNAL - All EMAs aligned for powerful uptrend!"
When: All conditions for STRONG BUY met (first bar)
4. STRONG BEARISH
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: STRONG BEARISH SIGNAL - All EMAs aligned for powerful downtrend!"
When: All conditions for STRONG SELL met (first bar)
5. Bullish Ribbon
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: BULLISH RIBBON - EMAs aligned for uptrend"
When: EMAs aligned bullish + price above Fast EMA (less strict condition)
6. Bearish Ribbon
Message: "Hellenic Matrix: BEARISH RIBBON - EMAs aligned for downtrend"
When: EMAs aligned bearish + price below Fast EMA (less strict condition)
How to Set Up Alerts:
Open indicator on chart
Click on three dots next to indicator name
Select "Create Alert"
In "Condition" field select needed alert:
Golden Cross
Death Cross
STRONG BULLISH
STRONG BEARISH
Bullish Ribbon
Bearish Ribbon
Configure notification method:
Pop-up in browser
Email
SMS (in Premium accounts)
Push notifications in mobile app
Webhook (for automation)
Select frequency:
Once Per Bar Close (recommended) - once on bar close
Once Per Bar - during bar formation
Only Once - only first time
Click "Create"
Tip: Create separate alerts for different timeframes and instruments
FAQ
1. Why don't STRONG signals appear?
Possible reasons:
Incorrect Fast/Mid/Slow order
Solution: Indicator automatically sorts EMAs by periods, but ensure selected EMAs have different periods
Base Multiplier too large
Solution: Reduce Base to 5-10 on lower timeframes
Market in range
Solution: STRONG signals appear only in trends - this is normal
Too strict EMA settings
Solution: Try classic combination: Phi³ / Pi×2 / e² with Base=10
Mid EMA too close to Fast or Slow
Solution: Select Mid EMA with period between Fast and Slow
2. How often should STRONG signals appear?
Normal frequency:
M1-M5: 5-15 signals per day (very active markets)
M15-H1: 2-8 signals per day
H4: 3-10 signals per week
D1: 2-5 signals per month
W1: 2-6 signals per year
If too many signals - market very volatile or Base too small
If too few signals - market in range or Base too large
4. What are the best settings for beginners?
Universal "out of the box" settings:
Matrix Core:
Base Multiplier: 10
Source: close
Phi Golden: Enabled, Power = 3
Pi Circular: Enabled, Multiple = 2
e Natural: Enabled, Power = 2
Delta Adaptive: Enabled, Base = 20, Sensitivity = 2.0
Manual Selection:
Fast: Phi Golden
Mid: e Natural
Slow: Pi Circular
Visualization:
Gradient Clouds: ON
Neon Glow: ON (Medium)
Pulsing Bar: ON (Medium)
Signal Highlights: ON (Light Fill)
Table: ON (Top Right, Small)
Signals:
Golden/Death Cross: ON
STRONG Signals: ON
Stop Loss: OFF (while learning)
Timeframe for learning: H1 or H4
5. Can I use only one EMA?
No, minimum 2 EMAs (Fast and Slow) for signal generation.
Mid EMA is optional:
With Mid EMA = more reliable but rarer signals
Without Mid EMA = more signals but less strict filtering
Recommendation: Start with 3 EMAs (Fast/Mid/Slow), then experiment
6. Does the indicator work on cryptocurrencies?
Yes, works excellently! Especially good on:
Bitcoin (BTC)
Ethereum (ETH)
Major altcoins (SOL, BNB, XRP)
Recommended settings for crypto:
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 10-15, Sensitivity 2.5-3.0)
Mid: Pi Circular (2Pi)
Slow: e Natural (e²)
Base: 5-10
Timeframe: M15, H1, H4
Crypto market features:
High volatility → use Delta Adaptive
24/7 trading → set alerts
Sharp movements → wide stops
7. Can I trade only with this indicator?
Technically yes, but NOT recommended.
Best approach - combine with:
Price Action - support/resistance levels, candle patterns
Volume - movement strength confirmation
Fibonacci - retracement and extension levels
RSI/MACD - divergences and overbought/oversold
Fundamental analysis - news, company reports
Hellenic Matrix:
Excellently determines trend and its strength
Provides clear entry/exit points
Doesn't consider fundamentals
Doesn't see major levels
8. Why do Gradient Clouds change color?
Color depends on EMA order:
Phi-Pi Cloud:
Blue - Pi EMA above Phi EMA (bullish alignment)
Gold - Phi EMA above Pi EMA (bearish alignment)
Pi-e Cloud:
Green - e EMA above Pi EMA (bullish alignment)
Blue - Pi EMA above e EMA (bearish alignment)
Color change = EMA order change = possible trend change
9. What is Momentum % in the table?
Momentum % = percentage deviation of price from Fast EMA
Formula:
Momentum = ((Close - Fast EMA) / Fast EMA) × 100
Interpretation:
+0.5% to +2% - normal bullish momentum
+2% to +5% - strong bullish momentum
+5% and above - overheating (correction possible)
-0.5% to -2% - normal bearish momentum
-2% to -5% - strong bearish momentum
-5% and below - oversold (bounce possible)
Usage:
Monitor momentum during STRONG signals
Large momentum = don't enter (wait for pullback)
Small momentum = good entry point
10. How to configure for scalping?
Settings for scalping (M1-M5):
Base Multiplier: 3-5
Source: close or hlc3 (smoother)
Fast: Delta Adaptive (Base 8-12, Sensitivity 3.0)
Mid: None (for more signals)
Slow: Phi Golden (Phi²) or Pi Circular (1Pi)
Visualization:
- Gradient Clouds: ON (helps see strength)
- Neon Glow: OFF (doesn't clutter chart)
- Pulsing Bar: ON (quick assessment)
- Signal Highlights: ON
Signals:
- Golden/Death Cross: ON
- STRONG Signals: ON
- Stop Loss: ON (1.0-1.5 ATR, R:R 1.5-2.0)
Scalping rules:
Trade only STRONG signals
Enter on bounce from Fast EMA
Tight stops (10-20 pips)
Quick take profit (+1R to +2R)
Don't hold through news
11. How to configure for long-term investing?
Settings for investing (D1-W1):
Base Multiplier: 20-30
Source: close
Fast: Phi Golden (Phi³ or Phi⁴)
Mid: e Natural (e²)
Slow: Pi Circular (3Pi or 4Pi)
Visualization:
- Gradient Clouds: ON
- Neon Glow: ON (Medium)
- Everything else - to taste
Signals:
- Golden/Death Cross: ON
- STRONG Signals: ON
- Stop Loss: OFF (use percentage stop)
Investing rules:
Enter only on STRONG signals
Hold while STRONG active (weeks/months)
Stop below Slow EMA or -10%
Take profit: by company targets or +50-100%
Ignore short-term pullbacks
12. What if indicator slows down chart?
Indicator is optimized, but if it slows:
Disable unnecessary visual effects:
Neon Glow: OFF (saves 8 plots)
Gradient Clouds: ON but low quality
Lambda Wave EMA: OFF (if not using)
Reduce number of active EMAs:
Sigma Composite: OFF
Lambda Wave: OFF
Leave only Phi, Pi, e, Delta
Simplify settings:
Pulsing Bar: OFF
Greek Labels: OFF
Info Table: smaller size
13. Can I use on different timeframes simultaneously?
Yes! Multi-timeframe analysis is very powerful:
Classic scheme:
Higher TF (D1, W1) - determine global trend
Wait for STRONG signal
This is our trading direction
Middle TF (H4, H1) - look for confirmation
STRONG signal in same direction
Precise entry zone
Lower TF (M15, M5) - entry point
Golden Cross or bounce from Fast EMA
Precise stop loss
Example:
W1: STRONG BUY active (global uptrend)
H4: STRONG BUY appeared (confirmation)
M15: Wait for Golden Cross or bounce from Fast EMA → ENTRY
Advantages:
Maximum reliability
Clear timeframe hierarchy
Large targets
14. How does indicator work on news?
Delta Adaptive EMA adapts excellently to news:
Before news:
Low volatility → Delta EMA becomes fast → pulls to price
During news:
Sharp volatility spike → Delta EMA slows → filters noise
After news:
Volatility normalizes → Delta EMA returns to normal
Recommendations:
Don't trade at news release moment (spreads widen)
Wait for STRONG signal after news (2-5 bars)
Use Delta Adaptive as Fast EMA for quick reaction
Widen stops by 50-100% during important news
Advanced Techniques
Technique 1: "Divergences with EMA"
Idea: Look for discrepancies between price and Fast EMA
Bullish divergence:
Price makes lower low
Fast EMA makes higher low
= Possible reversal up
Bearish divergence:
Price makes higher high
Fast EMA makes lower high
= Possible reversal down
How to trade:
Find divergence
Wait for STRONG signal in divergence direction
Enter on confirmation
Technique 2: "EMA Tunnel"
Idea: Use space between Fast and Slow EMA as "tunnel"
Rules:
Wide tunnel - strong trend, hold position
Narrow tunnel - weak trend or consolidation, caution
Tunnel narrowing - trend weakening, prepare to exit
Tunnel widening - trend strengthening, can add
Visually: Gradient Clouds show this automatically!
Trading:
Enter on STRONG signal (tunnel starts widening)
Hold while tunnel wide
Exit when tunnel starts narrowing
Technique 3: "Wave Analysis with Lambda"
Idea: Lambda Wave EMA creates sinusoid matching market cycles
Setup:
Lambda Base Period: 30
Lambda Wave Amplitude: 0.5
Lambda Wave Frequency: 50 (adjusted to asset cycle)
How to find correct Frequency:
Look at historical cycles (distance between local highs)
Average distance = your Frequency
Example: if highs every 40-60 bars, set Frequency = 50
Trading:
Enter when Lambda Wave at bottom of sinusoid (growth potential)
Exit when Lambda Wave at top (fall potential)
Combine with STRONG signals
Technique 4: "Cluster Analysis"
Idea: When all EMAs gather in narrow cluster = powerful breakout soon
Cluster signs:
All EMAs (Phi, Pi, e, Delta) within 0.5-1% of each other
Gradient Clouds almost invisible
Price jumping around all EMAs
Trading:
Identify cluster (all EMAs close)
Determine breakout direction (where more volume, higher TFs direction)
Wait for breakout and STRONG signal
Enter on confirmation
Target = cluster size × 3-5
This is very powerful technique for big moves!
Technique 5: "Sigma as Dynamic Level"
Idea: Sigma Composite EMA = average of all EMAs = magnetic level
Usage:
Enable Sigma Composite (Weighted Average)
Sigma works as dynamic support/resistance
Price often returns to Sigma before trend continuation
Trading:
In trend: Enter on bounces from Sigma
In range: Fade moves from Sigma (trade return to Sigma)
On breakout: Sigma becomes support/resistance
Risk Management
Basic Rules
1. Position Size
Conservative: 1% of capital per trade
Moderate: 2% of capital per trade (recommended)
Aggressive: 3-5% (only for experienced)
Calculation formula:
Lot Size = (Capital × Risk%) / (Stop in pips × Pip value)
2. Risk/Reward Ratio
Minimum: 1:1.5
Standard: 1:2 (recommended)
Optimal: 1:3
Aggressive: 1:5+
3. Maximum Drawdown
Daily: -3% to -5%
Weekly: -7% to -10%
Monthly: -15% to -20%
Upon reaching limit → STOP trading until end of period
Position Management Strategies
1. Fixed Stop
Method:
Stop below/above Fast EMA or local extreme
DON'T move stop against position
Can move to breakeven
For whom: Beginners, conservative traders
2. Trailing by Fast EMA
Method:
Each day (or bar) move stop to Fast EMA level
Position closes when price breaks Fast EMA
Advantages:
Stay in trend as long as possible
Automatically exit on reversal
For whom: Trend followers, swing traders
3. Partial Exit
Method:
50% of position close at +2R
50% hold with trailing by Mid EMA or Slow EMA
Advantages:
Lock profit
Leave position for big move
Psychologically comfortable
For whom: Universal method (recommended)
4. Pyramiding
Method:
First entry on STRONG signal (50% of planned position)
Add 25% on pullback to Fast EMA
Add another 25% on pullback to Mid EMA
Overall stop below Slow EMA
Advantages:
Average entry price
Reduce risk
Increase profit in strong trends
Caution:
Works only in trends
In range leads to losses
For whom: Experienced traders
Trading Psychology
Correct Mindset
1. Indicator is a tool, not holy grail
Indicator shows probability, not guarantee
There will be losing trades - this is normal
Important is series statistics, not one trade
2. Trust the system
If STRONG signal appeared - enter
Don't search for "perfect" moment
Follow trading plan
3. Patience
STRONG signals don't appear every day
Better miss signal than enter against trend
Quality over quantity
4. Discipline
Always set stop loss
Don't move stop against position
Don't increase risk after losses
Beginner Mistakes
1. "I know better than indicator"
Indicator says STRONG BUY, but you think "too high, will wait for pullback"
Result: miss profitable move
Solution: Trust signals or don't use indicator
2. "Will reverse now for sure"
Trading against STRONG trend
Result: stops, stops, stops
Solution: Trend is your friend, trade with trend
3. "Will hold a bit more"
Don't exit when STRONG signal disappears
Greed eats profit
Solution: If signal gone - exit!
4. "I'll recover"
After losses double risk
Result: huge losses
Solution: Fixed % risk ALWAYS
5. "I don't like this signal"
Skip signals because of "feeling"
Result: inconsistency, no statistics
Solution: Trade ALL signals or clearly define filters
Trading Journal
What to Record
For each trade:
1. Entry/exit date and time
2. Instrument and timeframe
3. Signal type
Golden Cross
STRONG BUY
STRONG SELL
Death Cross
4. Indicator settings
Fast/Mid/Slow EMA
Base Multiplier
Other parameters
5. Chart screenshot
Entry moment
Exit moment
6. Trade parameters
Position size
Stop loss
Take Profit
R:R
7. Result
Profit/Loss in $
Profit/Loss in %
Profit/Loss in R
8. Notes
What was right
What was wrong
Emotions during trade
Lessons
Journal Analysis
Analyze weekly:
1. Win Rate
Win Rate = (Profitable trades / All trades) × 100%
Good: 50-60%
Excellent: 60-70%
Exceptional: 70%+
2. Average R
Average R = Sum of all R / Number of trades
Good: +0.5R
Excellent: +1.0R
Exceptional: +1.5R+
3. Profit Factor
Profit Factor = Total profit / Total losses
Good: 1.5+
Excellent: 2.0+
Exceptional: 3.0+
4. Maximum Drawdown
Track consecutive losses
If more than 5 in row - stop, check system
5. Best/Worst Trades
What was common in best trades? (do more)
What was common in worst trades? (avoid)
Pre-Trade Checklist
Technical Analysis
STRONG signal active (BUY or SELL)
All EMAs properly aligned (Fast > Mid > Slow or reverse)
Price on correct side of Fast EMA
Gradient Clouds confirm trend
Pulsing Bar shows STRONG state
Momentum % in normal range (not overheated)
No close strong levels against direction
Higher timeframe doesn't contradict
Risk Management
Position size calculated (1-2% risk)
Stop loss set
Take profit calculated (minimum 1:2)
R:R satisfactory
Daily/weekly risk limit not exceeded
No other open correlated positions
Fundamental Analysis
No important news in coming hours
Market session appropriate (liquidity)
No contradicting fundamentals
Understand why asset is moving
Psychology
Calm and thinking clearly
No emotions from previous trades
Ready to accept loss at stop
Following trading plan
Not revenging market for past losses
If at least one point is NO - think twice before entering!
Learning Roadmap
Week 1: Familiarization
Goals:
Install and configure indicator
Study all EMA types
Understand visualization
Tasks:
Add indicator to chart
Test all Fast/Mid/Slow settings
Play with Base Multiplier on different timeframes
Observe Gradient Clouds and Pulsing Bar
Study Info Table
Result: Comfort with indicator interface
Week 2: Signals
Goals:
Learn to recognize all signal types
Understand difference between Golden Cross and STRONG
Tasks:
Find 10 Golden Cross examples in history
Find 10 STRONG BUY examples in history
Compare their results (which worked better)
Set up alerts
Get 5 real alerts
Result: Understanding signals
Week 3: Demo Trading
Goals:
Start trading signals on demo account
Gather statistics
Tasks:
Open demo account
Trade ONLY STRONG signals
Keep journal (minimum 20 trades)
Don't change indicator settings
Strictly follow stop losses
Result: 20+ documented trades
Week 4: Analysis
Goals:
Analyze demo trading results
Optimize approach
Tasks:
Calculate win rate and average R
Find patterns in profitable trades
Find patterns in losing trades
Adjust approach (not indicator!)
Write trading plan
Result: Trading plan on 1 page
Month 2: Improvement
Goals:
Deepen understanding
Add additional techniques
Tasks:
Study multi-timeframe analysis
Test combinations with Price Action
Try advanced techniques (divergences, tunnels)
Continue demo trading (minimum 50 trades)
Achieve stable profitability on demo
Result: Win rate 55%+ and Profit Factor 1.5+
Month 3: Real Trading
Goals:
Transition to real account
Maintain discipline
Tasks:
Open small real account
Trade minimum lots
Strictly follow trading plan
DON'T increase risk
Focus on process, not profit
Result: Psychological comfort on real
Month 4+: Scaling
Goals:
Increase account
Become consistently profitable
Tasks:
With 60%+ win rate can increase risk to 2%
Upon doubling account can add capital
Continue keeping journal
Periodically review and improve strategy
Share experience with community
Result: Stable profitability month after month
Additional Resources
Recommended Reading
Technical Analysis:
"Technical Analysis of Financial Markets" - John Murphy
"Trading in the Zone" - Mark Douglas (psychology)
"Market Wizards" - Jack Schwager (trader interviews)
EMA and Moving Averages:
"Moving Averages 101" - Steve Burns
Articles on Investopedia about EMA
Risk Management:
"The Mathematics of Money Management" - Ralph Vince
"Trade Your Way to Financial Freedom" - Van K. Tharp
Trading Journals:
Edgewonk (paid, very powerful)
Tradervue (free version + premium)
Excel/Google Sheets (free)
Screeners:
TradingView Stock Screener
Finviz (stocks)
CoinMarketCap (crypto)
Conclusion
Hellenic EMA Matrix is a powerful tool based on universal mathematical constants of nature. The indicator combines:
Mathematical elegance - Phi, Pi, e instead of arbitrary numbers
Premium visualization - Neon Glow, Gradient Clouds, Pulsing Bar
Reliable signals - STRONG BUY/SELL work on all timeframes
Flexibility - 6 EMA types, adaptation to any trading style
Automation - auto-sorting EMAs, SL/TP calculation, alerts
Key Success Principles:
Simplicity - start with basic settings (Phi/Pi/e, Base=10)
Discipline - follow STRONG signals strictly
Patience - wait for quality setups
Risk Management - 1-2% per trade, ALWAYS
Journal - document every trade
Learning - constantly improve skills
Remember:
Indicator shows probability, not guarantee
Important is series statistics, not one trade
Psychology more important than technique
Quality more important than quantity
Process more important than result
Acknowledgments
Thank you for using Hellenic EMA Matrix - Alpha Omega Premium!
The indicator was created with love for mathematics, markets, and beautiful visualization.
Wishing you profitable trading!
Guide Version: 1.0
Date: 2025
Compatibility: Pine Script v6, TradingView
"In the simplicity of mathematical constants lies the complexity of market movements"
Quantum Rotational Field MappingQuantum Rotational Field Mapping (QRFM):
Phase Coherence Detection Through Complex-Plane Oscillator Analysis
Quantum Rotational Field Mapping applies complex-plane mathematics and phase-space analysis to oscillator ensembles, identifying high-probability trend ignition points by measuring when multiple independent oscillators achieve phase coherence. Unlike traditional multi-oscillator approaches that simply stack indicators or use boolean AND/OR logic, this system converts each oscillator into a rotating phasor (vector) in the complex plane and calculates the Coherence Index (CI) —a mathematical measure of how tightly aligned the ensemble has become—then generates signals only when alignment, phase direction, and pairwise entanglement all converge.
The indicator combines three mathematical frameworks: phasor representation using analytic signal theory to extract phase and amplitude from each oscillator, coherence measurement using vector summation in the complex plane to quantify group alignment, and entanglement analysis that calculates pairwise phase agreement across all oscillator combinations. This creates a multi-dimensional confirmation system that distinguishes between random oscillator noise and genuine regime transitions.
What Makes This Original
Complex-Plane Phasor Framework
This indicator implements classical signal processing mathematics adapted for market oscillators. Each oscillator—whether RSI, MACD, Stochastic, CCI, Williams %R, MFI, ROC, or TSI—is first normalized to a common scale, then converted into a complex-plane representation using an in-phase (I) and quadrature (Q) component. The in-phase component is the oscillator value itself, while the quadrature component is calculated as the first difference (derivative proxy), creating a velocity-aware representation.
From these components, the system extracts:
Phase (φ) : Calculated as φ = atan2(Q, I), representing the oscillator's position in its cycle (mapped to -180° to +180°)
Amplitude (A) : Calculated as A = √(I² + Q²), representing the oscillator's strength or conviction
This mathematical approach is fundamentally different from simply reading oscillator values. A phasor captures both where an oscillator is in its cycle (phase angle) and how strongly it's expressing that position (amplitude). Two oscillators can have the same value but be in opposite phases of their cycles—traditional analysis would see them as identical, while QRFM sees them as 180° out of phase (contradictory).
Coherence Index Calculation
The core innovation is the Coherence Index (CI) , borrowed from physics and signal processing. When you have N oscillators, each with phase φₙ, you can represent each as a unit vector in the complex plane: e^(iφₙ) = cos(φₙ) + i·sin(φₙ).
The CI measures what happens when you sum all these vectors:
Resultant Vector : R = Σ e^(iφₙ) = Σ cos(φₙ) + i·Σ sin(φₙ)
Coherence Index : CI = |R| / N
Where |R| is the magnitude of the resultant vector and N is the number of active oscillators.
The CI ranges from 0 to 1:
CI = 1.0 : Perfect coherence—all oscillators have identical phase angles, vectors point in the same direction, creating maximum constructive interference
CI = 0.0 : Complete decoherence—oscillators are randomly distributed around the circle, vectors cancel out through destructive interference
0 < CI < 1 : Partial alignment—some clustering with some scatter
This is not a simple average or correlation. The CI captures phase synchronization across the entire ensemble simultaneously. When oscillators phase-lock (align their cycles), the CI spikes regardless of their individual values. This makes it sensitive to regime transitions that traditional indicators miss.
Dominant Phase and Direction Detection
Beyond measuring alignment strength, the system calculates the dominant phase of the ensemble—the direction the resultant vector points:
Dominant Phase : φ_dom = atan2(Σ sin(φₙ), Σ cos(φₙ))
This gives the "average direction" of all oscillator phases, mapped to -180° to +180°:
+90° to -90° (right half-plane): Bullish phase dominance
+90° to +180° or -90° to -180° (left half-plane): Bearish phase dominance
The combination of CI magnitude (coherence strength) and dominant phase angle (directional bias) creates a two-dimensional signal space. High CI alone is insufficient—you need high CI plus dominant phase pointing in a tradeable direction. This dual requirement is what separates QRFM from simple oscillator averaging.
Entanglement Matrix and Pairwise Coherence
While the CI measures global alignment, the entanglement matrix measures local pairwise relationships. For every pair of oscillators (i, j), the system calculates:
E(i,j) = |cos(φᵢ - φⱼ)|
This represents the phase agreement between oscillators i and j:
E = 1.0 : Oscillators are in-phase (0° or 360° apart)
E = 0.0 : Oscillators are in quadrature (90° apart, orthogonal)
E between 0 and 1 : Varying degrees of alignment
The system counts how many oscillator pairs exceed a user-defined entanglement threshold (e.g., 0.7). This entangled pairs count serves as a confirmation filter: signals require not just high global CI, but also a minimum number of strong pairwise agreements. This prevents false ignitions where CI is high but driven by only two oscillators while the rest remain scattered.
The entanglement matrix creates an N×N symmetric matrix that can be visualized as a web—when many cells are bright (high E values), the ensemble is highly interconnected. When cells are dark, oscillators are moving independently.
Phase-Lock Tolerance Mechanism
A complementary confirmation layer is the phase-lock detector . This calculates the maximum phase spread across all oscillators:
For all pairs (i,j), compute angular distance: Δφ = |φᵢ - φⱼ|, wrapping at 180°
Max Spread = maximum Δφ across all pairs
If max spread < user threshold (e.g., 35°), the ensemble is considered phase-locked —all oscillators are within a narrow angular band.
This differs from entanglement: entanglement measures pairwise cosine similarity (magnitude of alignment), while phase-lock measures maximum angular deviation (tightness of clustering). Both must be satisfied for the highest-conviction signals.
Multi-Layer Visual Architecture
QRFM includes six visual components that represent the same underlying mathematics from different perspectives:
Circular Orbit Plot : A polar coordinate grid showing each oscillator as a vector from origin to perimeter. Angle = phase, radius = amplitude. This is a real-time snapshot of the complex plane. When vectors converge (point in similar directions), coherence is high. When scattered randomly, coherence is low. Users can see phase alignment forming before CI numerically confirms it.
Phase-Time Heat Map : A 2D matrix with rows = oscillators and columns = time bins. Each cell is colored by the oscillator's phase at that time (using a gradient where color hue maps to angle). Horizontal color bands indicate sustained phase alignment over time. Vertical color bands show moments when all oscillators shared the same phase (ignition points). This provides historical pattern recognition.
Entanglement Web Matrix : An N×N grid showing E(i,j) for all pairs. Cells are colored by entanglement strength—bright yellow/gold for high E, dark gray for low E. This reveals which oscillators are driving coherence and which are lagging. For example, if RSI and MACD show high E but Stochastic shows low E with everything, Stochastic is the outlier.
Quantum Field Cloud : A background color overlay on the price chart. Color (green = bullish, red = bearish) is determined by dominant phase. Opacity is determined by CI—high CI creates dense, opaque cloud; low CI creates faint, nearly invisible cloud. This gives an atmospheric "feel" for regime strength without looking at numbers.
Phase Spiral : A smoothed plot of dominant phase over recent history, displayed as a curve that wraps around price. When the spiral is tight and rotating steadily, the ensemble is in coherent rotation (trending). When the spiral is loose or erratic, coherence is breaking down.
Dashboard : A table showing real-time metrics: CI (as percentage), dominant phase (in degrees with directional arrow), field strength (CI × average amplitude), entangled pairs count, phase-lock status (locked/unlocked), quantum state classification ("Ignition", "Coherent", "Collapse", "Chaos"), and collapse risk (recent CI change normalized to 0-100%).
Each component is independently toggleable, allowing users to customize their workspace. The orbit plot is the most essential—it provides intuitive, visual feedback on phase alignment that no numerical dashboard can match.
Core Components and How They Work Together
1. Oscillator Normalization Engine
The foundation is creating a common measurement scale. QRFM supports eight oscillators:
RSI : Normalized from to using overbought/oversold levels (70, 30) as anchors
MACD Histogram : Normalized by dividing by rolling standard deviation, then clamped to
Stochastic %K : Normalized from using (80, 20) anchors
CCI : Divided by 200 (typical extreme level), clamped to
Williams %R : Normalized from using (-20, -80) anchors
MFI : Normalized from using (80, 20) anchors
ROC : Divided by 10, clamped to
TSI : Divided by 50, clamped to
Each oscillator can be individually enabled/disabled. Only active oscillators contribute to phase calculations. The normalization removes scale differences—a reading of +0.8 means "strongly bullish" regardless of whether it came from RSI or TSI.
2. Analytic Signal Construction
For each active oscillator at each bar, the system constructs the analytic signal:
In-Phase (I) : The normalized oscillator value itself
Quadrature (Q) : The bar-to-bar change in the normalized value (first derivative approximation)
This creates a 2D representation: (I, Q). The phase is extracted as:
φ = atan2(Q, I) × (180 / π)
This maps the oscillator to a point on the unit circle. An oscillator at the same value but rising (positive Q) will have a different phase than one that is falling (negative Q). This velocity-awareness is critical—it distinguishes between "at resistance and stalling" versus "at resistance and breaking through."
The amplitude is extracted as:
A = √(I² + Q²)
This represents the distance from origin in the (I, Q) plane. High amplitude means the oscillator is far from neutral (strong conviction). Low amplitude means it's near zero (weak/transitional state).
3. Coherence Calculation Pipeline
For each bar (or every Nth bar if phase sample rate > 1 for performance):
Step 1 : Extract phase φₙ for each of the N active oscillators
Step 2 : Compute complex exponentials: Zₙ = e^(i·φₙ·π/180) = cos(φₙ·π/180) + i·sin(φₙ·π/180)
Step 3 : Sum the complex exponentials: R = Σ Zₙ = (Σ cos φₙ) + i·(Σ sin φₙ)
Step 4 : Calculate magnitude: |R| = √
Step 5 : Normalize by count: CI_raw = |R| / N
Step 6 : Smooth the CI: CI = SMA(CI_raw, smoothing_window)
The smoothing step (default 2 bars) removes single-bar noise spikes while preserving structural coherence changes. Users can adjust this to control reactivity versus stability.
The dominant phase is calculated as:
φ_dom = atan2(Σ sin φₙ, Σ cos φₙ) × (180 / π)
This is the angle of the resultant vector R in the complex plane.
4. Entanglement Matrix Construction
For all unique pairs of oscillators (i, j) where i < j:
Step 1 : Get phases φᵢ and φⱼ
Step 2 : Compute phase difference: Δφ = φᵢ - φⱼ (in radians)
Step 3 : Calculate entanglement: E(i,j) = |cos(Δφ)|
Step 4 : Store in symmetric matrix: matrix = matrix = E(i,j)
The matrix is then scanned: count how many E(i,j) values exceed the user-defined threshold (default 0.7). This count is the entangled pairs metric.
For visualization, the matrix is rendered as an N×N table where cell brightness maps to E(i,j) intensity.
5. Phase-Lock Detection
Step 1 : For all unique pairs (i, j), compute angular distance: Δφ = |φᵢ - φⱼ|
Step 2 : Wrap angles: if Δφ > 180°, set Δφ = 360° - Δφ
Step 3 : Find maximum: max_spread = max(Δφ) across all pairs
Step 4 : Compare to tolerance: phase_locked = (max_spread < tolerance)
If phase_locked is true, all oscillators are within the specified angular cone (e.g., 35°). This is a boolean confirmation filter.
6. Signal Generation Logic
Signals are generated through multi-layer confirmation:
Long Ignition Signal :
CI crosses above ignition threshold (e.g., 0.80)
AND dominant phase is in bullish range (-90° < φ_dom < +90°)
AND phase_locked = true
AND entangled_pairs >= minimum threshold (e.g., 4)
Short Ignition Signal :
CI crosses above ignition threshold
AND dominant phase is in bearish range (φ_dom < -90° OR φ_dom > +90°)
AND phase_locked = true
AND entangled_pairs >= minimum threshold
Collapse Signal :
CI at bar minus CI at current bar > collapse threshold (e.g., 0.55)
AND CI at bar was above 0.6 (must collapse from coherent state, not from already-low state)
These are strict conditions. A high CI alone does not generate a signal—dominant phase must align with direction, oscillators must be phase-locked, and sufficient pairwise entanglement must exist. This multi-factor gating dramatically reduces false signals compared to single-condition triggers.
Calculation Methodology
Phase 1: Oscillator Computation and Normalization
On each bar, the system calculates the raw values for all enabled oscillators using standard Pine Script functions:
RSI: ta.rsi(close, length)
MACD: ta.macd() returning histogram component
Stochastic: ta.stoch() smoothed with ta.sma()
CCI: ta.cci(close, length)
Williams %R: ta.wpr(length)
MFI: ta.mfi(hlc3, length)
ROC: ta.roc(close, length)
TSI: ta.tsi(close, short, long)
Each raw value is then passed through a normalization function:
normalize(value, overbought_level, oversold_level) = 2 × (value - oversold) / (overbought - oversold) - 1
This maps the oscillator's typical range to , where -1 represents extreme bearish, 0 represents neutral, and +1 represents extreme bullish.
For oscillators without fixed ranges (MACD, ROC, TSI), statistical normalization is used: divide by a rolling standard deviation or fixed divisor, then clamp to .
Phase 2: Phasor Extraction
For each normalized oscillator value val:
I = val (in-phase component)
Q = val - val (quadrature component, first difference)
Phase calculation:
phi_rad = atan2(Q, I)
phi_deg = phi_rad × (180 / π)
Amplitude calculation:
A = √(I² + Q²)
These values are stored in arrays: osc_phases and osc_amps for each oscillator n.
Phase 3: Complex Summation and Coherence
Initialize accumulators:
sum_cos = 0
sum_sin = 0
For each oscillator n = 0 to N-1:
phi_rad = osc_phases × (π / 180)
sum_cos += cos(phi_rad)
sum_sin += sin(phi_rad)
Resultant magnitude:
resultant_mag = √(sum_cos² + sum_sin²)
Coherence Index (raw):
CI_raw = resultant_mag / N
Smoothed CI:
CI = SMA(CI_raw, smoothing_window)
Dominant phase:
phi_dom_rad = atan2(sum_sin, sum_cos)
phi_dom_deg = phi_dom_rad × (180 / π)
Phase 4: Entanglement Matrix Population
For i = 0 to N-2:
For j = i+1 to N-1:
phi_i = osc_phases × (π / 180)
phi_j = osc_phases × (π / 180)
delta_phi = phi_i - phi_j
E = |cos(delta_phi)|
matrix_index_ij = i × N + j
matrix_index_ji = j × N + i
entangle_matrix = E
entangle_matrix = E
if E >= threshold:
entangled_pairs += 1
The matrix uses flat array storage with index mapping: index(row, col) = row × N + col.
Phase 5: Phase-Lock Check
max_spread = 0
For i = 0 to N-2:
For j = i+1 to N-1:
delta = |osc_phases - osc_phases |
if delta > 180:
delta = 360 - delta
max_spread = max(max_spread, delta)
phase_locked = (max_spread < tolerance)
Phase 6: Signal Evaluation
Ignition Long :
ignition_long = (CI crosses above threshold) AND
(phi_dom > -90 AND phi_dom < 90) AND
phase_locked AND
(entangled_pairs >= minimum)
Ignition Short :
ignition_short = (CI crosses above threshold) AND
(phi_dom < -90 OR phi_dom > 90) AND
phase_locked AND
(entangled_pairs >= minimum)
Collapse :
CI_prev = CI
collapse = (CI_prev - CI > collapse_threshold) AND (CI_prev > 0.6)
All signals are evaluated on bar close. The crossover and crossunder functions ensure signals fire only once when conditions transition from false to true.
Phase 7: Field Strength and Visualization Metrics
Average Amplitude :
avg_amp = (Σ osc_amps ) / N
Field Strength :
field_strength = CI × avg_amp
Collapse Risk (for dashboard):
collapse_risk = (CI - CI) / max(CI , 0.1)
collapse_risk_pct = clamp(collapse_risk × 100, 0, 100)
Quantum State Classification :
if (CI > threshold AND phase_locked):
state = "Ignition"
else if (CI > 0.6):
state = "Coherent"
else if (collapse):
state = "Collapse"
else:
state = "Chaos"
Phase 8: Visual Rendering
Orbit Plot : For each oscillator, convert polar (phase, amplitude) to Cartesian (x, y) for grid placement:
radius = amplitude × grid_center × 0.8
x = radius × cos(phase × π/180)
y = radius × sin(phase × π/180)
col = center + x (mapped to grid coordinates)
row = center - y
Heat Map : For each oscillator row and time column, retrieve historical phase value at lookback = (columns - col) × sample_rate, then map phase to color using a hue gradient.
Entanglement Web : Render matrix as table cell with background color opacity = E(i,j).
Field Cloud : Background color = (phi_dom > -90 AND phi_dom < 90) ? green : red, with opacity = mix(min_opacity, max_opacity, CI).
All visual components render only on the last bar (barstate.islast) to minimize computational overhead.
How to Use This Indicator
Step 1 : Apply QRFM to your chart. It works on all timeframes and asset classes, though 15-minute to 4-hour timeframes provide the best balance of responsiveness and noise reduction.
Step 2 : Enable the dashboard (default: top right) and the circular orbit plot (default: middle left). These are your primary visual feedback tools.
Step 3 : Optionally enable the heat map, entanglement web, and field cloud based on your preference. New users may find all visuals overwhelming; start with dashboard + orbit plot.
Step 4 : Observe for 50-100 bars to let the indicator establish baseline coherence patterns. Markets have different "normal" CI ranges—some instruments naturally run higher or lower coherence.
Understanding the Circular Orbit Plot
The orbit plot is a polar grid showing oscillator vectors in real-time:
Center point : Neutral (zero phase and amplitude)
Each vector : A line from center to a point on the grid
Vector angle : The oscillator's phase (0° = right/east, 90° = up/north, 180° = left/west, -90° = down/south)
Vector length : The oscillator's amplitude (short = weak signal, long = strong signal)
Vector label : First letter of oscillator name (R = RSI, M = MACD, etc.)
What to watch :
Convergence : When all vectors cluster in one quadrant or sector, CI is rising and coherence is forming. This is your pre-signal warning.
Scatter : When vectors point in random directions (360° spread), CI is low and the market is in a non-trending or transitional regime.
Rotation : When the cluster rotates smoothly around the circle, the ensemble is in coherent oscillation—typically seen during steady trends.
Sudden flips : When the cluster rapidly jumps from one side to the opposite (e.g., +90° to -90°), a phase reversal has occurred—often coinciding with trend reversals.
Example: If you see RSI, MACD, and Stochastic all pointing toward 45° (northeast) with long vectors, while CCI, TSI, and ROC point toward 40-50° as well, coherence is high and dominant phase is bullish. Expect an ignition signal if CI crosses threshold.
Reading Dashboard Metrics
The dashboard provides numerical confirmation of what the orbit plot shows visually:
CI : Displays as 0-100%. Above 70% = high coherence (strong regime), 40-70% = moderate, below 40% = low (poor conditions for trend entries).
Dom Phase : Angle in degrees with directional arrow. ⬆ = bullish bias, ⬇ = bearish bias, ⬌ = neutral.
Field Strength : CI weighted by amplitude. High values (> 0.6) indicate not just alignment but strong alignment.
Entangled Pairs : Count of oscillator pairs with E > threshold. Higher = more confirmation. If minimum is set to 4, you need at least 4 pairs entangled for signals.
Phase Lock : 🔒 YES (all oscillators within tolerance) or 🔓 NO (spread too wide).
State : Real-time classification:
🚀 IGNITION: CI just crossed threshold with phase-lock
⚡ COHERENT: CI is high and stable
💥 COLLAPSE: CI has dropped sharply
🌀 CHAOS: Low CI, scattered phases
Collapse Risk : 0-100% scale based on recent CI change. Above 50% warns of imminent breakdown.
Interpreting Signals
Long Ignition (Blue Triangle Below Price) :
Occurs when CI crosses above threshold (e.g., 0.80)
Dominant phase is in bullish range (-90° to +90°)
All oscillators are phase-locked (within tolerance)
Minimum entangled pairs requirement met
Interpretation : The oscillator ensemble has transitioned from disorder to coherent bullish alignment. This is a high-probability long entry point. The multi-layer confirmation (CI + phase direction + lock + entanglement) ensures this is not a single-oscillator whipsaw.
Short Ignition (Red Triangle Above Price) :
Same conditions as long, but dominant phase is in bearish range (< -90° or > +90°)
Interpretation : Coherent bearish alignment has formed. High-probability short entry.
Collapse (Circles Above and Below Price) :
CI has dropped by more than the collapse threshold (e.g., 0.55) over a 5-bar window
CI was previously above 0.6 (collapsing from coherent state)
Interpretation : Phase coherence has broken down. If you are in a position, this is an exit warning. If looking to enter, stand aside—regime is transitioning.
Phase-Time Heat Map Patterns
Enable the heat map and position it at bottom right. The rows represent individual oscillators, columns represent time bins (most recent on left).
Pattern: Horizontal Color Bands
If a row (e.g., RSI) shows consistent color across columns (say, green for several bins), that oscillator has maintained stable phase over time. If all rows show horizontal bands of similar color, the entire ensemble has been phase-locked for an extended period—this is a strong trending regime.
Pattern: Vertical Color Bands
If a column (single time bin) shows all cells with the same or very similar color, that moment in time had high coherence. These vertical bands often align with ignition signals or major price pivots.
Pattern: Rainbow Chaos
If cells are random colors (red, green, yellow mixed with no pattern), coherence is low. The ensemble is scattered. Avoid trading during these periods unless you have external confirmation.
Pattern: Color Transition
If you see a row transition from red to green (or vice versa) sharply, that oscillator has phase-flipped. If multiple rows do this simultaneously, a regime change is underway.
Entanglement Web Analysis
Enable the web matrix (default: opposite corner from heat map). It shows an N×N grid where N = number of active oscillators.
Bright Yellow/Gold Cells : High pairwise entanglement. For example, if the RSI-MACD cell is bright gold, those two oscillators are moving in phase. If the RSI-Stochastic cell is bright, they are entangled as well.
Dark Gray Cells : Low entanglement. Oscillators are decorrelated or in quadrature.
Diagonal : Always marked with "—" because an oscillator is always perfectly entangled with itself.
How to use :
Scan for clustering: If most cells are bright, coherence is high across the board. If only a few cells are bright, coherence is driven by a subset (e.g., RSI and MACD are aligned, but nothing else is—weak signal).
Identify laggards: If one row/column is entirely dark, that oscillator is the outlier. You may choose to disable it or monitor for when it joins the group (late confirmation).
Watch for web formation: During low-coherence periods, the matrix is mostly dark. As coherence builds, cells begin lighting up. A sudden "web" of connections forming visually precedes ignition signals.
Trading Workflow
Step 1: Monitor Coherence Level
Check the dashboard CI metric or observe the orbit plot. If CI is below 40% and vectors are scattered, conditions are poor for trend entries. Wait.
Step 2: Detect Coherence Building
When CI begins rising (say, from 30% to 50-60%) and you notice vectors on the orbit plot starting to cluster, coherence is forming. This is your alert phase—do not enter yet, but prepare.
Step 3: Confirm Phase Direction
Check the dominant phase angle and the orbit plot quadrant where clustering is occurring:
Clustering in right half (0° to ±90°): Bullish bias forming
Clustering in left half (±90° to 180°): Bearish bias forming
Verify the dashboard shows the corresponding directional arrow (⬆ or ⬇).
Step 4: Wait for Signal Confirmation
Do not enter based on rising CI alone. Wait for the full ignition signal:
CI crosses above threshold
Phase-lock indicator shows 🔒 YES
Entangled pairs count >= minimum
Directional triangle appears on chart
This ensures all layers have aligned.
Step 5: Execute Entry
Long : Blue triangle below price appears → enter long
Short : Red triangle above price appears → enter short
Step 6: Position Management
Initial Stop : Place stop loss based on your risk management rules (e.g., recent swing low/high, ATR-based buffer).
Monitoring :
Watch the field cloud density. If it remains opaque and colored in your direction, the regime is intact.
Check dashboard collapse risk. If it rises above 50%, prepare for exit.
Monitor the orbit plot. If vectors begin scattering or the cluster flips to the opposite side, coherence is breaking.
Exit Triggers :
Collapse signal fires (circles appear)
Dominant phase flips to opposite half-plane
CI drops below 40% (coherence lost)
Price hits your profit target or trailing stop
Step 7: Post-Exit Analysis
After exiting, observe whether a new ignition forms in the opposite direction (reversal) or if CI remains low (transition to range). Use this to decide whether to re-enter, reverse, or stand aside.
Best Practices
Use Price Structure as Context
QRFM identifies when coherence forms but does not specify where price will go. Combine ignition signals with support/resistance levels, trendlines, or chart patterns. For example:
Long ignition near a major support level after a pullback: high-probability bounce
Long ignition in the middle of a range with no structure: lower probability
Multi-Timeframe Confirmation
Open QRFM on two timeframes simultaneously:
Higher timeframe (e.g., 4-hour): Use CI level to determine regime bias. If 4H CI is above 60% and dominant phase is bullish, the market is in a bullish regime.
Lower timeframe (e.g., 15-minute): Execute entries on ignition signals that align with the higher timeframe bias.
This prevents counter-trend trades and increases win rate.
Distinguish Between Regime Types
High CI, stable dominant phase (State: Coherent) : Trending market. Ignitions are continuation signals; collapses are profit-taking or reversal warnings.
Low CI, erratic dominant phase (State: Chaos) : Ranging or choppy market. Avoid ignition signals or reduce position size. Wait for coherence to establish.
Moderate CI with frequent collapses : Whipsaw environment. Use wider stops or stand aside.
Adjust Parameters to Instrument and Timeframe
Crypto/Forex (high volatility) : Lower ignition threshold (0.65-0.75), lower CI smoothing (2-3), shorter oscillator lengths (7-10).
Stocks/Indices (moderate volatility) : Standard settings (threshold 0.75-0.85, smoothing 5-7, oscillator lengths 14).
Lower timeframes (5-15 min) : Reduce phase sample rate to 1-2 for responsiveness.
Higher timeframes (daily+) : Increase CI smoothing and oscillator lengths for noise reduction.
Use Entanglement Count as Conviction Filter
The minimum entangled pairs setting controls signal strictness:
Low (1-2) : More signals, lower quality (acceptable if you have other confirmation)
Medium (3-5) : Balanced (recommended for most traders)
High (6+) : Very strict, fewer signals, highest quality
Adjust based on your trade frequency preference and risk tolerance.
Monitor Oscillator Contribution
Use the entanglement web to see which oscillators are driving coherence. If certain oscillators are consistently dark (low E with all others), they may be adding noise. Consider disabling them. For example:
On low-volume instruments, MFI may be unreliable → disable MFI
On strongly trending instruments, mean-reversion oscillators (Stochastic, RSI) may lag → reduce weight or disable
Respect the Collapse Signal
Collapse events are early warnings. Price may continue in the original direction for several bars after collapse fires, but the underlying regime has weakened. Best practice:
If in profit: Take partial or full profit on collapse
If at breakeven/small loss: Exit immediately
If collapse occurs shortly after entry: Likely a false ignition; exit to avoid drawdown
Collapses do not guarantee immediate reversals—they signal uncertainty .
Combine with Volume Analysis
If your instrument has reliable volume:
Ignitions with expanding volume: Higher conviction
Ignitions with declining volume: Weaker, possibly false
Collapses with volume spikes: Strong reversal signal
Collapses with low volume: May just be consolidation
Volume is not built into QRFM (except via MFI), so add it as external confirmation.
Observe the Phase Spiral
The spiral provides a quick visual cue for rotation consistency:
Tight, smooth spiral : Ensemble is rotating coherently (trending)
Loose, erratic spiral : Phase is jumping around (ranging or transitional)
If the spiral tightens, coherence is building. If it loosens, coherence is dissolving.
Do Not Overtrade Low-Coherence Periods
When CI is persistently below 40% and the state is "Chaos," the market is not in a regime where phase analysis is predictive. During these times:
Reduce position size
Widen stops
Wait for coherence to return
QRFM's strength is regime detection. If there is no regime, the tool correctly signals "stand aside."
Use Alerts Strategically
Set alerts for:
Long Ignition
Short Ignition
Collapse
Phase Lock (optional)
Configure alerts to "Once per bar close" to avoid intrabar repainting and noise. When an alert fires, manually verify:
Orbit plot shows clustering
Dashboard confirms all conditions
Price structure supports the trade
Do not blindly trade alerts—use them as prompts for analysis.
Ideal Market Conditions
Best Performance
Instruments :
Liquid, actively traded markets (major forex pairs, large-cap stocks, major indices, top-tier crypto)
Instruments with clear cyclical oscillator behavior (avoid extremely illiquid or manipulated markets)
Timeframes :
15-minute to 4-hour: Optimal balance of noise reduction and responsiveness
1-hour to daily: Slower, higher-conviction signals; good for swing trading
5-minute: Acceptable for scalping if parameters are tightened and you accept more noise
Market Regimes :
Trending markets with periodic retracements (where oscillators cycle through phases predictably)
Breakout environments (coherence forms before/during breakout; collapse occurs at exhaustion)
Rotational markets with clear swings (oscillators phase-lock at turning points)
Volatility :
Moderate to high volatility (oscillators have room to move through their ranges)
Stable volatility regimes (sudden VIX spikes or flash crashes may create false collapses)
Challenging Conditions
Instruments :
Very low liquidity markets (erratic price action creates unstable oscillator phases)
Heavily news-driven instruments (fundamentals may override technical coherence)
Highly correlated instruments (oscillators may all reflect the same underlying factor, reducing independence)
Market Regimes :
Deep, prolonged consolidation (oscillators remain near neutral, CI is chronically low, few signals fire)
Extreme chop with no directional bias (oscillators whipsaw, coherence never establishes)
Gap-driven markets (large overnight gaps create phase discontinuities)
Timeframes :
Sub-5-minute charts: Noise dominates; oscillators flip rapidly; coherence is fleeting and unreliable
Weekly/monthly: Oscillators move extremely slowly; signals are rare; better suited for long-term positioning than active trading
Special Cases :
During major economic releases or earnings: Oscillators may lag price or become decorrelated as fundamentals overwhelm technicals. Reduce position size or stand aside.
In extremely low-volatility environments (e.g., holiday periods): Oscillators compress to neutral, CI may be artificially high due to lack of movement, but signals lack follow-through.
Adaptive Behavior
QRFM is designed to self-adapt to poor conditions:
When coherence is genuinely absent, CI remains low and signals do not fire
When only a subset of oscillators aligns, entangled pairs count stays below threshold and signals are filtered out
When phase-lock cannot be achieved (oscillators too scattered), the lock filter prevents signals
This means the indicator will naturally produce fewer (or zero) signals during unfavorable conditions, rather than generating false signals. This is a feature —it keeps you out of low-probability trades.
Parameter Optimization by Trading Style
Scalping (5-15 Minute Charts)
Goal : Maximum responsiveness, accept higher noise
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 7-10
MACD: 8/17/6
Stochastic: 8-10, smooth 2-3
CCI: 14-16
Others: 8-12
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 2-3 bars (fast reaction)
Phase Sample Rate: 1 (every bar)
Ignition Threshold: 0.65-0.75 (lower for more signals)
Collapse Threshold: 0.40-0.50 (earlier exit warnings)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 40-50° (looser, easier to achieve)
Min Entangled Pairs: 2-3 (fewer oscillators required)
Visuals :
Orbit Plot + Dashboard only (reduce screen clutter for fast decisions)
Disable heavy visuals (heat map, web) for performance
Alerts :
Enable all ignition and collapse alerts
Set to "Once per bar close"
Day Trading (15-Minute to 1-Hour Charts)
Goal : Balance between responsiveness and reliability
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 14 (standard)
MACD: 12/26/9 (standard)
Stochastic: 14, smooth 3
CCI: 20
Others: 10-14
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 3-5 bars (balanced)
Phase Sample Rate: 2-3
Ignition Threshold: 0.75-0.85 (moderate selectivity)
Collapse Threshold: 0.50-0.55 (balanced exit timing)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 30-40° (moderate tightness)
Min Entangled Pairs: 4-5 (reasonable confirmation)
Visuals :
Orbit Plot + Dashboard + Heat Map or Web (choose one)
Field Cloud for regime backdrop
Alerts :
Ignition and collapse alerts
Optional phase-lock alert for advance warning
Swing Trading (4-Hour to Daily Charts)
Goal : High-conviction signals, minimal noise, fewer trades
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 14-21
MACD: 12/26/9 or 19/39/9 (longer variant)
Stochastic: 14-21, smooth 3-5
CCI: 20-30
Others: 14-20
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 5-10 bars (very smooth)
Phase Sample Rate: 3-5
Ignition Threshold: 0.80-0.90 (high bar for entry)
Collapse Threshold: 0.55-0.65 (only significant breakdowns)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 20-30° (tight clustering required)
Min Entangled Pairs: 5-7 (strong confirmation)
Visuals :
All modules enabled (you have time to analyze)
Heat Map for multi-bar pattern recognition
Web for deep confirmation analysis
Alerts :
Ignition and collapse
Review manually before entering (no rush)
Position/Long-Term Trading (Daily to Weekly Charts)
Goal : Rare, very high-conviction regime shifts
Oscillator Lengths :
RSI: 21-30
MACD: 19/39/9 or 26/52/12
Stochastic: 21, smooth 5
CCI: 30-50
Others: 20-30
Coherence Settings :
CI Smoothing Window: 10-14 bars
Phase Sample Rate: 5 (every 5th bar to reduce computation)
Ignition Threshold: 0.85-0.95 (only extreme alignment)
Collapse Threshold: 0.60-0.70 (major regime breaks only)
Confirmation :
Phase Lock Tolerance: 15-25° (very tight)
Min Entangled Pairs: 6+ (broad consensus required)
Visuals :
Dashboard + Orbit Plot for quick checks
Heat Map to study historical coherence patterns
Web to verify deep entanglement
Alerts :
Ignition only (collapses are less critical on long timeframes)
Manual review with fundamental analysis overlay
Performance Optimization (Low-End Systems)
If you experience lag or slow rendering:
Reduce Visual Load :
Orbit Grid Size: 8-10 (instead of 12+)
Heat Map Time Bins: 5-8 (instead of 10+)
Disable Web Matrix entirely if not needed
Disable Field Cloud and Phase Spiral
Reduce Calculation Frequency :
Phase Sample Rate: 5-10 (calculate every 5-10 bars)
Max History Depth: 100-200 (instead of 500+)
Disable Unused Oscillators :
If you only want RSI, MACD, and Stochastic, disable the other five. Fewer oscillators = smaller matrices, faster loops.
Simplify Dashboard :
Choose "Small" dashboard size
Reduce number of metrics displayed
These settings will not significantly degrade signal quality (signals are based on bar-close calculations, which remain accurate), but will improve chart responsiveness.
Important Disclaimers
This indicator is a technical analysis tool designed to identify periods of phase coherence across an ensemble of oscillators. It is not a standalone trading system and does not guarantee profitable trades. The Coherence Index, dominant phase, and entanglement metrics are mathematical calculations applied to historical price data—they measure past oscillator behavior and do not predict future price movements with certainty.
No Predictive Guarantee : High coherence indicates that oscillators are currently aligned, which historically has coincided with trending or directional price movement. However, past alignment does not guarantee future trends. Markets can remain coherent while prices consolidate, or lose coherence suddenly due to news, liquidity changes, or other factors not captured by oscillator mathematics.
Signal Confirmation is Probabilistic : The multi-layer confirmation system (CI threshold + dominant phase + phase-lock + entanglement) is designed to filter out low-probability setups. This increases the proportion of valid signals relative to false signals, but does not eliminate false signals entirely. Users should combine QRFM with additional analysis—support and resistance levels, volume confirmation, multi-timeframe alignment, and fundamental context—before executing trades.
Collapse Signals are Warnings, Not Reversals : A coherence collapse indicates that the oscillator ensemble has lost alignment. This often precedes trend exhaustion or reversals, but can also occur during healthy pullbacks or consolidations. Price may continue in the original direction after a collapse. Use collapses as risk management cues (tighten stops, take partial profits) rather than automatic reversal entries.
Market Regime Dependency : QRFM performs best in markets where oscillators exhibit cyclical, mean-reverting behavior and where trends are punctuated by retracements. In markets dominated by fundamental shocks, gap openings, or extreme low-liquidity conditions, oscillator coherence may be less reliable. During such periods, reduce position size or stand aside.
Risk Management is Essential : All trading involves risk of loss. Use appropriate stop losses, position sizing, and risk-per-trade limits. The indicator does not specify stop loss or take profit levels—these must be determined by the user based on their risk tolerance and account size. Never risk more than you can afford to lose.
Parameter Sensitivity : The indicator's behavior changes with input parameters. Aggressive settings (low thresholds, loose tolerances) produce more signals with lower average quality. Conservative settings (high thresholds, tight tolerances) produce fewer signals with higher average quality. Users should backtest and forward-test parameter sets on their specific instruments and timeframes before committing real capital.
No Repainting by Design : All signal conditions are evaluated on bar close using bar-close values. However, the visual components (orbit plot, heat map, dashboard) update in real-time during bar formation for monitoring purposes. For trade execution, rely on the confirmed signals (triangles and circles) that appear only after the bar closes.
Computational Load : QRFM performs extensive calculations, including nested loops for entanglement matrices and real-time table rendering. On lower-powered devices or when running multiple indicators simultaneously, users may experience lag. Use the performance optimization settings (reduce visual complexity, increase phase sample rate, disable unused oscillators) to improve responsiveness.
This system is most effective when used as one component within a broader trading methodology that includes sound risk management, multi-timeframe analysis, market context awareness, and disciplined execution. It is a tool for regime detection and signal confirmation, not a substitute for comprehensive trade planning.
Technical Notes
Calculation Timing : All signal logic (ignition, collapse) is evaluated using bar-close values. The barstate.isconfirmed or implicit bar-close behavior ensures signals do not repaint. Visual components (tables, plots) render on every tick for real-time feedback but do not affect signal generation.
Phase Wrapping : Phase angles are calculated in the range -180° to +180° using atan2. Angular distance calculations account for wrapping (e.g., the distance between +170° and -170° is 20°, not 340°). This ensures phase-lock detection works correctly across the ±180° boundary.
Array Management : The indicator uses fixed-size arrays for oscillator phases, amplitudes, and the entanglement matrix. The maximum number of oscillators is 8. If fewer oscillators are enabled, array sizes shrink accordingly (only active oscillators are processed).
Matrix Indexing : The entanglement matrix is stored as a flat array with size N×N, where N is the number of active oscillators. Index mapping: index(row, col) = row × N + col. Symmetric pairs (i,j) and (j,i) are stored identically.
Normalization Stability : Oscillators are normalized to using fixed reference levels (e.g., RSI overbought/oversold at 70/30). For unbounded oscillators (MACD, ROC, TSI), statistical normalization (division by rolling standard deviation) is used, with clamping to prevent extreme outliers from distorting phase calculations.
Smoothing and Lag : The CI smoothing window (SMA) introduces lag proportional to the window size. This is intentional—it filters out single-bar noise spikes in coherence. Users requiring faster reaction can reduce the smoothing window to 1-2 bars, at the cost of increased sensitivity to noise.
Complex Number Representation : Pine Script does not have native complex number types. Complex arithmetic is implemented using separate real and imaginary accumulators (sum_cos, sum_sin) and manual calculation of magnitude (sqrt(real² + imag²)) and argument (atan2(imag, real)).
Lookback Limits : The indicator respects Pine Script's maximum lookback constraints. Historical phase and amplitude values are accessed using the operator, with lookback limited to the chart's available bar history (max_bars_back=5000 declared).
Visual Rendering Performance : Tables (orbit plot, heat map, web, dashboard) are conditionally deleted and recreated on each update using table.delete() and table.new(). This prevents memory leaks but incurs redraw overhead. Rendering is restricted to barstate.islast (last bar) to minimize computational load—historical bars do not render visuals.
Alert Condition Triggers : alertcondition() functions evaluate on bar close when their boolean conditions transition from false to true. Alerts do not fire repeatedly while a condition remains true (e.g., CI stays above threshold for 10 bars fires only once on the initial cross).
Color Gradient Functions : The phaseColor() function maps phase angles to RGB hues using sine waves offset by 120° (red, green, blue channels). This creates a continuous spectrum where -180° to +180° spans the full color wheel. The amplitudeColor() function maps amplitude to grayscale intensity. The coherenceColor() function uses cos(phase) to map contribution to CI (positive = green, negative = red).
No External Data Requests : QRFM operates entirely on the chart's symbol and timeframe. It does not use request.security() or access external data sources. All calculations are self-contained, avoiding lookahead bias from higher-timeframe requests.
Deterministic Behavior : Given identical input parameters and price data, QRFM produces identical outputs. There are no random elements, probabilistic sampling, or time-of-day dependencies.
— Dskyz, Engineering precision. Trading coherence.
Percentage price changeThis indicator marks bars whose values increase or decrease by an amount greater than or equal to the value of the specified parameter as a percentage. Bars that meet the condition are marked with labels, boxes and colors. In addition to the standard method of calculating the percentage change at the closing price of the current and previous bars, the indicator allows you to choose non-standard calculation methods (at the prices of opening and closing the current bar, as well as at the prices of the maximum at the minimum of the current bar). You can choose to display the percentage changes of individual bars as well as a series of bars. You can select the number of bars in a series of bars. You can also apply filters by the direction of the bars in the series or by the percentage of individual bars in the series.
It is important to remember that in version 5 of Pine Script™, the maximum possible number of labels and the maximum possible number of boxes cannot exceed 500!
There are several main parameters that can be changed in section PARAMETERS FOR CALCULATION:
1. 'Bars count' - The number of bars for which the percentage rise or fall is calculated.
2. ‘Percentage change’ - sets the price change as a percentage. Bars with a price range above or equal to the specified value will be marked on the chart.
3. ‘First and second points of calculation’ - the first and second points for calculating the percentage change. Here you can set several different values for the calculation:
- 'Cl.pr., Close' - Closing price of the previous bar and closing price of the current bar (or a series of bars) (these values are used for the standard calculation of the percentage change on the chart).
- 'Open, Close' - Opening and closing prices of the current bar (or a series of bars).
- 'High|Low' - Highest and lowest price of the current bar (or a series of bars).
- 'Cl.pr.|High|Low' - Highest or lowest price of the current bar (or a series of bars) (depending on whether the bar is going up or down) or closing price of the previous bar for first point (one of these values is automatically selected, which gives a larger result, depending on whether there is a gap between these values). Highest or lowest price of the current bar for second point.
In the LIMITS section, you can set the following parameters.
1. ‘Only for the last bar’ - If this option is selected, the indicator will be applied only for the last bar (or series of bars).
2. 'Only bars in one direction' - A condition that takes into account sequences from the selected number of bars going in only one direction. If at least one bar has a different direction from the other bars, then such a sequence will not be taken into account. This only works if the 'Bars count' is > 1.
3. "Cut off higher values" - This field cuts off higher values. Bars with a price range above or equal to the specified value will not be marked on the chart. This can be used in some cases to make the chart less loaded with data and more visual. Of course, you can also use this option however you want.
4. ‘Min percent in series of bars’ - If the value 'Number of bars' is > 1, then a series of bars is taken into account, in which the percentage change of individual bars is greater than or equal to the set value.
In the DATE RANGE section, you can set the limits of the time and date range in which the calculation will be performed. In some cases, this can be used in order not to exceed the limit on the number of labels or boxes, which cannot exceed 500. Of course, you can also use this option however you want. By default, the date range is unlimited.
'Timezone offset, hours' - It is used only for the correct display of the limits of the date range in the parameter table.
In the PRICE INCREASE LABELS and PRICE REDUCTION LABELS section, you can define the design of labels bars and boxes, such as colors, shapes, sizes, and location. You can set the colors of the bars separately on the Style tab. On the Style tab, you can also turn on/off the display of frames, labels and color markings of bars.
The PARAMETER TABLE section is designed to adjust the display of the table for a more visual display of the selected values of all parameters on the Arguments tab. Depending on which values have been set and which parameters have been enabled or disabled, the table will change its appearance, display or hide some rows. A single line 'Total found' will be displayed all the time. It shows the count of bars that meet the condition and count of labels or boxes used in the diagram. Since the bars are labeled with labels or boxes, their number cannot exceed 500 for Pine script version 5.
1. 'Pos.' - sets the main position of the table on the screen.
2. 'X off.', 'Y off.' - You can set the offset of the table along the X and Y axes. This option can be useful to avoid overlapping multiple tables if you want to use two or more instances of this indicator on your chart. The minimum value is -30, the maximum is 30. Positive values shift the table to the right on the X axis and up on the Y axis. Negative values shift the table to the left on the X axis and down on the Y axis.
3. 'Font color' - The font color in the table.
'Warn. font color', 'Warn. backgr. color' - The font and background colors in the 'Total found' row in the table. If the number of labels or boxes exceeds 500, the font and background will be colored in these colors.
4. ‘Font size’ – Sets the font size in the table.
5. 'Show hours and minutes in date/time range' - changes the date and time format of time range from {yyyy.MM.dd HH:mm} to {yyyy.MM.dd}.
6. 'View all params' - used to display all parameters, even those duplicated in the main line of the indicator.
7. ‘Title’ – If desired, you can make a header for the table.
The last row of the table shows the number of bars found that meet the conditions. Since these bars are marked with labels (in the case of one bar) or boxes (in the case of series of bars), the limit that can be marked on the chart is 500. Exceeding this value will be displayed in the table and additionally highlighted in red font. This will signal that not all bars found are displayed on the chart.
On the Style tab, you can turn the table display on/off.
Auto Volume Spread Analysis (VSA) [TANHEF]Auto Volume Spread Analysis (visible volume and spread bars auto-scaled): Understanding Market Intentions through the Interpretation of Volume and Price Movements.
All the sections below contain the same descriptions as my other indicator "Volume Spread Analysis" with the exception of 'Auto Scaling'.
█ Auto-Scaling
This indicator auto-scales spread bars to match the visible volume bars, unlike the previous "Volume Spread Analysis " version which limited the number of visible spread bars to a fixed count. The auto-scaling feature allows for easier navigation through historical data, enabling both more historical spread bars to be viewed and more historical VSA pattern labels being displayed without requiring using the bar replay tool. Please note that this indicator’s auto-scaling feature recalculates the visible bars on the chart, causing the indicator to reload whenever the chart is moved.
Auto-scaled spread bars have two display options (set via 'Spread Bars Method' setting):
Lines: a bar lookback limit of 500 bars.
Polylines: no bar lookback limit as only plotted on visible bars on chart, which uses multiple polylines are used.
█ Simple Explanation:
The Volume Spread Analysis (VSA) indicator is a comprehensive tool that helps traders identify key market patterns and trends based on volume and spread data. This indicator highlights significant VSA patterns and provides insights into market behavior through color-coded volume/spread bars and identification of bars indicating strength, weakness, and neutrality between buyers and sellers. It also includes powerful volume and spread forecasting capabilities.
█ Laws of Volume Spread Analysis (VSA):
The origin of VSA begins with Richard Wyckoff, a pivotal figure in its development. Wyckoff made significant contributions to trading theory, including the formulation of three basic laws:
The Law of Supply and Demand: This fundamental law states that supply and demand balance each other over time. High demand and low supply lead to rising prices until demand falls to a level where supply can meet it. Conversely, low demand and high supply cause prices to fall until demand increases enough to absorb the excess supply.
The Law of Cause and Effect: This law assumes that a 'cause' will result in an 'effect' proportional to the 'cause'. A strong 'cause' will lead to a strong trend (effect), while a weak 'cause' will lead to a weak trend.
The Law of Effort vs. Result: This law asserts that the result should reflect the effort exerted. In trading terms, a large volume should result in a significant price move (spread). If the spread is small, the volume should also be small. Any deviation from this pattern is considered an anomaly.
█ Volume and Spread Analysis Bars:
Display: Volume and spread bars that consist of color coded levels, with the spread bars scaled to match the volume bars. A displayable table (Legend) of bar colors and levels can give context and clarify to each volume/spread bar.
Calculation: Levels are calculated using multipliers applied to moving averages to represent key levels based on historical data: low, normal, high, ultra. This method smooths out short-term fluctuations and focuses on longer-term trends.
Low Level: Indicates reduced volatility and market interest.
Normal Level: Reflects typical market activity and volatility.
High Level: Indicates increased activity and volatility.
Ultra Level: Identifies extreme levels of activity and volatility.
This illustrates the appearance of Volume and Spread bars when scaled and plotted together:
█ Forecasting Capabilities:
Display: Forecasted volume and spread levels using predictive models.
Calculation: Volume and Spread prediction calculations differ as volume is linear and spread is non-linear.
Volume Forecast (Linear Forecasting): Predicts future volume based on current volume rate and bar time till close.
Spread Forecast (Non-Linear Dynamic Forecasting): Predicts future spread using a dynamic multiplier, less near midpoint (consolidation) and more near low or high (trending), reflecting non-linear expansion.
Moving Averages: In forecasting, moving averages utilize forecasted levels instead of actual levels to ensure the correct level is forecasted (low, normal, high, or ultra).
The following compares forecasted volume with actual resulting volume, highlighting the power of early identifying increased volume through forecasted levels:
█ VSA Patterns:
Criteria and descriptions for each VSA pattern are available as tooltips beside them within the indicator’s settings. These tooltips provide explanations of potential developments based on the volume and spread data.
Signs of Strength (🟢): Patterns indicating strong buying pressure and potential market upturns.
Down Thrust
Selling Climax
No Effort ➤ Bearish Result
Bearish Effort ➤ No Result
Inverse Down Thrust
Failed Selling Climax
Bull Outside Reversal
End of Falling Market (Bag Holder)
Pseudo Down Thrust
No Supply
Signs of Weakness (🔴): Patterns indicating strong selling pressure and potential market downturns.
Up Thrust
Buying Climax
No Effort ➤ Bullish Result
Bullish Effort ➤ No Result
Inverse Up Thrust
Failed Buying Climax
Bear Outside Reversal
End of Rising Market (Bag Seller)
Pseudo Up Thrust
No Demand
Neutral Patterns (🔵): Patterns indicating market indecision and potential for continuation or reversal.
Quiet Doji
Balanced Doji
Strong Doji
Quiet Spinning Top
Balanced Spinning Top
Strong Spinning Top
Quiet High Wave
Balanced High Wave
Strong High Wave
Consolidation
Bar Patterns (🟡): Common candlestick patterns that offer insights into market sentiment. These are required in some VSA patterns and can also be displayed independently.
Bull Pin Bar
Bear Pin Bar
Doji
Spinning Top
High Wave
Consolidation
This demonstrates the acronym and descriptive options for displaying bar patterns, with the ability to hover over text to reveal the descriptive text along with what type of pattern:
█ Alerts:
VSA Pattern Alerts: Notifications for identified VSA patterns at bar close.
Volume and Spread Alerts: Alerts for confirmed and forecasted volume/spread levels (Low, High, Ultra).
Forecasted Volume and Spread Alerts: Alerts for forecasted volume/spread levels (High, Ultra) include a minimum percent time elapsed input to reduce false early signals by ensuring sufficient bar time has passed.
█ Inputs and Settings:
Indicator Bar Color: Select color schemes for bars (Normal, Detail, Levels).
Indicator Moving Average Color: Select schemes for bars (Fill, Lines, None).
Price Bar Colors: Options to color price bars based on VSA patterns and volume levels.
Legend: Display a table of bar colors and levels for context and clarity of volume/spread bars.
Forecast: Configure forecast display and prediction details for volume and spread.
Average Multipliers: Define multipliers for different levels (Low, High, Ultra) to refine the analysis.
Moving Average: Set volume and spread moving average settings.
VSA: Select the VSA patterns to be calculated and displayed (Strength, Weakness, Neutral).
Bar Patterns: Criteria for bar patterns used in VSA (Doji, Bull Pin Bar, Bear Pin Bar, Spinning Top, Consolidation, High Wave).
Colors: Set exact colors used for indicator bars, indicator moving averages, and price bars.
More Display Options: Specify how VSA pattern text is displayed (Acronym, Descriptive), positioning, and sizes.
Alerts: Configure alerts for VSA patterns, volume, and spread levels, including forecasted levels.
█ Usage:
The Volume Spread Analysis indicator is a helpful tool for leveraging volume spread analysis to make informed trading decisions. It offers comprehensive visual and textual cues on the chart, making it easier to identify market conditions, potential reversals, and continuations. Whether analyzing historical data or forecasting future trends, this indicator provides insights into the underlying factors driving market movements.
CandleAnalysisLibrary "CandleAnalysis"
A collection of frequently used candle analysis functions in my scripts.
isBullish(barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is bullish.
Parameters:
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar is bullish, otherwise returns false.
isBearish(barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is bearish.
Parameters:
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar is bearish, otherwise returns false.
isBE(barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is break even.
Parameters:
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar is break even, otherwise returns false.
getBodySize(barsBack, inPriceChg)
Calculates a specific candle's body size.
Parameters:
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
inPriceChg (bool) : (bool) True to return the body size as a price change value. The default is false (in points).
Returns: The candle's body size in points.
getTopWickSize(barsBack, inPriceChg)
Calculates a specific candle's top wick size.
Parameters:
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
inPriceChg (bool) : (bool) True to return the wick size as a price change value. The default is false (in points).
Returns: The candle's top wick size in points.
getBottomWickSize(barsBack, inPriceChg)
Calculates a specific candle's bottom wick size.
Parameters:
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
inPriceChg (bool) : (bool) True to return the wick size as a price change value. The default is false (in points).
Returns: The candle's bottom wick size in points.
getBodyPercent(barsBack)
Calculates a specific candle's body size as a percentage of its entire size including its wicks.
Parameters:
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: The candle's body size percentage.
isHammer(fib, bullish, barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is a hammer candle based on a given fibonacci level.
Parameters:
fib (float) : (float) The fibonacci level to base candle's body on. The default is 0.382.
bullish (bool) : (bool) True if the candle must to be green. The default is false.
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar matches the requirements of a hammer candle, otherwise returns false.
isShootingStar(fib, bearish, barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is a shooting star candle based on a given fibonacci level.
Parameters:
fib (float) : (float) The fibonacci level to base candle's body on. The default is 0.382.
bearish (bool) : (bool) True if the candle must to be red. The default is false.
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar matches the requirements of a shooting star candle, otherwise returns false.
isDoji(wickSize, bodySize, barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is a doji candle based on a given wick and body size.
Parameters:
wickSize (float) : (float) The maximum top wick size compared to the bottom and vice versa. The default is 1.5.
bodySize (float) : (bool) The maximum body size as a percentage compared to the entire candle size. The default is 5.
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar matches the requirements of a doji candle.
isBullishEC(gapTolerance, rejectionWickSize, engulfWick, barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is a bullish engulfing candle.
Parameters:
gapTolerance (int)
rejectionWickSize (int) : (int) The maximum top wick size compared to the body as a percentage. The default is 10.
engulfWick (bool) : (bool) True if the engulfed candle's wick requires to be engulfed as well. The default is false.
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar matches the requirements of a bullish engulfing candle.
isBearishEC(gapTolerance, rejectionWickSize, engulfWick, barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is a bearish engulfing candle.
Parameters:
gapTolerance (int)
rejectionWickSize (int) : (int) The maximum bottom wick size compared to the body as a percentage. The default is 10.
engulfWick (bool) : (bool) True if the engulfed candle's wick requires to be engulfed as well. The default is false.
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar matches the requirements of a bearish engulfing candle.
MarcosLibraryLibrary "MarcosLibrary"
A colection of frequently used functions in my scripts.
bullFibRet(priceLow, priceHigh, fibLevel)
Calculates a bullish fibonacci retracement value.
Parameters:
priceLow (float) : (float) The lowest price point.
priceHigh (float) : (float) The highest price point.
fibLevel (float) : (float) The fibonacci level to calculate.
Returns: The fibonacci value of the given retracement level.
bearFibRet(priceLow, priceHigh, fibLevel)
Calculates a bearish fibonacci retracement value.
Parameters:
priceLow (float) : (float) The lowest price point.
priceHigh (float) : (float) The highest price point.
fibLevel (float) : (float) The fibonacci level to calculate.
Returns: The fibonacci value of the given retracement level.
bullFibExt(priceLow, priceHigh, thirdPivot, fibLevel)
Calculates a bullish fibonacci extension value.
Parameters:
priceLow (float) : (float) The lowest price point.
priceHigh (float) : (float) The highest price point.
thirdPivot (float) : (float) The third price point.
fibLevel (float) : (float) The fibonacci level to calculate.
Returns: The fibonacci value of the given extension level.
bearFibExt(priceLow, priceHigh, thirdPivot, fibLevel)
Calculates a bearish fibonacci extension value.
Parameters:
priceLow (float) : (float) The lowest price point.
priceHigh (float) : (float) The highest price point.
thirdPivot (float) : (float) The third price point.
fibLevel (float) : (float) The fibonacci level to calculate.
Returns: The fibonacci value of the given extension level.
isBullish(barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is bullish.
Parameters:
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar is bullish, otherwise returns false.
isBearish(barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is bearish.
Parameters:
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar is bearish, otherwise returns false.
isBE(barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is break even.
Parameters:
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar is break even, otherwise returns false.
getBodySize(barsBack, inPriceChg)
Calculates a specific candle's body size.
Parameters:
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
inPriceChg (bool) : (bool) True to return the body size as a price change value. The default is false (in points).
Returns: The candle's body size in points.
getTopWickSize(barsBack, inPriceChg)
Calculates a specific candle's top wick size.
Parameters:
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
inPriceChg (bool) : (bool) True to return the wick size as a price change value. The default is false (in points).
Returns: The candle's top wick size in points.
getBottomWickSize(barsBack, inPriceChg)
Calculates a specific candle's bottom wick size.
Parameters:
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
inPriceChg (bool) : (bool) True to return the wick size as a price change value. The default is false (in points).
Returns: The candle's bottom wick size in points.
getBodyPercent(barsBack)
Calculates a specific candle's body size as a percentage of its entire size including its wicks.
Parameters:
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: The candle's body size percentage.
isHammer(fib, bullish, barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is a hammer candle based on a given fibonacci level.
Parameters:
fib (float) : (float) The fibonacci level to base candle's body on. The default is 0.382.
bullish (bool) : (bool) True if the candle must to be green. The default is false.
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar matches the requirements of a hammer candle, otherwise returns false.
isShootingStar(fib, bearish, barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is a shooting star candle based on a given fibonacci level.
Parameters:
fib (float) : (float) The fibonacci level to base candle's body on. The default is 0.382.
bearish (bool) : (bool) True if the candle must to be red. The default is false.
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar matches the requirements of a shooting star candle, otherwise returns false.
isDoji(wickSize, bodySize, barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is a doji candle based on a given wick and body size.
Parameters:
wickSize (float) : (float) The maximum top wick size compared to the bottom and vice versa. The default is 1.5.
bodySize (float) : (bool) The maximum body size as a percentage compared to the entire candle size. The default is 5.
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar matches the requirements of a doji candle.
isBullishEC(gapTolerance, rejectionWickSize, engulfWick, barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is a bullish engulfing candle.
Parameters:
gapTolerance (int)
rejectionWickSize (int) : (int) The maximum top wick size compared to the body as a percentage. The default is 10.
engulfWick (bool) : (bool) True if the engulfed candle's wick requires to be engulfed as well. The default is false.
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar matches the requirements of a bullish engulfing candle.
isBearishEC(gapTolerance, rejectionWickSize, engulfWick, barsBack)
Checks if a specific bar is a bearish engulfing candle.
Parameters:
gapTolerance (int)
rejectionWickSize (int) : (int) The maximum bottom wick size compared to the body as a percentage. The default is 10.
engulfWick (bool) : (bool) True if the engulfed candle's wick requires to be engulfed as well. The default is false.
barsBack (int) : (int) The number of bars to look back. The default is 0 (current bar).
Returns: True if the bar matches the requirements of a bearish engulfing candle.
Higher-timeframe requests█ OVERVIEW
This publication focuses on enhancing awareness of the best practices for accessing higher-timeframe (HTF) data via the request.security() function. Some "traditional" approaches, such as what we explored in our previous `security()` revisited publication, have shown limitations in their ability to retrieve non-repainting HTF data. The fundamental technique outlined in this script is currently the most effective in preventing repainting when requesting data from a higher timeframe. For detailed information about why it works, see this section in the Pine Script™ User Manual .
█ CONCEPTS
Understanding repainting
Repainting is a behavior that occurs when a script's calculations or outputs behave differently after restarting it. There are several types of repainting behavior, not all of which are inherently useless or misleading. The most prevalent form of repainting occurs when a script's calculations or outputs exhibit different behaviors on historical and realtime bars.
When a script calculates across historical data, it only needs to execute once per bar, as those values are confirmed and not subject to change. After each historical execution, the script commits the states of its calculations for later access.
On a realtime, unconfirmed bar, values are fluid . They are subject to change on each new tick from the data provider until the bar closes. A script's code can execute on each tick in a realtime bar, meaning its calculations and outputs are subject to realtime fluctuations, just like the underlying data it uses. Each time a script executes on an unconfirmed bar, it first reverts applicable values to their last committed states, a process referred to as rollback . It only commits the new values from a realtime bar after the bar closes. See the User Manual's Execution model page to learn more.
In essence, a script can repaint when it calculates on realtime bars due to fluctuations before a bar's confirmation, which it cannot reproduce on historical data. A common strategy to avoid repainting when necessary involves forcing only confirmed values on realtime bars, which remain unchanged until each bar's conclusion.
Repainting in higher-timeframe (HTF) requests
When working with a script that retrieves data from higher timeframes with request.security() , it's crucial to understand the differences in how such requests behave on historical and realtime bars .
The request.security() function executes all code required by its `expression` argument using data from the specified context (symbol, timeframe, or modifiers) rather than on the chart's data. As when executing code in the chart's context, request.security() only returns new historical values when a bar closes in the requested context. However, the values it returns on realtime HTF bars can also update before confirmation, akin to the rollback and recalculation process that scripts perform in the chart's context on the open bar. Similar to how scripts operate in the chart's context, request.security() only confirms new values after a realtime bar closes in its specified context.
Once a script's execution cycle restarts, what were previously realtime bars become historical bars, meaning the request.security() call will only return confirmed values from the HTF on those bars. Therefore, if the requested data fluctuates across an open HTF bar, the script will repaint those values after it restarts.
This behavior is not a bug; it's simply the default behavior of request.security() . In some cases, having the latest information from an unconfirmed HTF bar is precisely what a script needs. However, in many other cases, traders will require confirmed, stable values that do not fluctuate across an open HTF bar. Below, we explain the most reliable approach to achieve such a result.
Achieving consistent timing on all bars
One can retrieve non-fluctuating values with consistent timing across historical and realtime feeds by exclusively using request.security() to fetch the data from confirmed HTF bars. The best way to achieve this result is offsetting the `expression` argument by at least one bar (e.g., `close [1 ]`) and using barmerge.lookahead_on as the `lookahead` argument.
We discourage the use of barmerge.lookahead_on alone since it prompts the function to look toward future values of HTF bars across historical data, which is heavily misleading. However, when paired with a requested `expression` that includes a one-bar historical offset, the "future" data the function retrieves is not from the future. Instead, it represents the last confirmed bar's values at the start of each HTF bar, thus preventing the results on realtime bars from fluctuating before confirmation from the timeframe.
For example, this line of code uses a request.security() call with barmerge.lookahead_on to request the close price from the "1D" timeframe, offset by one bar with the history-referencing operator [ ] . This line will return the daily price with consistent timing across all bars:
float htfClose = request.security(syminfo.tickerid, "1D", close , lookahead = barmerge.lookahead_on)
Note that:
• This technique only works as intended for higher-timeframe requests .
• When designing a script to work specifically with HTFs, we recommend including conditions to prevent request.security() from accessing timeframes equal to or lower than the chart's timeframe, especially if you intend to publish it. In this script, we included an if structure that raises a runtime error when the requested timeframe is too small.
• A necessary trade-off with this approach is that the script must wait for an HTF bar's confirmation to retrieve new data on realtime bars, thus delaying its availability until the open of the subsequent HTF bar. The time elapsed during such a delay varies with each market, but it's typically relatively small.
👉 Failing to offset the function's `expression` argument while using barmerge.lookahead_on will produce historical results with lookahead bias , as it will look to the future states of historical HTF bars, retrieving values before the times at which they're available in the feed. See the `lookahead` and Future leak with `request.security()` sections in the Pine Script™ User Manual for more information.
Evolving practices
The fundamental technique outlined in this publication is currently the only reliable approach to requesting non-repainting HTF data with request.security() . It is the superior approach because it avoids the pitfalls of other methods, such as the one introduced in the `security()` revisited publication. That publication proposed using a custom `f_security()` function, which applied offsets to the `expression` and the requested result based on historical and realtime bar states. At that time, we explored techniques that didn't carry the risk of lookahead bias if misused (i.e., removing the historical offset on the `expression` while using lookahead), as requests that look ahead to the future on historical bars exhibit dangerously misleading behavior.
Despite these efforts, we've unfortunately found that the bar state method employed by `f_security()` can produce inaccurate results with inconsistent timing in some scenarios, undermining its credibility as a universal non-repainting technique. As such, we've deprecated that approach, and the Pine Script™ User Manual no longer recommends it.
█ METHOD VARIANTS
In this script, all non-repainting requests employ the same underlying technique to avoid repainting. However, we've applied variants to cater to specific use cases, as outlined below:
Variant 1
Variant 1, which the script displays using a lime plot, demonstrates a non-repainting HTF request in its simplest form, aligning with the concept explained in the "Achieving consistent timing" section above. It uses barmerge.lookahead_on and offsets the `expression` argument in request.security() by one bar to retrieve the value from the last confirmed HTF bar. For detailed information about why this works, see the Avoiding Repainting section of the User Manual's Other timeframes and data page.
Variant 2
Variant 2 ( fuchsia ) introduces a custom function, `htfSecurity()`, which wraps the request.security() function to facilitate convenient repainting control. By specifying a value for its `repaint` parameter, users can determine whether to allow repainting HTF data. When the `repaint` value is `false`, the function applies lookahead and a one-bar offset to request the last confirmed value from the specified `timeframe`. When the value is `true`, the function requests the `expression` using the default behavior of request.security() , meaning the results can fluctuate across chart bars within realtime HTF bars and repaint when the script restarts.
Note that:
• This function exclusively handles HTF requests. If the requested timeframe is not higher than the chart's, it will raise a runtime error .
• We prefer this approach since it provides optional repainting control. Sometimes, a script's calculations need to respond immediately to realtime HTF changes, which `repaint = true` allows. In other cases, such as when issuing alerts, triggering strategy commands, and more, one will typically need stable values that do not repaint, in which case `repaint = false` will produce the desired behavior.
Variant 3
Variant 3 ( white ) builds upon the same fundamental non-repainting approach used by the first two. The difference in this variant is that it applies repainting control to tuples , which one cannot pass as the `expression` argument in our `htfSecurity()` function. Tuples are handy for consolidating `request.*()` calls when a script requires several values from the same context, as one can request a single tuple from the context rather than executing multiple separate request.security() calls.
This variant applies the internal logic of our `htfSecurity()` function in the script's global scope to request a tuple containing open and `srcInput` values from a higher timeframe with repainting control. Historically, Pine Script™ did not allow the history-referencing operator [ ] when requesting tuples unless the tuple came from a function call, which limited this technique. However, updates to Pine over time have lifted this restriction, allowing us to pass tuples with historical offsets directly as the `expression` in request.security() . By offsetting all items in a tuple `expression` by one bar and using barmerge.lookahead_on , we effectively retrieve a tuple of stable, non-repainting HTF values.
Since we cannot encapsulate this method within the `htfSecurity()` function and must execute the calculations in the global scope, the script's "Repainting" input directly controls the global `offset` and `lookahead` values to ensure it behaves as intended.
Variant 4 (Control)
Variant 4, which the script displays as a translucent orange plot, uses a default request.security() call, providing a reference point to compare the difference between a repainting request and the non-repainting variants outlined above. Whenever the script restarts its execution cycle, realtime bars become historical bars, and the request.security() call here will repaint the results on those bars.
█ Inputs
Repainting
The "Repainting" input (`repaintInput` variable) controls whether Variant 2 and Variant 3 are allowed to use fluctuating values from an unconfirmed HTF bar. If its value is `false` (default), these requests will only retrieve stable values from the last confirmed HTF bar.
Source
The "Source" input (`srcInput` variable) determines the series the script will use in the `expression` for all HTF data requests. Its default value is close .
HTF Selection
This script features two ways to specify the higher timeframe for all its data requests, which users can control with the "HTF Selection" input (`tfTypeInput` variable):
1) If its value is "Fixed TF", the script uses the timeframe value specified by the "Fixed Higher Timeframe" input (`fixedTfInput` variable). The script will raise a runtime error if the selected timeframe is not larger than the chart's.
2) If the input's value is "Multiple of chart TF", the script multiplies the value of the "Timeframe Multiple" input (`tfMultInput` variable) by the chart's timeframe.in_seconds() value, then converts the result to a valid timeframe string via timeframe.from_seconds() .
Timeframe Display
This script features the option to display an "information box", i.e., a single-cell table that shows the higher timeframe the script is currently using. Users can toggle the display and determine the table's size, location, and color scheme via the inputs in the "Timeframe Display" group.
█ Outputs
This script produces the following outputs:
• It plots the results from all four of the above variants for visual comparison.
• It highlights the chart's background gray whenever a new bar starts on the higher timeframe, signifying when confirmations occur in the requested context.
• To demarcate which bars the script considers historical or realtime bars, it plots squares with contrasting colors corresponding to bar states at the bottom of the chart pane.
• It displays the higher timeframe string in a single-cell table with a user-specified size, location, and color scheme.
Look first. Then leap.
LineWrapperLibrary "LineWrapper"
Wrapper Type for Line. Useful when you want to store the line details without drawing them. Can also be used in scnearios where you collect lines to be drawn and draw together towards the end.
draw(this)
draws line as per the wrapper object contents
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
Returns: current Line object
draw(this)
draws lines as per the wrapper object array
Parameters:
this : (series array) Array of Line object.
Returns: current Array of Line objects
update(this)
updates or redraws line as per the wrapper object contents
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
Returns: current Line object
update(this)
updates or redraws lines as per the wrapper object array
Parameters:
this : (series array) Array of Line object.
Returns: current Array of Line objects
get_price(this, bar)
get line price based on bar
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
bar : (series/int) bar at which line price need to be calculated
Returns: line price at given bar.
get_x1(this)
Returns UNIX time or bar index (depending on the last xloc value set) of the first point of the line.
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
Returns: UNIX timestamp (in milliseconds) or bar index.
get_x2(this)
Returns UNIX time or bar index (depending on the last xloc value set) of the second point of the line.
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
Returns: UNIX timestamp (in milliseconds) or bar index.
get_y1(this)
Returns price of the first point of the line.
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
Returns: Price value.
get_y2(this)
Returns price of the second point of the line.
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
Returns: Price value.
set_x1(this, x, draw, update)
Sets bar index or bar time (depending on the xloc) of the first point.
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
x : (series int) Bar index or bar time. Note that objects positioned using xloc.bar_index cannot be drawn further than 500 bars into the future.
draw : (series bool) draw line after setting attribute
update : (series bool) update line instead of redraw. Only valid if draw is set.
Returns: Current Line object
set_x2(this, x, draw, update)
Sets bar index or bar time (depending on the xloc) of the second point.
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
x : (series int) Bar index or bar time. Note that objects positioned using xloc.bar_index cannot be drawn further than 500 bars into the future.
draw : (series bool) draw line after setting attribute
update : (series bool) update line instead of redraw. Only valid if draw is set.
Returns: Current Line object
set_y1(this, y, draw, update)
Sets price of the first point
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
y : (series int/float) Price.
draw : (series bool) draw line after setting attribute
update : (series bool) update line instead of redraw. Only valid if draw is set.
Returns: Current Line object
set_y2(this, y, draw, update)
Sets price of the second point
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
y : (series int/float) Price.
draw : (series bool) draw line after setting attribute
update : (series bool) update line instead of redraw. Only valid if draw is set.
Returns: Current Line object
set_color(this, color, draw, update)
Sets the line color
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
color : (series color) New line color
draw : (series bool) draw line after setting attribute
update : (series bool) update line instead of redraw. Only valid if draw is set.
Returns: Current Line object
set_extend(this, extend, draw, update)
Sets extending type of this line object. If extend=extend.none, draws segment starting at point (x1, y1) and ending at point (x2, y2). If extend is equal to extend.right or extend.left, draws a ray starting at point (x1, y1) or (x2, y2), respectively. If extend=extend.both, draws a straight line that goes through these points.
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
extend : (series string) New extending type.
draw : (series bool) draw line after setting attribute
update : (series bool) update line instead of redraw. Only valid if draw is set.
Returns: Current Line object
set_style(this, style, draw, update)
Sets the line style
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
style : (series string) New line style.
draw : (series bool) draw line after setting attribute
update : (series bool) update line instead of redraw. Only valid if draw is set.
Returns: Current Line object
set_width(this, width, draw, update)
Sets the line width.
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
width : (series int) New line width in pixels.
draw : (series bool) draw line after setting attribute
update : (series bool) update line instead of redraw. Only valid if draw is set.
Returns: Current Line object
set_xloc(this, x1, x2, xloc, draw, update)
Sets x-location and new bar index/time values.
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
x1 : (series int) Bar index or bar time of the first point.
x2 : (series int) Bar index or bar time of the second point.
xloc : (series string) New x-location value.
draw : (series bool) draw line after setting attribute
update : (series bool) update line instead of redraw. Only valid if draw is set.
Returns: Current Line object
set_xy1(this, x, y, draw, update)
Sets bar index/time and price of the first point.
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
x : (series int) Bar index or bar time. Note that objects positioned using xloc.bar_index cannot be drawn further than 500 bars into the future.
y : (series int/float) Price.
draw : (series bool) draw line after setting attribute
update : (series bool) update line instead of redraw. Only valid if draw is set.
Returns: Current Line object
set_xy2(this, x, y, draw, update)
Sets bar index/time and price of the second point
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
x : (series int) Bar index or bar time. Note that objects positioned using xloc.bar_index cannot be drawn further than 500 bars into the future.
y : (series int/float) Price.
draw : (series bool) draw line after setting attribute
update : (series bool) update line instead of redraw. Only valid if draw is set.
Returns: Current Line object
delete(this)
Deletes the underlying line drawing object
Parameters:
this : (series Line) Line object.
Returns: Current Line object
Line
Line Wrapper object
Fields:
x1 : (series int) Bar index (if xloc = xloc.bar_index) or bar UNIX time (if xloc = xloc.bar_time) of the first point of the line. Note that objects positioned using xloc.bar_index cannot be drawn further than 500 bars into the future.
y1 : (series int/float) Price of the first point of the line.
x2 : (series int) Bar index (if xloc = xloc.bar_index) or bar UNIX time (if xloc = xloc.bar_time) of the second point of the line. Note that objects positioned using xloc.bar_index cannot be drawn further than 500 bars into the future.
y2 : (series int/float) Price of the second point of the line.
xloc : (series string) See description of x1 argument. Possible values: xloc.bar_index and xloc.bar_time. Default is xloc.bar_index.
extend : (series string) If extend=extend.none, draws segment starting at point (x1, y1) and ending at point (x2, y2). If extend is equal to extend.right or extend.left, draws a ray starting at point (x1, y1) or (x2, y2), respectively. If extend=extend.both, draws a straight line that goes through these points. Default value is extend.none.
color : (series color) Line color.
style : (series string) Line style. Possible values: line.style_solid, line.style_dotted, line.style_dashed, line.style_arrow_left, line.style_arrow_right, line.style_arrow_both.
width : (series int) Line width in pixels.
obj : line object
AdxlLibrary "Adxl"
Functions to calculate the Average Directional Index
getDirectionUp(bar, lookback)
Bar high changed from open for bar
Parameters:
bar : series int The bar to calculate at
lookback : series int The lookback period
Returns: series float
getDirectionDown(bar, lookback)
Bar low changed from open for bar
Parameters:
bar : series int The bar to calculate at
lookback : series int The lookback period
Returns: series float
getPositiveDirectionalMovement(bar, lookback)
Positive directional movement for bar during lookback
Parameters:
bar : series int The bar to calculate at
lookback : series int The lookback period
Returns: series float
getNegativeDirectionalMovement(bar, lookback)
Negative directional movement for bar during lookback
Parameters:
bar : series int The bar to calculate at
lookback : series int The lookback period
Returns: series float
getTrueRangeMovingAverage(bar, lookback)
True range moving average for bar during lookback
Parameters:
bar : series int The bar to calculate at
lookback : simple int The lookback period
Returns: series int
getDirectionUpIndex(bar, lookback)
Direction up index for bar during lookback
Parameters:
bar : series int The bar to calculate at
lookback : simple int The lookback period
Returns: series int
getDirectionDownIndex(bar, lookback)
Direction down index for bar during lookback
Parameters:
bar : series int The bar to calculate at
lookback : simple int The lookback period
Returns: series int
getTotalDirectionIndex(bar, lookback)
Total direction index for bar during lookback
Parameters:
bar : series int The bar to calculate at
lookback : simple int The lookback period
Returns: series int
getAverageDirectionalIndex(bar, lookback)
Average Directional Index (ADX) for bar during lookback
Parameters:
bar : series int The bar to calculate at
lookback : simple int The lookback period
Returns: series int
Delta Volume Candles [LucF]█ OVERVIEW
This indicator plots on-chart volume delta information using candles that can replace your normal candles, tops and bottoms appended to normal candles, optional MAs of those tops and bottoms levels, a divergence channel and a chart background. The indicator calculates volume delta using intrabar analysis, meaning that it uses the lower timeframe bars constituting each chart bar.
█ CONCEPTS
Volume Delta
The volume delta concept divides a bar's volume in "up" and "down" volumes. The delta is calculated by subtracting down volume from up volume. Many calculation techniques exist to isolate up and down volume within a bar. The simplest use the polarity of interbar price changes to assign their volume to up or down slots, e.g., On Balance Volume or the Klinger Oscillator . Others such as Chaikin Money Flow use assumptions based on a bar's OHLC values. The most precise calculation method uses tick data and assigns the volume of each tick to the up or down slot depending on whether the transaction occurs at the bid or ask price. While this technique is ideal, it requires huge amounts of data on historical bars, which considerably limits the historical depth of charts and the number of symbols for which tick data is available. Furthermore, historical tick data is not yet available on TradingView.
This indicator uses intrabar analysis to achieve a compromise between the simplest and most precise methods of calculating volume delta. It is currently the most precise method usable on TradingView charts. TradingView's Volume Profile built-in indicators use it, as do the CVD - Cumulative Volume Delta Candles and CVD - Cumulative Volume Delta (Chart) indicators published from the TradingView account . My Delta Volume Channels and Volume Delta Columns Pro indicators also use intrabar analysis. Other volume delta indicators such as my Realtime 5D Profile use realtime chart updates to calculate volume delta without intrabar analysis, but that type of indicator only works in real time; they cannot calculate on historical bars.
This is the logic I use to determine the polarity of intrabars, which determines the up or down slot where its volume is added:
• If the intrabar's open and close values are different, their relative position is used.
• If the intrabar's open and close values are the same, the difference between the intrabar's close and the previous intrabar's close is used.
• As a last resort, when there is no movement during an intrabar, and it closes at the same price as the previous intrabar, the last known polarity is used.
Once all intrabars making up a chart bar have been analyzed and the up or down property of each intrabar's volume determined, the up volumes are added, and the down volumes subtracted. The resulting value is volume delta for that chart bar, which can be used as an estimate of the buying/selling pressure on an instrument. Not all markets have volume information. Without it, this indicator is useless.
Intrabar analysis
Intrabars are chart bars at a lower timeframe than the chart's. The timeframe used to access intrabars determines the number of intrabars accessible for each chart bar. On a 1H chart, each chart bar of an active market will, for example, usually contain 60 bars at the lower timeframe of 1min, provided there was market activity during each minute of the hour.
This indicator automatically calculates an appropriate lower timeframe using the chart's timeframe and the settings you use in the script's "Intrabars" section of the inputs. As it can access lower timeframes as small as seconds when available, the indicator can be used on charts at relatively small timeframes such as 1min, provided the market is active enough to produce bars at second timeframes.
The quantity of intrabars analyzed in each chart bar determines:
• The precision of calculations (more intrabars yield more precise results).
• The chart coverage of calculations (there is a 100K limit to the quantity of intrabars that can be analyzed on any chart,
so the more intrabars you analyze per chart bar, the less chart bars can be calculated by the indicator).
The information box displayed at the bottom right of the chart shows the lower timeframe used for intrabars, as well as the average number of intrabars detected for chart bars and statistics on chart coverage.
Balances
This indicator calculates five balances from volume delta values. The balances are oscillators with a zero centerline; positive values are bullish, and negative values are bearish. It is important to understand the balances as they can be used to:
• Color candle bodies.
• Calculate body and top and bottom divergences.
• Color an EMA channel.
• Color the chart's background.
• Configure markers and alerts.
The five balances are:
1 — Bar Balance : This is the only balance using instant values; it is simply the subtraction of the down volume from the up volume on the bar, so the instant volume delta for that bar.
2 — Average Balance : Calculates a distinct EMA for both the up and down volumes, and subtracts the down EMA from the up EMA.
The result is akin to MACD's histogram because it is the subtraction of two moving averages.
3 — Momentum Balance : Starts by calculating, separately for both up and down volumes, the difference between the same EMAs used in "Average Balance" and
an SMA of twice the period used for the "Average Balance" EMAs. The difference for the up side is subtracted from the difference for the down side,
and an RSI of that value is calculated and brought over the −50/+50 scale.
4 — Relative Balance : The reference values used in the calculation are the up and down EMAs used in the "Average Balance".
From those, we calculate two intermediate values using how much the instant up and down volumes on the bar exceed their respective EMA — but with a twist.
If the bar's up volume does not exceed the EMA of up volume, a zero value is used. The same goes for the down volume with the EMA of down volume.
Once we have our two intermediate values for the up and down volumes exceeding their respective MA, we subtract them. The final value is an ALMA of that subtraction.
The rationale behind using zero values when the bar's up/down volume does not exceed its EMA is to only take into account the more significant volume.
If both instant volume values exceed their MA, then the difference between the two is the signal's value.
The signal is called "relative" because the intermediate values are the difference between the instant up/down volumes and their respective MA.
This balance flatlines when the bar's up/down volumes do not exceed their EMAs, which makes it useful to spot areas where trader interest dwindles, such as consolidations.
The smaller the period of the final value's ALMA, the more easily it will flatline. These flat zones should be considered no-trade zones.
5 — Percent Balance : This balance is the ALMA of the ratio of the "Bar Balance" over the total volume for that bar.
From the balances and marker conditions, two more values are calculated:
1 — Marker Bias : This sums the up/down (+1/‒1) occurrences of the markers 1 to 4 over a period you define, so it ranges from −4 to +4, times the period.
Its calculation will depend on the modes used to calculate markers 3 and 4.
2 — Combined Balances : This is the sum of the bull/bear (+1/−1) states of each of the five balances, so it ranges from −5 to +5.
The periods for all of these balances can be configured in the "Periods" section at the bottom of the script's inputs. As you cannot see the balances on the chart, you can use my Volume Delta Columns Pro indicator in a pane; it can plot the same balances, so you will be able to analyze them.
Divergences
In the context of this indicator, a divergence is any bar where the bear/bull state of a balance (above/below its zero centerline) diverges from the polarity of a chart bar. No directional bias is assigned to divergences when they occur. Candle bodies and tops/bottoms can each be colored differently on divergences detected from distinct balances.
Divergence Channel
The divergence channel is the space between two levels (by default, the bar's open and close ) saved when divergences occur. When price (by default the close ) has breached a channel and a new divergence occurs, a new channel is created. Until that new channel is breached, bars where additional divergences occur will expand the channel's levels if the bar's price points are outside the channel.
Prices breaches of the divergence channel will change its state. Divergence channels can be in one of three different states:
• Bull (green): Price has breached the channel to the upside.
• Bear (red): Price has breached the channel to the downside.
• Neutral (gray): The channel has not yet been breached.
█ HOW TO USE THE INDICATOR
I do not make videos to explain how to use my indicators. I do, however, try hard to include in their description everything one needs to understand what they do. From there, it's up to you to explore and figure out if they can be useful in your trading practice. Communicating in videos what this description and the script's tooltips contain would make for very long videos that would likely exceed the attention span of most people who find this description too long. There is no quick way to understand an indicator such as this one because it uses many different concepts and has quite a bit of settings one can use to modify its visuals and behavior — thus how one uses it. I will happily answer questions on the inner workings of the indicator, but I do not answer questions like "How do I trade using this indicator?" A useful answer to that question would require an in-depth analysis of who you are, your trading methodology and objectives, which I do not have time for. I do not teach trading.
Start by loading the indicator on an active chart containing volume information. See here if you need help.
The default configuration displays:
• Normal candles where the bodies are only colored if the bar's volume has increased since the last bar.
If you want to use this indicator's candles, you may want to disable your chart's candles by clicking the eye icon to the right of the symbol's name in the top left of the chart.
• A top or bottom appended to the normal candles. It represents the difference between up and down volume for that bar
and is positioned at the top or bottom, depending on its polarity. If up volume is greater than down volume, a top is displayed. If down volume is greater, a bottom is plotted.
The size of tops and bottoms is determined by calculating a factor which is the proportion of volume delta over the bar's total volume.
That factor is then used to calculate the top or bottom size relative to a baseline of the average candle body size of the last 100 bars.
• An information box in the bottom right displaying intrabar and chart coverage information.
• A light red background when the intrabar volume differs from the chart's volume by more than 1%.
The script's inputs contain tooltips explaining most of the fields. I will not repeat them here. Following is a brief description of each section of the indicator's inputs which will give you an idea of what the indicator can do:
Normal Candles is where you configure the replacement candles plotted by the script. You can choose from different coloring schemes for their bodies and specify a unique color for bodies where a divergence calculated using the method you choose occurs.
Volume Tops & Botttoms is where you configure the display of tops and bottoms, and their EMAs. The EMAs are calculated from the high point of tops and the low point of bottoms. They can act as a channel to evaluate price, and you can choose to color the channel using a gradient reflecting the advances/declines in the balance of your choice.
Divergence Channel is where you set up the appearance and behavior of the divergence channel. These areas represent levels where price and volume delta information do not converge. They can be interpreted as regions with no clear direction from where one will look for breaches. You can configure the channel to take into account one or both types of divergences you have configured for candle bodies and tops/bottoms.
Background allows you to configure a gradient background color that reflects the advances/declines in the balance of your choice. You can use this to provide context to the volume delta values from bars. You can also control the background color displayed on volume discrepancies between the intrabar and the chart's timeframe.
Intrabars is where you choose the calculation mode determining the lower timeframe used to access intrabars. The indicator uses the chart's timeframe and the type of market you are on to calculate the lower timeframe. Your setting there should reflect which compromise you prefer between the precision of calculations and chart coverage. This is also where you control the display of the information box in the lower right corner of the chart.
Markers allows you to control the plotting of chart markers on different conditions. Their configuration determines when alerts generated from the indicator will fire. Note that in order to generate alerts from this script, they must be created from your chart. See this Help Center page to learn how. Only the last 500 markers will be visible on the chart, but this will not affect the generation of alerts.
Periods is where you configure the periods for the balances and the EMAs used in the indicator.
The raw values calculated by this script can be inspected using the Data Window.
█ INTERPRETATION
Rightly or wrongly, volume delta is considered by many a useful complement to the interpretation of price action. I use it extensively in an attempt to find convergence between my read of volume delta and price movement — not so much as a predictor of future price movement. No system or person can predict the future. Accordingly, I consider people who speak or act as if they know the future with certainty to be dangerous to themselves and others; they are charlatans, imprudent or blissfully ignorant.
I try to avoid elaborate volume delta interpretation schemes involving too many variables and prefer to keep things simple:
• Trends that have more chances of continuing should be accompanied by VD of the same polarity.
In trends, I am looking for "slow and steady". I work from the assumption that traders and systems often overreact, which translates into unproductive volatility.
Wild trends are more susceptible to overreactions.
• I prefer steady VD values over wildly increasing ones, as large VD increases often come with increased price volatility, which can backfire.
Large VD values caused by stopping volume will also often occur on trend reversals with abnormally high candles.
• Prices escaping divergence channels may be leading a trend in that direction, although there is no telling how long that trend will last; could be just a few bars or hundreds.
When price is in a channel, shifts in VD balances can sometimes give us an idea of the direction where price has the most chance of breaking.
• Dwindling VD will often indicate trend exhaustion and predate reversals by many bars, but the problem is that mere pauses in a trend will often produce the same behavior in VD.
I think it is too perilous to infer rigidly from VD decreases.
Divergence Channel
Here I have configured the divergence channels to be visible. First, I set the bodies to display divergences on the default Bar Balance. They are indicated by yellow bodies. Then I activated the divergence channels by choosing to draw levels on body divergences and checked the "Fill" checkbox to fill the channel with the same color as the levels. The divergence channel is best understood as a direction-less area from where a breach can be acted on if other variables converge with the breach's direction:
Tops and Bottoms EMAs
I find these EMAs rather interesting. They have no equivalent elsewhere, as they are calculated from the top and bottom values this indicator plots. The only similarity they have with volume-weighted MAs, including VWAP, is that they use price and volume. This indicator's Tops and Bottoms EMAs, however, use the price and volume delta. While the channel differs from other channels in how it is calculated, it can be used like others, as a baseline from which to evaluate price movement or, alternatively, as stop levels. Remember that you can change the period used for the EMAs in the "Periods" section of the inputs.
This chart shows the EMAs in action, filled with a gradient representing the advances/decline from the Momentum balance. Notice the anomaly in the chart's latest bars where the Momentum balance gradient has been indicating a bullish bias for some time, during which price was mostly below the EMAs. Price has just broken above the channel on positive VD. My interpretation of this situation would be that it is a risky opportunity for a long trade in the larger context where the market has been in a downtrend since the 5th. Intrepid traders choosing to enter here could do so with a "make or break" tight stop that will minimize their losses should the market continue its downtrend while hopefully preserving the potential upside of price continuing on the longer-term uptrend prevalent since the 28th:
█ NOTES
Volume
If you use indicators such as this one which depends on volume information, it is important to realize that the volume data they consume comes from data feeds, and that all data feeds are NOT created equally. Those who create the data feeds we use must make decisions concerning the nature of the transactions they tally and the way they are tallied in each feed, and these decisions affect the nature of our volume data. My Volume X-ray publication discusses some of the reasons why volume information from different timeframes, brokers/exchanges or sectors may vary considerably. I encourage you to read it. This indicator's display of a warning through a background color on volume discrepancies between the timeframe used to access intrabars and the chart's timeframe is an attempt to help you realize these variations in feeds. Don't take things for granted, and understand that the quality of a given feed's volume information affects the quality of the results this indicator calculates.
Markets as ecosystems
I believe it is perilous to think that behavioral patterns you discover in one market through the lens of this or any other indicator will necessarily port to other markets. While this may sometimes be the case, it will often not. Why is that? Because each market is its own ecosystem. As cities do, all markets share some common characteristics, but they also all have their idiosyncrasies. A proportion of a city's inhabitants is always composed of outsiders who come and go, but a core population of regulars and systems is usually the force that actually defines most of the city's observable characteristics. I believe markets work somewhat the same way; they may look the same, but if you live there for a while and pay attention, you will notice the idiosyncrasies. Some things that work in some markets will, accordingly, not work in others. Please keep that in mind when you draw conclusions.
On Up/Down or Buy/Sell Volume
Buying or selling volume are misnomers, as every unit of volume transacted is both bought and sold by two different traders. While this does not keep me from using the terms, there is no such thing as “buy only” or “sell only” volume. Trader lingo is riddled with peculiarities. Without access to order book information, traders work with the assumption that when price moves up during a bar, there was more buying pressure than selling pressure, just as when buy market orders take out limit ask orders in the order book at successively higher levels. The built-in volume indicator available on TradingView uses this logic to color the volume columns green or red. While this script’s calculations are more precise because it analyses intrabars to calculate its information, it uses pretty much the same imperfect logic. Until Pine scripts can have access to how much volume was transacted at the bid/ask prices, our volume delta calculations will remain a mere proxy.
Repainting
• The values calculated on the realtime bar will update as new information comes from the feed.
• Historical values may recalculate if the historical feed is updated or when calculations start from a new point in history.
• Markers and alerts will not repaint as they only occur on a bar's close. Keep this in mind when viewing markers on historical bars,
where one could understandably and incorrectly assume they appear at the bar's open.
To learn more about repainting, see the Pine Script™ User Manual's page on the subject .
Superfluity
In "The Bed of Procrustes", Nassim Nicholas Taleb writes: To bankrupt a fool, give him information . This indicator can display a lot of information. The inevitable adaptation period you will need to figure out how to use it should help you eliminate all the visuals you do not need. The more you eliminate, the easier it will be to focus on those that are the most useful to your trading practice. Don't be a fool.
█ THANKS
Thanks to alexgrover for his Dekidaka-Ashi indicator. His volume plots on candles were the inspiration for my top/bottom plots.
Kudos to PineCoders for their libraries. I use two of them in this script: Time and lower_tf .
The first versions of this script used functionality that I would not have known about were it not for these two guys:
— A guy called Kuan who commented on a Backtest Rookies presentation of their Volume Profile indicator.
— theheirophant , my partner in the exploration of the sometimes weird abysses of request.security() ’s behavior at lower timeframes.
Ultimate MACD [captainua]Ultimate MACD - Comprehensive MACD Trading System
Overview
This indicator combines traditional MACD calculations with advanced features including divergence detection, volume analysis, histogram analysis tools, regression forecasting, strong top/bottom detection, and multi-timeframe confirmation to provide a comprehensive MACD-based trading system. The script calculates MACD using configurable moving average types (EMA, SMA, RMA, WMA) and applies various smoothing methods to reduce noise while maintaining responsiveness. The combination of these features creates a multi-layered confirmation system that reduces false signals by requiring alignment across multiple indicators and timeframes.
Core Calculations
MACD Calculation:
The script calculates MACD using the standard formula: MACD Line = Fast MA - Slow MA, Signal Line = Moving Average of MACD Line, Histogram = MACD Line - Signal Line. The default parameters are Fast=12, Slow=26, Signal=9, matching the traditional MACD settings. The script supports four moving average types:
- EMA (Exponential Moving Average): Standard and most responsive, default choice
- SMA (Simple Moving Average): Equal weight to all periods
- RMA (Wilder's Moving Average): Smoother, less responsive
- WMA (Weighted Moving Average): Recent prices weighted more heavily
The price source can be configured as Close (standard), Open, High, Low, HL2, HLC3, or OHLC4. Alternative sources provide different sensitivity characteristics for various trading strategies.
Configuration Presets:
The script includes trading style presets that automatically configure MACD parameters:
- Scalping: Fast/Responsive settings (8,18,6 with minimal smoothing)
- Day Trading: Balanced settings (10,22,7 with minimal smoothing)
- Swing Trading: Standard settings (12,26,9 with moderate smoothing)
- Position Trading: Smooth/Conservative settings (15,35,12 with higher smoothing)
- Custom: Full manual control over all parameters
Histogram Smoothing:
The histogram can be smoothed using EMA to reduce noise and filter minor fluctuations. Smoothing length of 1 = raw histogram (no smoothing), higher values (3-5) = smoother histogram. Increased smoothing reduces noise but may delay signals slightly.
Percentage Mode:
MACD values can be converted to percentage of price (MACD/Close*100) for cross-instrument comparison. This is useful when comparing MACD signals across instruments with different price levels (e.g., BTC vs ETH). The percentage mode normalizes MACD values, making them comparable regardless of instrument price.
MACD Scale Factor:
A scale factor multiplier (default 1.0) allows adjusting MACD display size for better visibility. Use 0.3-0.5 if MACD appears too compressed, or 2.0-3.0 if too small.
Dynamic Overbought/Oversold Levels:
Overbought and oversold levels are calculated dynamically based on MACD's mean and standard deviation over a lookback period. The formula: OB = MACD Mean + (StdDev × OB Multiplier), OS = MACD Mean - (StdDev × OS Multiplier). This adapts to current market conditions, widening in volatile markets and narrowing in calm markets. The lookback period (default 20) controls how quickly the levels adapt: longer periods (30-50) = more stable levels, shorter (10-15) = more responsive.
OB/OS Background Coloring:
Optional background coloring can highlight the entire panel when MACD enters overbought or oversold territory, providing prominent visual indication of extreme conditions. The background colors are drawn on top of the main background to ensure visibility.
Divergence Detection
Regular Divergence:
The script uses the MACD line (not histogram) for divergence detection, which provides more reliable signals. Bullish divergence: Price makes a lower low while MACD line makes a higher low. Bearish divergence: Price makes a higher high while MACD line makes a lower high. Divergences often precede reversals and are powerful reversal signals.
Pivot-Based Divergence:
The divergence detection uses actual pivot points (pivotlow/pivothigh) instead of simple lowest/highest comparisons. This provides more accurate divergence detection by identifying significant pivot lows/highs in both price and MACD line. The pivot-based method compares two recent pivot points: for bullish divergence, price makes a lower low while MACD makes a higher low at the pivot points. This method reduces false divergences by requiring actual pivot points rather than just any low/high within a period.
The pivot lookback parameters (left and right) control how many bars on each side of a pivot are required for confirmation. Higher values = more conservative pivot detection.
Hidden Divergence:
Continuation patterns that signal trend continuation rather than reversal. Bullish hidden divergence: Price makes a higher low but MACD makes a lower low. Bearish hidden divergence: Price makes a lower high but MACD makes a higher high. These patterns indicate the trend is likely to continue in the current direction.
Zero-Line Filter:
The "Don't Touch Zero Line" option ensures divergences occur in proper context: for bullish divergence, MACD must stay below zero; for bearish divergence, MACD must stay above zero. This filters out divergences that occur in neutral zones.
Range Filtering:
Minimum and maximum lookback ranges control the time window between pivots to consider for divergence. This helps filter out divergences that are too close together (noise) or too far apart (less relevant).
Volume Confirmation System
Volume threshold filtering requires current volume to exceed the volume SMA multiplied by the threshold factor. The formula: Volume Confirmed = Volume > (Volume SMA × Threshold). If the threshold is set to 1.0 or lower, volume confirmation is effectively disabled (always returns true). This allows you to use the indicator without volume filtering if desired. Volume confirmation significantly increases divergence and signal reliability.
Volume Climax and Dry-Up Detection:
The script can mark bars with extremely high volume (volume climax) or extremely low volume (volume dry-up). Volume climax indicates potential reversal points or strong momentum continuation. Volume dry-up indicates low participation and may produce unreliable signals. These markers use standard deviation multipliers to identify extreme volume conditions.
Zero-Line Cross Detection
MACD zero-line crosses indicate momentum shifts: above zero = bullish momentum, below zero = bearish momentum. The script includes alert conditions for zero-line crosses with cooldown protection to prevent alert spam. Zero-line crosses can provide early warning signals before MACD crosses the signal line.
Histogram Analysis Tools
Histogram Moving Average:
A moving average applied to the histogram itself helps identify histogram trend direction and acts as a signal line for histogram movements. Supports EMA, SMA, RMA, and WMA types. Useful for identifying when histogram momentum is strengthening or weakening.
Histogram Bollinger Bands:
Bollinger Bands are applied to the MACD histogram instead of price. The calculation: Basis = SMA(Histogram, Period), StdDev = stdev(Histogram, Period), Upper = Basis + (StdDev × Deviation Multiplier), Lower = Basis - (StdDev × Deviation Multiplier). This creates dynamic zones around the histogram that adapt to histogram volatility. When the histogram touches or exceeds the bands, it indicates extreme conditions relative to recent histogram behavior.
Stochastic MACD (StochMACD):
Stochastic MACD applies the Stochastic oscillator formula to the MACD histogram instead of price. This normalizes the histogram to a 0-100 scale, making it easier to identify overbought/oversold conditions on the histogram itself. The calculation: %K = ((Histogram - Lowest Histogram) / (Highest Histogram - Lowest Histogram)) × 100. %K is smoothed, and %D is calculated as the moving average of smoothed %K. Standard thresholds are 80 (overbought) and 20 (oversold).
Regression Forecasting
The script includes advanced regression forecasting that predicts future MACD values using mathematical models. This helps anticipate potential MACD movements and provides forward-looking context for trading decisions.
Regression Types:
- Linear: Simple trend line (y = mx + b) - fastest, works well for steady trends
- Polynomial: Quadratic curve (y = ax² + bx + c) - captures curvature in MACD movement
- Exponential Smoothing: Weighted average with more weight on recent values - responsive to recent changes
- Moving Average: Uses difference between short and long MA to estimate trend - stable and smooth
Forecast Horizon:
Number of bars to forecast ahead (default 5, max 50 for linear/MA, max 20 for polynomial due to performance). Longer horizons predict further ahead but may be less accurate.
Confidence Bands:
Optional upper/lower bands around forecast show prediction uncertainty based on forecast error (standard deviation of prediction vs actual). Wider bands = higher uncertainty. The confidence level multiplier (default 1.5) controls band width.
Forecast Display:
Forecast appears as dotted lines extending forward from current bar, with optional confidence bands. All forecast values respect percentage mode and scale factor settings.
Strong Top/Bottom Signals
The script detects strong recovery from extreme MACD levels, generating "sBottom" and "sTop" signals. These identify significant reversal potential when MACD recovers substantially from overbought/oversold extremes.
Strong Bottom (sBottom):
Triggered when:
1. MACD was at or near its lowest point in the bottom period (default 10 bars)
2. MACD was in or near the oversold zone
3. MACD has recovered by at least the threshold amount (default 0.5) from the lowest point
4. Recovery persists for confirmation bars (default 2 consecutive bars)
5. MACD has moved out of the oversold zone
6. Volume is above average
7. All enabled filters pass
8. Minimum bars have passed since last signal (reset period, default 5 bars)
Strong Top (sTop):
Triggered when:
1. MACD was at or near its highest point in the top period (default 7 bars)
2. MACD was in or near the overbought zone
3. MACD has declined by at least the threshold amount (default 0.5) from the highest point
4. Decline persists for confirmation bars (default 2 consecutive bars)
5. MACD has moved out of the overbought zone
6. Volume is above average
7. All enabled filters pass
8. Minimum bars have passed since last signal (reset period, default 5 bars)
Label Placement:
sTop/sBottom labels appear on the historical bar where the actual extreme occurred (not on current bar), showing the exact MACD value at that extreme. Labels respect the unified distance checking system to prevent overlaps with Buy/Sell Strength labels.
Signal Strength Calculation
The script calculates a composite signal strength score (0-100) based on multiple factors:
- MACD distance from signal line (0-50 points): Larger separation indicates stronger signal
- Volume confirmation (0-15 points): Volume above average adds points
- Secondary timeframe alignment (0-15 points): Higher timeframe agreement adds points
- Distance from zero line (0-20 points): Closer to zero can indicate stronger reversal potential
Higher scores (70+) indicate stronger, more reliable signals. The signal strength is displayed in the statistics table and can be used as a filter to only accept signals above a threshold.
Smart Label Placement System
The script includes an advanced label placement system that tracks MACD extremes and places Buy/Sell Strength labels at optimal locations:
Label Placement Algorithm:
- Labels appear on the current bar at confirmation (not on historical extreme bars), ensuring they're visible when the signal is confirmed
- The system tracks pending signals when MACD enters OB/OS zones or crosses the signal line
- During tracking, the system continuously searches for the true extreme (lowest MACD for buys, highest MACD for sells) within a configurable historical lookback period
- Labels are only finalized when: (1) MACD exits the OB/OS zone, (2) sufficient bars have passed (2x minimum distance), (3) MACD has recovered/declined by a configurable percentage from the extreme (default 15%), and (4) tracking has stopped (no better extreme found)
Label Spacing and Overlap Prevention:
- Minimum Bars Between Labels: Base distance requirement (default 5 bars)
- Label Spacing Multiplier: Scales the base distance (default 1.5x) for better distribution. Higher values = more spacing between labels
- Effective distance = Base Distance × Spacing Multiplier (e.g., 5 × 1.5 = 7.5 bars minimum)
- Unified distance checking prevents overlaps between all label types (Buy Strength, Sell Strength, sTop, sBottom)
Strength-Based Filtering:
- Label Strength Minimum (%): Only labels with strength at or above this threshold are displayed (default 75%)
- When multiple potential labels are close together, the system automatically compares strengths and keeps only the strongest one
- This ensures only the most significant signals are displayed, reducing chart clutter
Zero Line Polarity Enforcement:
- Enforce Zero Line Polarity (default enabled): Ensures labels follow traditional MACD interpretation
- Buy Strength labels only appear when the tracked extreme MACD value was below zero (negative territory)
- Sell Strength labels only appear when the tracked extreme MACD value was above zero (positive territory)
- This prevents counter-intuitive labels (e.g., Buy labels above zero line) and aligns with standard MACD trading principles
Recovery/Decline Confirmation:
- Recovery/Decline Confirm (%): Percent move away from the extreme required before finalizing (default 15%)
- For Buy labels: MACD must recover by at least this percentage from the tracked bottom
- For Sell labels: MACD must decline by at least this percentage from the tracked top
- Higher values = more confirmation required, fewer but more reliable labels
Historical Lookback:
- Historical Lookback for Label Placement: Number of bars to search for true extremes (default 20)
- The system searches within this period to find the actual lowest/highest MACD value
- Higher values analyze more history but may be slower; lower values are faster but may miss some extremes
Cross Quality Score
The script calculates a MACD cross quality score (0-100) that rates crossover quality based on:
- Cross angle (0-50 points): Steeper crosses = stronger signals
- Volume confirmation (0-25 points): Volume above average adds points
- Distance from zero line (0-25 points): Crosses near zero line are stronger
This score helps identify high-quality crossovers and can be used as a filter to only accept signals meeting minimum quality threshold.
Filtering System
Histogram Filter:
Requires histogram to be above zero for buy signals, below zero for sell signals. Ensures momentum alignment before generating signals.
Signal Strength Filter:
Requires minimum signal strength score for signals. Higher threshold = only strongest signals pass. This combines multiple confirmation factors into a single filter.
Cross Quality Filter:
Requires minimum cross quality score for signals. Rates crossover quality based on angle, volume, momentum, and distance from zero. Only signals meeting minimum quality threshold will be generated.
All filters use the pattern: filterResult = not filterEnabled OR conditionMet. This means if a filter is disabled, it always passes (returns true). Filters can be combined, and all must pass for a signal to fire.
Multi-Timeframe Analysis
The script can display MACD from a secondary (higher) timeframe and use it for confirmation. When secondary timeframe confirmation is enabled, signals require the higher timeframe MACD to align (bullish/bearish) with the signal direction. This ensures signals align with the larger trend context, reducing counter-trend trades.
Secondary Timeframe MACD:
The secondary timeframe MACD uses the same calculation parameters (fast, slow, signal, MA type) as the main MACD but from a higher timeframe. This provides context for the current timeframe's MACD position relative to the larger trend. The secondary MACD lines are displayed on the chart when enabled.
Noise Filtering
Noise filtering hides small histogram movements below a threshold. This helps focus on significant moves and reduces chart clutter. When enabled, only histogram movements above the threshold are displayed. Typical threshold values are 0.1-0.5 for most instruments, depending on the instrument's price range and volatility.
Signal Debounce
Signal debounce prevents duplicate MACD cross signals within a short time period. Useful when MACD crosses back and forth quickly, creating multiple signals. Debounce ensures only one signal per period, reducing signal spam during choppy markets. This is separate from alert cooldown, which applies to all alert types.
Background Color Modes
The script offers three background color modes:
- Dynamic: Full MACD heatmap based on OB/OS conditions, confidence, and momentum. Provides rich visual feedback.
- Monotone: Soft neutral background but still allows overlays (OB/OS zones). Keeps the chart clean without overpowering candles.
- Off: No MACD background (only overlays and plots). Maximum chart cleanliness.
When OB/OS background colors are enabled, they are drawn on top of the main background to ensure visibility.
Statistics Table
A real-time statistics table displays current MACD values, signal strength, distance from zero line, secondary timeframe alignment, volume confirmation status, and all active filter statuses. The table dynamically adjusts to show only enabled features, keeping it clean and relevant. The table position can be configured (Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Right).
Performance Statistics Table
An optional performance statistics table shows comprehensive filter diagnostics:
- Total buy/sell signals (raw crossover count before filters)
- Filtered buy/sell signals (signals that passed all filters)
- Overall pass rates (percentage of signals that passed filters)
- Rejected signals count
- Filter-by-filter rejection diagnostics showing which filters rejected how many signals
This table helps optimize filter settings by showing which filters are most restrictive and how they impact signal frequency. The diagnostics format shows rejections as "X B / Y S" (X buy signals rejected, Y sell signals rejected) or "Disabled" if the filter is not active.
Alert System
The script includes separate alert conditions for each signal type:
- MACD Cross: MACD line crosses above/below Signal line (with or without secondary confirmation)
- Zero-Line Cross: MACD crosses above/below zero
- Divergence: Regular and hidden divergence detections
- Secondary Timeframe: Higher timeframe MACD crosses
- Histogram MA Cross: Histogram crosses above/below its moving average
- Histogram Zero Cross: Histogram crosses above/below zero
- StochMACD: StochMACD overbought/oversold entries and %K/%D crosses
- Histogram BB: Histogram touches/breaks Bollinger Bands
- Volume Events: Volume climax and dry-up detections
- OB/OS: MACD entry/exit from overbought/oversold zones
- Strong Top/Bottom: sTop and sBottom signal detections
Each alert type has its own cooldown system to prevent alert spam. The cooldown requires a minimum number of bars between alerts of the same type, reducing duplicate alerts during volatile periods. Alert types can be filtered to only evaluate specific alert types (All, MACD Cross, Zero Line, Divergence, Secondary Timeframe, Histogram MA, Histogram Zero, StochMACD, Histogram BB, Volume Events, OB/OS, Strong Top/Bottom).
How Components Work Together
MACD crossovers provide the primary signal when the MACD line crosses the Signal line. Zero-line crosses indicate momentum shifts and can provide early warning signals. Divergences identify potential reversals before they occur.
Volume confirmation ensures signals occur with sufficient market participation, filtering out low-volume false breakouts. Histogram analysis tools (MA, Bollinger Bands, StochMACD) provide additional context for signal reliability and identify significant histogram zones.
Signal strength combines multiple confirmation factors into a single score, making it easy to filter for only the strongest signals. Cross quality score rates crossover quality to identify high-quality setups. Multi-timeframe confirmation ensures signals align with higher timeframe trends, reducing counter-trend trades.
Usage Instructions
Getting Started:
The default configuration shows MACD(12,26,9) with standard EMA calculations. Start with default settings and observe behavior, then customize settings to match your trading style. You can use configuration presets for quick setup based on your trading style.
Customizing MACD Parameters:
Adjust Fast Length (default 12), Slow Length (default 26), and Signal Length (default 9) based on your trading timeframe. Shorter periods (8,17,7) for faster signals, longer (15,30,12) for smoother signals. You can change the moving average type: EMA for responsiveness, RMA for smoothness, WMA for recent price emphasis.
Price Source Selection:
Choose Close (standard), or alternative sources (HL2, HLC3, OHLC4) for different sensitivity. HL2 uses the midpoint of the high-low range, HLC3 and OHLC4 incorporate more price information.
Histogram Smoothing:
Set smoothing to 1 for raw histogram (no smoothing), or increase (3-5) for smoother histogram that reduces noise. Higher smoothing reduces false signals but may delay signals slightly.
Percentage Mode:
Enable percentage mode when comparing MACD across instruments with different price levels. This normalizes MACD values, making them directly comparable.
Dynamic OB/OS Levels:
The dynamic thresholds automatically adapt to volatility. Adjust the multipliers (default 1.5) to fine-tune sensitivity: higher values (2.0-3.0) = more extreme thresholds (fewer signals), lower (1.0-1.5) = more frequent signals. Adjust the lookback period to control how quickly levels adapt. Enable OB/OS background colors for visual indication of extreme conditions.
Volume Confirmation:
Set volume threshold to 1.0 (default, effectively disabled) or higher (1.2-1.5) for standard confirmation. Higher values require more volume for confirmation. Set to 0.1 to completely disable volume filtering.
Filters:
Enable filters gradually to find your preferred balance. Start with histogram filter for basic momentum alignment, then add signal strength filter (threshold 50+) for moderate signals, then cross quality filter (threshold 50+) for high-quality crossovers. Combine filters for highest-quality signals but expect fewer signals.
Divergence:
Enable divergence detection and adjust pivot lookback parameters. Pivot-based divergence provides more accurate detection using actual pivot points. Hidden divergence is useful for trend-following strategies. Adjust range parameters to filter divergences by time window.
Zero-Line Crosses:
Zero-line cross alerts are automatically available when alerts are enabled. These provide early warning signals for momentum shifts.
Histogram Analysis Tools:
Enable Histogram Moving Average to see histogram trend direction. Enable Histogram Bollinger Bands to identify extreme histogram zones. Enable Stochastic MACD to normalize histogram to 0-100 scale for overbought/oversold identification.
Multi-Timeframe:
Enable secondary timeframe MACD to see higher timeframe context. Enable secondary confirmation to require higher timeframe alignment for signals.
Signal Strength:
Signal strength is automatically calculated and displayed in the statistics table. Use signal strength filter to only accept signals above a threshold (e.g., 50 for moderate, 70+ for strong signals only).
Smart Label Placement:
Configure label placement settings to control label appearance and quality:
- Label Strength Minimum (%): Set threshold (default 75%) to show only strong signals. Higher = fewer, stronger labels
- Label Spacing Multiplier: Adjust spacing (default 1.5x) for better distribution. Higher = more spacing between labels
- Recovery/Decline Confirm (%): Set confirmation requirement (default 15%). Higher = more confirmation, fewer labels
- Enforce Zero Line Polarity: Enable (default) to ensure Buy labels only appear when tracked extreme was below zero, Sell labels only when above zero
- Historical Lookback: Adjust search period (default 20 bars) for finding true extremes. Higher = more history analyzed
Cross Quality:
Cross quality score is automatically calculated for crossovers. Use cross quality filter to only accept high-quality crossovers (threshold 50+ for moderate, 70+ for high quality).
Alerts:
Set up alerts for your preferred signal types. Enable alert cooldown (default enabled, 5 bars) to prevent alert spam. Use alert type filter to only evaluate specific alert types (All, MACD Cross, Zero Line, Divergence, Secondary Timeframe, Histogram MA, Histogram Zero, StochMACD, Histogram BB, Volume Events, OB/OS, Strong Top/Bottom). Each signal type has its own alert condition, so you can be selective about which signals trigger alerts.
Visual Elements and Signal Markers
The script uses various visual markers to indicate signals and conditions:
- MACD Line: Green when above signal (bullish), red when below (bearish) if dynamic colors enabled. Optional black outline for enhanced visibility
- Signal Line: Orange line with optional black outline for enhanced visibility
- Histogram: Color-coded based on direction and momentum (green for bullish rising, lime for bullish falling, red for bearish falling, orange for bearish rising)
- Zero Line: Horizontal reference line at MACD = 0
- Fill to Zero: Green/red semi-transparent fill between MACD line and zero line showing bullish/bearish territory
- Fill Between OB/OS: Blue semi-transparent fill between overbought/oversold thresholds highlighting neutral zone
- OB/OS Background Colors: Background coloring when MACD enters overbought/oversold zones
- Background Colors: Dynamic or monotone backgrounds indicating MACD state, or custom chart background
- Divergence Labels: "🐂" for bullish, "🐻" for bearish, "H Bull" for hidden bullish, "H Bear" for hidden bearish
- Divergence Lines: Colored lines connecting pivot points when divergences are detected
- Volume Climax Markers: ⚡ symbol for extremely high volume
- Volume Dry-Up Markers: 💧 symbol for extremely low volume
- Buy/Sell Strength Labels: Show signal strength percentage (e.g., "Buy Strength: 75%")
- Strong Top/Bottom Labels: "sTop" and "sBottom" for extreme level recoveries
- Secondary MACD Lines: Purple lines showing higher timeframe MACD
- Histogram MA: Orange line showing histogram moving average
- Histogram BB: Blue bands around histogram showing extreme zones
- StochMACD Lines: %K and %D lines with overbought/oversold thresholds
- Regression Forecast: Dotted blue lines extending forward with optional confidence bands
Signal Priority and Interpretation
Signals are generated independently and can occur simultaneously. Higher-priority signals generally indicate stronger setups:
1. MACD Cross with Multiple Filters - Highest priority: Requires MACD crossover plus all enabled filters (histogram, signal strength, cross quality) and secondary timeframe confirmation if enabled. These are the most reliable signals.
2. Zero-Line Cross - High priority: Indicates momentum shift. Can provide early warning signals before MACD crosses the signal line.
3. Divergence Signals - Medium-High priority: Pivot-based divergence is more reliable than simple divergence. Hidden divergence indicates continuation rather than reversal.
4. MACD Cross with Basic Filters - Medium priority: MACD crosses signal line with basic histogram filter. Less reliable alone but useful when combined with other confirmations.
Best practice: Wait for multiple confirmations. For example, a MACD crossover combined with divergence, volume confirmation, and secondary timeframe alignment provides the strongest setup.
Chart Requirements
For proper script functionality and compliance with TradingView requirements, ensure your chart displays:
- Symbol name: The trading pair or instrument name should be visible
- Timeframe: The chart timeframe should be clearly displayed
- Script name: "Ultimate MACD " should be visible in the indicator title
These elements help traders understand what they're viewing and ensure proper script identification. The script automatically includes this information in the indicator title and chart labels.
Performance Considerations
The script is optimized for performance:
- Calculations use efficient Pine Script functions (ta.ema, ta.sma, etc.) which are optimized by TradingView
- Conditional execution: Features only calculate when enabled
- Label management: Old labels are automatically deleted to prevent accumulation
- Array management: Divergence label arrays are limited to prevent memory accumulation
The script should perform well on all timeframes. On very long historical data with many enabled features, performance may be slightly slower, but it remains usable.
Known Limitations and Considerations
- Dynamic OB/OS levels can vary significantly based on recent MACD volatility. In very volatile markets, levels may be wider; in calm markets, they may be narrower.
- Volume confirmation requires sufficient historical volume data. On new instruments or very short timeframes, volume calculations may be less reliable.
- Higher timeframe MACD uses request.security() which may have slight delays on some data feeds.
- Stochastic MACD requires the histogram to have sufficient history. Very short periods on new charts may produce less reliable StochMACD values initially.
- Divergence detection requires sufficient historical data to identify pivot points. Very short lookback periods may produce false positives.
Practical Use Cases
The indicator can be configured for different trading styles and timeframes:
Swing Trading:
Use MACD(12,26,9) with secondary timeframe confirmation. Enable divergence detection. Use signal strength filter (threshold 50+) and cross quality filter (threshold 50+) for higher-quality signals. Enable histogram analysis tools for additional context.
Day Trading:
Use MACD(8,17,7) or use "Day Trading" preset with minimal histogram smoothing for faster signals. Enable zero-line cross alerts for early signals. Use volume confirmation with threshold 1.2-1.5. Enable histogram MA for momentum tracking.
Trend Following:
Use MACD(12,26,9) or longer periods (15,30,12) for smoother signals. Enable secondary timeframe confirmation for trend alignment. Hidden divergence signals are useful for trend continuation entries. Use cross quality filter to identify high-quality crossovers.
Reversal Trading:
Focus on divergence detection (pivot-based for accuracy) combined with zero-line crosses. Enable volume confirmation. Use histogram Bollinger Bands to identify extreme histogram zones. Enable StochMACD for overbought/oversold identification.
Multi-Timeframe Analysis:
Enable secondary timeframe MACD to see context from larger timeframes. For example, use daily MACD on hourly charts to understand the larger trend context. Enable secondary confirmation to require higher timeframe alignment for signals.
Practical Tips and Best Practices
Getting Started:
Start with default settings and observe MACD behavior. The default configuration (MACD 12,26,9 with EMA) is balanced and works well across different markets. After observing behavior, customize settings to match your trading style. Consider using configuration presets for quick setup.
Reducing Repainting:
All signals are based on confirmed bars, minimizing repainting. The script uses confirmed bar data for all calculations to ensure backtesting accuracy.
Signal Quality:
MACD crosses with multiple filters provide the highest-quality signals because they require alignment across multiple indicators. These signals have lower frequency but higher reliability. Use signal strength scores to identify the strongest signals (70+). Use cross quality scores to identify high-quality crossovers (70+).
Filter Combinations:
Start with histogram filter for basic momentum alignment, then add signal strength filter for moderate signals, then cross quality filter for high-quality crossovers. Combining all filters significantly reduces false signals but also reduces signal frequency. Find your balance based on your risk tolerance.
Volume Filtering:
Set volume threshold to 1.0 (default, effectively disabled) or lower to effectively disable volume filtering if you trade instruments with unreliable volume data or want to test without volume confirmation. Standard confirmation uses 1.2-1.5 threshold.
MACD Period Selection:
Standard MACD(12,26,9) provides balanced signals suitable for most trading. Shorter periods (8,17,7) for faster signals, longer (15,30,12) for smoother signals. Adjust based on your timeframe and trading style. Consider using configuration presets for optimized settings.
Moving Average Type:
EMA provides balanced responsiveness with smoothness. RMA is smoother and less responsive. WMA gives more weight to recent prices. SMA gives equal weight to all periods. Choose based on your preference for responsiveness vs. smoothness.
Divergence:
Pivot-based divergence is more reliable than simple divergence because it uses actual pivot points. Hidden divergence indicates continuation rather than reversal, useful for trend-following strategies. Adjust pivot lookback parameters to control sensitivity.
Dynamic Thresholds:
Dynamic OB/OS thresholds automatically adapt to volatility. In volatile markets, thresholds widen; in calm markets, they narrow. Adjust the multipliers to fine-tune sensitivity. Enable OB/OS background colors for visual indication.
Zero-Line Crosses:
Zero-line crosses indicate momentum shifts and can provide early warning signals before MACD crosses the signal line. Enable alerts for zero-line crosses to catch these early signals.
Alert Management:
Enable alert cooldown (default enabled, 5 bars) to prevent alert spam. Use alert type filter to only evaluate specific alert types. Signal debounce (default enabled, 3 bars) prevents duplicate MACD cross signals during choppy markets.
Technical Specifications
- Pine Script Version: v6
- Indicator Type: Non-overlay (displays in separate panel below price chart)
- Repainting Behavior: Minimal - all signals are based on confirmed bars, ensuring accurate backtesting results
- Performance: Optimized with conditional execution. Features only calculate when enabled.
- Compatibility: Works on all timeframes (1 minute to 1 month) and all instruments (stocks, forex, crypto, futures, etc.)
- Edge Case Handling: All calculations include safety checks for division by zero, NA values, and boundary conditions. Alert cooldowns and signal debounce handle edge cases where conditions never occurred or values are NA.
Technical Notes
- All MACD values respect percentage mode conversion when enabled
- Volume confirmation uses cached volume SMA for performance
- Label arrays (divergence) are automatically limited to prevent memory accumulation
- Background coloring: OB/OS backgrounds are drawn on top of main background to ensure visibility
- All calculations are optimized with conditional execution - features only calculate when enabled (performance optimization)
- Signal strength calculation combines multiple factors into a single score for easy filtering
- Cross quality calculation rates crossover quality based on angle, volume, and distance from zero
- Secondary timeframe MACD uses request.security() for higher timeframe data access
- Histogram analysis features (Bollinger Bands, MA, StochMACD) provide additional context beyond basic MACD signals
- Statistics table dynamically adjusts to show only enabled features, keeping it clean and relevant
- Divergence detection uses MACD line (not histogram) for more reliable signals
- Configuration presets automatically optimize MACD parameters for different trading styles
- Smart label placement: Labels appear on current bar at confirmation, using strength from tracked extreme point
- Label spacing uses effective distance (base distance × spacing multiplier) for better distribution
- Zero line polarity enforcement ensures Buy labels only appear when tracked extreme MACD < 0, Sell labels only when tracked extreme MACD > 0
- Label finalization requires MACD exit from OB/OS zone, sufficient bars passed, and recovery/decline percentage confirmation
- Strength-based filtering automatically compares and keeps only the strongest label when multiple signals are close together
- Enhanced visualization: Line outlines drawn behind main lines for superior visibility (black default, configurable)
- Enhanced visualization: Fill between MACD and zero line provides instant visual feedback (green above, red below)
- Enhanced visualization: Fill between OB/OS thresholds highlights neutral zone when dynamic levels are active
- Custom chart background overrides background mode when enabled, allowing theme-consistent indicator panels
On Balance Volume [BrightSideTrading]
# On Balance Volume - Complete User Guide
## Overview
This enhanced OBV indicator provides clean, actionable volume analysis with intelligent signal filtering. It combines On-Balance Volume (OBV) with a smoothed signal line to identify shifts in buying and selling pressure without chart clutter.
**Key Features:**
- Real-time OBV and signal line visualization
- Smart crossover detection with confirmation filtering
- Z-Score momentum analysis
- Customizable signal alerts with V-shaped markers
- Window-normalized option for detrended analysis
---
## What is On-Balance Volume (OBV)?
OBV is a volume-based momentum indicator that accumulates volume on up days and subtracts volume on down days. It answers a fundamental question: **Is volume flowing in (buying) or out (selling)?**
**Formula:**
- If Close > Previous Close: OBV = Previous OBV + Volume
- If Close < Previous Close: OBV = Previous OBV - Volume
- If Close = Previous Close: OBV = Previous OBV (unchanged)
**What it tells you:**
- **Rising OBV** = Accumulation (smart money buying)
- **Falling OBV** = Distribution (smart money selling)
- **OBV above zero line** = Net positive buying pressure
- **OBV below zero line** = Net negative selling pressure
---
## Interface & Settings
### **MAIN VISUALIZATION**
**OBV Line (Green/Red Ribbon)**
- Green when OBV is above the signal line (bullish trend)
- Red when OBV is below the signal line (bearish trend)
- Toggles between window-normalized (detrended) and raw values
**Signal Line (Orange)**
- Smoothed average of OBV
- Crossovers with OBV generate buy/sell signals
- Default: 21-period SMA
**V-Shaped Markers**
- Green upward V = Bullish crossover (buy signal)
- Red downward V = Bearish crossover (sell signal)
- Appears at the OBV value when signal is triggered
**Zero Line (Yellow)**
- Center equilibrium point for volume balance
- Acts as support/resistance for OBV
- Separates buying pressure (above) from selling pressure (below)
---
### **SOURCE GROUP**
**Source**
- **Default:** Close
- **Options:** Open, High, Low, or any custom value
- Controls which price value triggers OBV direction changes
- Most traders use Close for standard OBV calculation
---
### **SIGNAL SMOOTHING GROUP**
**Show Signal?**
- **Default:** ON
- Toggle visibility of the signal line
- Disable if you prefer to see raw OBV only
**Smoothing Type**
- **SMA (Simple Moving Average)** - Default, standard smoothing
- **EMA (Exponential Moving Average)** - Faster response, weights recent bars more heavily
- **Choose SMA** for consistent, traditional OBV signals
- **Choose EMA** for faster trend identification (more whipsaws possible)
**Smoothing Length**
- **Default:** 21 bars
- **Range:** 1-200 bars
- **Lower values** (5-14): Faster signals, more noise
- **Higher values** (30-50): Slower signals, fewer false alarms
- **Recommendation:** Use 21-25 for most timeframes
---
### **SIGNAL FILTERING GROUP**
This is your primary control for signal quality and frequency.
**Show Signal Markers?**
- **Default:** ON
- Toggle the V-shaped buy/sell markers on/off
- Disable if markers distract from your analysis
**Signal Filter Type**
- **None** - Shows every single crossover (noisy, best for skilled traders)
- **Confirmation Bars** - Waits N bars before confirming signal (recommended)
- **Strength-Based** - Only signals during strong momentum (filters weakest moves)
#### **CONFIRMATION BARS MODE** (Recommended)
Best for reducing false signals while staying responsive to real moves.
**Confirmation Bars**
- **Default:** 2 bars
- **Range:** 1-10 bars
- Waits for the signal to hold for N consecutive bars after crossover
- **Setting 1:** Every crossover (same as "None")
- **Setting 2:** Wait 1 bar confirmation (good balance)
- **Setting 3:** Wait 2 bars confirmation (filters 50% of noise)
- **Setting 4+:** Very selective, misses quick reversals
**How it works:**
1. OBV crosses signal line → Confirmation counter starts
2. If OBV stays on correct side for 2 bars → V-marker appears
3. If OBV crosses back → Counter resets, no signal
#### **STRENGTH-BASED MODE**
Only signals when momentum is statistically significant.
**Min Z-Score Strength**
- **Default:** 0.3
- **Range:** 0.0-3.0
- Requires OBV deviation from its mean to reach this threshold
- **Setting 0.1-0.3:** More signals, lower quality
- **Setting 0.5-0.8:** Moderate signals, good quality
- **Setting 1.0+:** Only the strongest momentum shifts
**How it works:**
- Calculates how far OBV is from its 50-bar average (Z-score)
- Only shows signals when this distance is meaningful
- Automatically avoids weak, choppy market conditions
---
### **VISUALS & COLORS GROUP**
**Highlight Crossovers?**
- **Default:** ON
- Master toggle for all signal markers
- Turn OFF to see only the OBV/signal lines
**Apply Ribbon Filling?**
- **Default:** ON
- Colors the space between OBV and signal line
- Green fill = OBV above signal (bullish)
- Red fill = OBV below signal (bearish)
- Provides clear visual trend confirmation
- Turn OFF for minimal chart clutter
---
### **STATS & ZONES GROUP**
**Use Window-Normalized OBV (visual only)?**
- **Default:** ON
- Removes long-term trend from OBV for clearer short-term signals
- Detrends the indicator to highlight recent momentum changes
- **ON:** Better for swing trading and identifying reversals
- **OFF:** Better for trend-following strategies
- Note: Z-Score always uses raw OBV for statistical accuracy
**OBV Normalize Window**
- **Default:** 200 bars
- Lookback period for detrending calculation
- Larger values = more aggressive detrending
- Adjust if you want OBV to oscillate more/less around zero
**Show Z-Score (OBV)?**
- **Default:** ON
- Displays statistical momentum indicator below main chart
- Ranges from -3 to +3 (most data within -2 to +2)
- High Z-Score = Strong buying momentum
- Low Z-Score = Strong selling momentum
**Z-Score Lookback**
- **Default:** 50 bars
- Period for calculating Z-Score mean and standard deviation
- Larger = smoother Z-Score, slower response
- Smaller = noisier Z-Score, faster response
**Show ROC (OBV Momentum)?**
- **Default:** OFF
- Rate of Change indicator for OBV velocity
- Useful for identifying momentum turning points
- Enable if you want to see speed of volume changes
**ROC Lookback**
- **Default:** 14 bars
- Period for ROC calculation
**Show Z-Score StdDev Zones?**
- **Default:** ON
- Shaded regions around zero line showing statistical boundaries
- Inner Zone (±1 Z) = Normal variation
- Outer Zone (±2 Z) = Extreme moves, potential reversals
- Helps identify overbought/oversold volume conditions
**Inner Zone (±Z)**
- **Default:** 1.0
- First boundary for standard deviation zones
- Most normal trading occurs within ±1
**Outer Zone (±Z)**
- **Default:** 2.0
- Second boundary for extreme conditions
- Crossing these zones indicates significant momentum shift
---
## Trading Strategy Examples
### **Strategy 1: Signal Line Crossovers (Beginner)**
**Setup:**
- Signal Filter Type: **Confirmation Bars**
- Confirmation Bars: **2-3**
- Show Signal Markers: **ON**
**Rules:**
1. **BUY signal** (green V): When OBV crosses above signal line and holds for 2-3 bars
- Confirms buying pressure is building
- Look for price to follow within 1-3 bars
2. **SELL signal** (red V): When OBV crosses below signal line and holds for 2-3 bars
- Confirms selling pressure is increasing
- Expect price decline
3. **Exit:** Take profits at next signal or use price support/resistance
**Best For:** Swing trading, intraday reversals, timeframes 5m-1h
---
### **Strategy 2: Zero Line Bounce (Intermediate)**
**Setup:**
- Signal Filter Type: **Strength-Based**
- Min Z-Score Strength: **0.5**
- Show Z-Score StdDev Zones: **ON**
**Rules:**
1. **Watch OBV approach zero line** during established trends
- OBV bouncing repeatedly off zero = trend is healthy
- OBV breaking through zero = trend reversal imminent
2. **Enter on bounce:** Buy when OBV bounces from zero line in uptrend
3. **Exit on break:** Close position when OBV breaks below zero line
4. **Confirm with Z-Score:** Only take trades when Z-Score shows momentum (|Z| > 0.5)
**Best For:** Trend traders, identifying trend strength, medium timeframes 15m-4h
---
### **Strategy 3: Momentum Extremes (Advanced)**
**Setup:**
- Signal Filter Type: **None**
- Show Z-Score StdDev Zones: **ON**
- Outer Zone: **2.0**
**Rules:**
1. **Identify extremes:** When Z-Score breaks outer zone (±2.0)
- Indicator is in extreme territory
- Likely overextended
2. **Fade extremes:** Take opposite position when Z-Score hits extreme
- High Z (>2.0) = OBV overbought, expect pullback
- Low Z (<-2.0) = OBV oversold, expect bounce
3. **Confirm:** Wait for crossover signal to enter
4. **Target:** Outer zone of opposite side or zero line
**Best For:** Range trading, mean reversion, experienced traders only
---
## Reading the Indicator in Different Markets
### **Strong Uptrend**
- OBV consistently above signal line (green)
- OBV well above zero line, rising higher lows
- Z-Score positive, trending upward
- **Action:** Buy dips to signal line, sell at resistance
### **Strong Downtrend**
- OBV consistently below signal line (red)
- OBV well below zero line, making lower highs
- Z-Score negative, trending downward
- **Action:** Sell rallies to signal line, cover at support
### **Consolidation/Choppy Market**
- OBV whipsaws around signal line frequently
- Crossovers occur every few bars
- Z-Score oscillating between -1 and +1
- **Action:** Increase confirmation bars to 3-4, or switch to strength-based filter
### **Accumulation (Bottom Formation)**
- OBV rising while price is flat or falling
- Volume flowing in despite downtrend (bullish divergence)
- Z-Score climbing while price lows hold
- **Action:** Expect breakout up; prepare buy near support
### **Distribution (Top Formation)**
- OBV falling while price is flat or rising
- Volume flowing out despite uptrend (bearish divergence)
- Z-Score falling while price continues higher
- **Action:** Expect breakdown down; prepare short near resistance
---
## Parameter Tuning Guide
### **Aggressive Settings (More Signals)**
- Smoothing Length: 14
- Signal Filter: None or Confirmation Bars: 1
- Min Z-Score: 0.1
- Best for: Day trading, high volatility stocks
- Risk: More false signals
### **Balanced Settings (Recommended)**
- Smoothing Length: 21
- Signal Filter: Confirmation Bars: 2
- Min Z-Score: 0.3
- Best for: Swing trading, most market conditions
- Risk/Reward: Moderate
### **Conservative Settings (Fewer Signals)**
- Smoothing Length: 30-40
- Signal Filter: Confirmation Bars: 3-4 or Strength-Based: 0.7+
- Min Z-Score: 0.8
- Best for: Position trading, high-conviction trades only
- Risk: May miss some moves
---
## Common Questions & Troubleshooting
**Q: Why are there more sell signals than buy signals?**
A: This reflects the actual market action. Markets often decline faster than they rise (fear > greed). Confirm signals with price action and support/resistance.
**Q: The indicator keeps whipsawing, should I hide it?**
A: Increase Confirmation Bars to 3-4 or switch to Strength-Based filter. Market conditions matter—choppy markets require stricter filters.
**Q: What's the difference between normalized and raw OBV?**
A: Normalized (detrended) shows shorter-term momentum by removing long-term trends. Raw OBV shows absolute accumulation/distribution over the full period. Use normalized for swing signals, raw for trend confirmation.
**Q: My signals come too late. How do I get faster entry?**
A: Reduce Smoothing Length (try 14 instead of 21), use EMA instead of SMA, or set Confirmation Bars to 1. Trade-off: More false signals.
**Q: Can I use this for day trading?**
A: Yes, on 1m-5m charts with aggressive settings. Use Confirmation Bars: 1 and focus on Z-Score > 0.5 entries only.
**Q: Should I trade every signal?**
A: No. Filter signals using: price near support/resistance, multiple indicators confirming, and Z-Score showing momentum. Best signals occur at key levels.
---
## Best Practices
1. **Always confirm with price action:** OBV signals work best when price is near support, resistance, or moving average. Don't trade signals in a vacuum.
2. **Use volume context:** Check if volume is increasing or decreasing on the signal. Strong signals have volume confirmation (increasing volume on OBV spikes).
3. **Adjust settings per timeframe:**
- 1m-5m: Smoothing 12, Confirmation 1, Z-Score 0.2
- 15m-1h: Smoothing 20, Confirmation 2, Z-Score 0.3
- 4h-1d: Smoothing 25, Confirmation 3, Z-Score 0.5
4. **Watch the zero line:** It's your friend. OBV behavior at the zero line reveals trend strength. Bounces = healthy trend. Breaks = reversal.
5. **Risk management:** No indicator is perfect. Use proper position sizing and stop losses. OBV should confirm your thesis, not be the only reason to trade.
6. **Combine with other indicators:**
- Price moving averages for trend confirmation
- RSI or Stochastic for overbought/oversold levels
- Support/resistance for entry/exit zones
- MACD for momentum divergences
---
## Disclaimer
This indicator is for educational and informational purposes only. It is not financial advice. Past performance does not guarantee future results. Always conduct your own research and consult with a financial advisor before making trading decisions. Trading carries risk, including potential loss of principal.
---
## Version History
**Version 1.0** - Initial release with enhanced signal filtering, Z-Score analysis, and customizable parameters.
ULTIMATE ORDER FLOW SYSTEM🔥 ULTIMATE ORDER FLOW SYSTEM
Overview
This comprehensive order flow analysis tool combines **Volume Profile**, **Cumulative Delta**, and **Large Order Detection** to identify high-probability trading setups. The script analyzes institutional order flow patterns and volume distribution to pinpoint key levels where price is likely to react.
📊 Core Components & Methodology
🔥 ULTIMATE ORDER FLOW SYSTEM
Overview
This comprehensive order flow analysis tool combines Volume Profile, Cumulative Delta, and Large Order Detection to identify high-probability trading setups. The script analyzes institutional order flow patterns and volume distribution to pinpoint key levels where price is likely to react.
________________________________________
📊 Core Components & Methodology
1. Volume Profile Analysis
The script constructs a horizontal volume profile by:
• Dividing the price range into configurable rows (default: 20)
• Accumulating volume at each price level over a lookback period (default: 50 bars)
• Separating buy volume (green bars close > open) from sell volume (red bars)
• Identifying three critical levels:
o POC (Point of Control): Price level with highest traded volume - acts as a strong magnet
o VAH/VAL (Value Area High/Low): Contains 70% of total volume - defines fair value zone
o HVN (High Volume Nodes): Resistance zones where institutions accumulated positions
o LVN (Low Volume Nodes): Thin zones that price moves through quickly - ideal targets
Why This Matters: Institutional traders leave footprints through volume. HVN zones show where large players defended levels, making them reliable support/resistance.
________________________________________
2. Cumulative Delta (Order Flow)
Tracks the running total of buying vs selling pressure:
• Bar Delta: Difference between buy and sell volume per candle
• Cumulative Delta: Sum of all bar deltas - shows net directional pressure
• Delta Moving Average: Smoothed delta (20-period) to identify trend
• Delta Divergences:
o Bullish: Price makes lower low, but delta makes higher low (absorption at bottom)
o Bearish: Price makes higher high, but delta makes lower high (exhaustion at top)
How It Works: When cumulative delta trends up while price consolidates, it signals accumulation. Delta divergences reveal when smart money is positioned opposite to retail expectations.
________________________________________
3. Large Order Detection
Identifies institutional-sized orders in real-time:
• Compares current bar volume to 20-period moving average
• Flags orders exceeding 2.5x average volume (configurable multiplier)
• Distinguishes bullish (green circles below) vs bearish (red circles above) large orders
Rationale: Sudden volume spikes at key levels indicate institutional participation - the "fuel" needed for breakouts or reversals.
________________________________________
🎯 Trading Signal Logic
Combined Setup Criteria
The script generates SHORT and LONG signals when multiple conditions align:
SHORT Signal Requirements:
1. Price reaches an HVN resistance zone (within 0.2%)
2. Large sell order detected (volume spike + red candle)
3. Cumulative delta is bearish OR bearish divergence present
4. 10-bar cooldown between signals (prevents overtrading)
LONG Signal Requirements:
1. Price reaches an HVN support zone
2. Large buy order detected (volume spike + green candle)
3. Cumulative delta is bullish OR bullish divergence present
4. 10-bar cooldown enforced
________________________________________
🔧 Customization Options
Setting - Purpose - Recommendation
Volume Profile Rows - Granularity of level detection - 20 (balanced)
Lookback Period - Historical data analyzed - 50 bars (intraday), 200 (swing)
Large Order Multiplier - Sensitivity to volume spikes - 2.5x (standard), 3.5x (conservative)
HVN Threshold - Resistance zone detection - 1.3 (default)
LVN Threshold - Target zone identification - 0.6 (default)
Divergence Lookback - Pivot detection period - 5 bars (responsive)
________________________________________
📈 Dashboard Indicators
The real-time panel displays:
• POC: Current Point of Control price
• Location: Whether price is at HVN resistance
• Orders: Current large buy/sell activity
• Cumulative Δ: Net order flow value + trend direction
• Divergence: Active bullish/bearish divergences
• Bar Strength: % of candle volume that's directional (>65% = strong)
• SETUP: Current trade signal (LONG/SHORT/WAIT)
________________________________________
🎨 Visual System
• Yellow POC Line: Highest volume level - primary pivot
• Blue Value Area Box: Fair value zone (VAH to VAL)
• Red HVN Zones: Resistance/support from institutional accumulation
• Green LVN Zones: Low-liquidity targets for quick moves
• Volume Bars: Green (buy pressure) vs Red (sell pressure) distribution
• Triangles: LONG (green up) and SHORT (red down) entry signals
• Diamonds: Divergence warnings (cyan=bullish, fuchsia=bearish)
________________________________________
💡 How This Script Is Unique
Unlike standalone volume profile or delta indicators, this script:
1. Synthesizes three complementary methods - volume structure, order flow momentum, and liquidity detection
2. Requires multi-factor confirmation - signals only trigger when price, volume, and delta align at key zones
3. Adapts to market regime - delta filters ensure you're trading with the dominant order flow direction
4. Provides context, not just signals - the dashboard helps you understand why a setup is forming
________________________________________
⚙️ Best Practices
Timeframes:
• 5-15 min: Scalping (use 30-50 bar lookback)
• 1-4 hour: Swing trading (use 100-200 bar lookback)
Risk Management:
• Enter on signal candle close
• Stop loss: Beyond nearest HVN/LVN zone
• Target 1: Next LVN level
• Target 2: Opposite value area boundary
Filters:
• Avoid signals during major news events
• Require bar delta strength >65% for aggressive entries
• Wait for delta MA cross confirmation in ranging markets
________________________________________
🚨 Alerts Available
• Long Setup Trigger
• Short Setup Trigger
• Bullish/Bearish Divergence Detection
• Large Buy/Sell Order Execution
________________________________________
📚 Educational Context
This methodology is based on principles used by professional order flow traders:
• Market Profile Theory: Volume distribution reveals fair value
• Tape Reading: Large orders show institutional intent
• Auction Theory: Price seeks areas of liquidity imbalance (LVN zones)
The script automates pattern recognition that discretionary traders spend years learning to identify manually.
________________________________________
⚠️ Disclaimer
This indicator is a trading tool, not a trading system. It identifies high-probability setups based on order flow analysis but requires proper risk management, market context, and trader discretion. Past performance does not guarantee future results.
________________________________________
Version: 6 (Pine Script)
Type: Overlay + Separate Pane (Delta Panel)
Resource Usage: Moderate (500 bars history, 500 lines/boxes)
________________________________________
For questions or support, please comment below. If you find this script valuable, please boost and favorite! 🚀
1. Volume Profile Analysis
The script constructs a horizontal volume profile by:
- Dividing the price range into configurable rows (default: 20)
- Accumulating volume at each price level over a lookback period (default: 50 bars)
- Separating buy volume (green bars close > open) from sell volume (red bars)
- Identifying three critical levels:
- POC (Point of Control): Price level with highest traded volume - acts as a strong magnet
- VAH/VAL (Value Area High/Low): Contains 70% of total volume - defines fair value zone
- HVN (High Volume Nodes): Resistance zones where institutions accumulated positions
- LVN (Low Volume Nodes): Thin zones that price moves through quickly - ideal targets
Why This Matters: Institutional traders leave footprints through volume. HVN zones show where large players defended levels, making them reliable support/resistance.
---
2. Cumulative Delta (Order Flow)
Tracks the running total of buying vs selling pressure:
- **Bar Delta**: Difference between buy and sell volume per candle
- **Cumulative Delta**: Sum of all bar deltas - shows net directional pressure
- **Delta Moving Average**: Smoothed delta (20-period) to identify trend
- **Delta Divergences**:
- **Bullish**: Price makes lower low, but delta makes higher low (absorption at bottom)
- **Bearish**: Price makes higher high, but delta makes lower high (exhaustion at top)
**How It Works**: When cumulative delta trends up while price consolidates, it signals accumulation. Delta divergences reveal when smart money is positioned opposite to retail expectations.
---
### 3. **Large Order Detection**
Identifies **institutional-sized orders** in real-time:
- Compares current bar volume to 20-period moving average
- Flags orders exceeding 2.5x average volume (configurable multiplier)
- Distinguishes bullish (green circles below) vs bearish (red circles above) large orders
**Rationale**: Sudden volume spikes at key levels indicate institutional participation - the "fuel" needed for breakouts or reversals.
---
## 🎯 Trading Signal Logic
### Combined Setup Criteria
The script generates **SHORT** and **LONG** signals when multiple conditions align:
**SHORT Signal Requirements:**
1. Price reaches an HVN resistance zone (within 0.2%)
2. Large sell order detected (volume spike + red candle)
3. Cumulative delta is bearish OR bearish divergence present
4. 10-bar cooldown between signals (prevents overtrading)
**LONG Signal Requirements:**
1. Price reaches an HVN support zone
2. Large buy order detected (volume spike + green candle)
3. Cumulative delta is bullish OR bullish divergence present
4. 10-bar cooldown enforced
---
## 🔧 Customization Options
| Setting | Purpose | Recommendation |
|---------|---------|----------------|
| **Volume Profile Rows** | Granularity of level detection | 20 (balanced) |
| **Lookback Period** | Historical data analyzed | 50 bars (intraday), 200 (swing) |
| **Large Order Multiplier** | Sensitivity to volume spikes | 2.5x (standard), 3.5x (conservative) |
| **HVN Threshold** | Resistance zone detection | 1.3 (default) |
| **LVN Threshold** | Target zone identification | 0.6 (default) |
| **Divergence Lookback** | Pivot detection period | 5 bars (responsive) |
---
## 📈 Dashboard Indicators
The real-time panel displays:
- **POC**: Current Point of Control price
- **Location**: Whether price is at HVN resistance
- **Orders**: Current large buy/sell activity
- **Cumulative Δ**: Net order flow value + trend direction
- **Divergence**: Active bullish/bearish divergences
- **Bar Strength**: % of candle volume that's directional (>65% = strong)
- **SETUP**: Current trade signal (LONG/SHORT/WAIT)
---
## 🎨 Visual System
- **Yellow POC Line**: Highest volume level - primary pivot
- **Blue Value Area Box**: Fair value zone (VAH to VAL)
- **Red HVN Zones**: Resistance/support from institutional accumulation
- **Green LVN Zones**: Low-liquidity targets for quick moves
- **Volume Bars**: Green (buy pressure) vs Red (sell pressure) distribution
- **Triangles**: LONG (green up) and SHORT (red down) entry signals
- **Diamonds**: Divergence warnings (cyan=bullish, fuchsia=bearish)
---
## 💡 How This Script Is Unique
Unlike standalone volume profile or delta indicators, this script:
1. **Synthesizes three complementary methods** - volume structure, order flow momentum, and liquidity detection
2. **Requires multi-factor confirmation** - signals only trigger when price, volume, and delta align at key zones
3. **Adapts to market regime** - delta filters ensure you're trading with the dominant order flow direction
4. **Provides context, not just signals** - the dashboard helps you understand *why* a setup is forming
---
## ⚙️ Best Practices
**Timeframes:**
- 5-15 min: Scalping (use 30-50 bar lookback)
- 1-4 hour: Swing trading (use 100-200 bar lookback)
**Risk Management:**
- Enter on signal candle close
- Stop loss: Beyond nearest HVN/LVN zone
- Target 1: Next LVN level
- Target 2: Opposite value area boundary
**Filters:**
- Avoid signals during major news events
- Require bar delta strength >65% for aggressive entries
- Wait for delta MA cross confirmation in ranging markets
---
## 🚨 Alerts Available
- Long Setup Trigger
- Short Setup Trigger
- Bullish/Bearish Divergence Detection
- Large Buy/Sell Order Execution
---
## 📚 Educational Context
This methodology is based on principles used by professional order flow traders:
- **Market Profile Theory**: Volume distribution reveals fair value
- **Tape Reading**: Large orders show institutional intent
- **Auction Theory**: Price seeks areas of liquidity imbalance (LVN zones)
The script automates pattern recognition that discretionary traders spend years learning to identify manually.
---
## ⚠️ Disclaimer
This indicator is a **trading tool, not a trading system**. It identifies high-probability setups based on order flow analysis but requires proper risk management, market context, and trader discretion. Past performance does not guarantee future results.
---
**Version**: 6 (Pine Script)
**Type**: Overlay + Separate Pane (Delta Panel)
**Resource Usage**: Moderate (500 bars history, 500 lines/boxes)
---
*For questions or support, please comment below. If you find this script valuable, please boost and favorite!* 🚀
Mars Signals - Ultimate Institutional Suite v3.0(Joker)Comprehensive Trading Manual
Mars Signals – Ultimate Institutional Suite v3.0 (Joker)
## Chapter 1 – Philosophy & System Architecture
This script is not a simple “buy/sell” indicator.
Mars Signals – UIS v3.0 (Joker) is designed as an institutional-style analytical assistant that layers several methodologies into a single, coherent framework.
The system is built on four core pillars:
1. Smart Money Concepts (SMC)
- Detection of Order Blocks (professional demand/supply zones).
- Detection of Fair Value Gaps (FVGs) (price imbalances).
2. Smart DCA Strategy
- Combination of RSI and Bollinger Bands
- Identifies statistically discounted zones for scaling into spot positions or exiting shorts.
3. Volume Profile (Visible Range Simulation)
- Distribution of volume by price, not by time.
- Identification of POC (Point of Control) and high-/low-volume areas.
4. Wyckoff Helper – Spring
- Detection of bear traps, liquidity grabs, and sharp bullish reversals.
All four pillars feed into a Confluence Engine (Scoring System).
The final output is presented in the Dashboard, with a clear, human-readable signal:
- STRONG LONG 🚀
- WEAK LONG ↗
- NEUTRAL / WAIT
- WEAK SHORT ↘
- STRONG SHORT 🩸
This allows the trader to see *how many* and *which* layers of the system support a bullish or bearish bias at any given time.
## Chapter 2 – Settings Overview
### 2.1 General & Dashboard Group
- Show Dashboard Panel (`show_dash`)
Turns the dashboard table in the corner of the chart ON/OFF.
- Show Signal Recommendation (`show_rec`)
- If enabled, the textual signal (STRONG LONG, WEAK SHORT, etc.) is displayed.
- If disabled, you only see feature status (ON/OFF) and the current price.
- Dashboard Position (`dash_pos`)
Determines where the dashboard appears on the chart:
- `Top Right`
- `Bottom Right`
- `Top Left`
### 2.2 Smart Money (SMC) Group
- Enable SMC Strategy (`show_smc`)
Globally enables or disables the Order Block and FVG logic.
- Order Block Pivot Lookback (`ob_period`)
Main parameter for detecting key pivot highs/lows (swing points).
- Default value: 5
- Concept:
A bar is considered a pivot low if its low is lower than the lows of the previous 5 and the next 5 bars.
Similarly, a pivot high has a high higher than the previous 5 and the next 5 bars.
These pivots are used as anchors for Order Blocks.
- Increasing `ob_period`:
- Fewer levels.
- But levels tend to be more significant and reliable.
- In highly volatile markets (major news, war events, FOMC, etc.),
using values 7–10 is recommended to filter out weak levels.
- Show Fair Value Gaps (`show_fvg`)
Enables/disables the drawing of FVG zones (imbalances).
- Bullish OB Color (`c_ob_bull`)
- Color of Bullish Order Blocks (Demand Zones).
- Default: semi-transparent green (transparency ≈ 80).
- Bearish OB Color (`c_ob_bear`)
- Color of Bearish Order Blocks (Supply Zones).
- Default: semi-transparent red.
- Bullish FVG Color (`c_fvg_bull`)
- Color of Bullish FVG (upward imbalance), typically yellow.
- Bearish FVG Color (`c_fvg_bear`)
- Color of Bearish FVG (downward imbalance), typically purple.
### 2.3 Smart DCA Strategy Group
- Enable DCA Zones (`show_dca`)
Enables the Smart DCA logic and visual labels.
- RSI Length (`rsi_len`)
Lookback period for RSI (default: 14).
- Shorter → more sensitive, more noise.
- Longer → fewer signals, higher reliability.
- Bollinger Bands Length (`bb_len`)
Moving average period for Bollinger Bands (default: 20).
- BB Multiplier (`bb_mult`)
Standard deviation multiplier for Bollinger Bands (default: 2.0).
- For extremely volatile markets, values like 2.5–3.0 can be used so that only extreme deviations trigger a DCA signal.
### 2.4 Volume Profile (Visible Range Sim) Group
- Show Volume Profile (`show_vp`)
Enables the simulated Volume Profile bars on the right side of the chart.
- Volume Lookback Bars (`vp_lookback`)
Number of bars used to compute the Volume Profile (default: 150).
- Higher values → broader historical context, heavier computation.
- Row Count (`vp_rows`)
Number of vertical price segments (rows) to divide the total price range into (default: 30).
- Width (%) (`vp_width`)
Relative width of each volume bar as a percentage.
In the code, bar widths are scaled relative to the row with the maximum volume.
> Technical note: Volume Profile calculations are executed only on the last bar (`barstate.islast`) to keep the script performant even on higher timeframes.
### 2.5 Wyckoff Helper Group
- Show Wyckoff Events (`show_wyc`)
Enables detection and plotting of Wyckoff Spring events.
- Volume MA Length (`vol_ma_len`)
Length of the moving average on volume.
A bar is considered to have Ultra Volume if its volume is more than 2× the volume MA.
## Chapter 3 – Smart Money Strategy (Order Blocks & FVG)
### 3.1 What Is an Order Block?
An Order Block (OB) represents the footprint of large institutional orders:
- Bullish Order Block (Demand Zone)
The last selling region (bearish candle/cluster) before a strong upward move.
- Bearish Order Block (Supply Zone)
The last buying region (bullish candle/cluster) before a strong downward move.
Institutions and large players place heavy orders in these regions. Typical price behavior:
- Price moves away from the zone.
- Later returns to the same zone to fill unfilled orders.
- Then continues the larger trend.
In the script:
- If `pl` (pivot low) forms → a Bullish OB is created.
- If `ph` (pivot high) forms → a Bearish OB is created.
The box is drawn:
- From `bar_index ` to `bar_index`.
- Between `low ` and `high `.
- `extend=extend.right` extends the OB into the future, so it acts as a dynamic support/resistance zone.
- Only the last 4 OB boxes are kept to avoid clutter.
### 3.2 Order Block Color Guide
- Semi-transparent Green (`c_ob_bull`)
- Represents a Bullish Order Block (Demand Zone).
- Interpretation: a price region with a high probability of bullish reaction.
- Semi-transparent Red (`c_ob_bear`)
- Represents a Bearish Order Block (Supply Zone).
- Interpretation: a price region with a high probability of bearish reaction.
Overlap (Multiple OBs in the Same Area)
When two or more Order Blocks overlap:
- The shared area appears visually denser/stronger.
- This suggests higher order density.
- Such zones can be treated as high-priority levels for entries, exits, and stop-loss placement.
### 3.3 Demand/Supply Logic in the Scoring Engine
is_in_demand = low <= ta.lowest(low, 20)
is_in_supply = high >= ta.highest(high, 20)
- If current price is near the lowest lows of the last 20 bars, it is considered in a Demand Zone → positive impact on score.
- If current price is near the highest highs of the last 20 bars, it is considered in a Supply Zone → negative impact on score.
This logic complements Order Blocks and helps the Dashboard distinguish whether:
- Market is currently in a statistically cheap (long-friendly) area, or
- In a statistically expensive (short-friendly) area.
### 3.4 Fair Value Gaps (FVG)
#### Concept
When the market moves aggressively:
- Some price levels are skipped and never traded.
- A gap between wicks/shadows of consecutive candles appears.
- These regions are called Fair Value Gaps (FVGs) or Imbalances.
The market generally “dislikes” imbalance and often:
- Returns to these zones in the future.
- Fills the gap (rebalance).
- Then resumes its dominant direction.
#### Implementation in the Code
Bullish FVG (Yellow)
fvg_bull_cond = show_smc and show_fvg and low > high and close > high
if fvg_bull_cond
box.new(bar_index , high , bar_index, low, ...)
Core condition:
`low > high ` → the current low is above the high of two bars ago; the space between them is an untraded gap.
Bearish FVG (Purple)
fvg_bear_cond = show_smc and show_fvg and high < low and close < low
if fvg_bear_cond
box.new(bar_index , low , bar_index, high, ...)
Core condition:
`high < low ` → the current high is below the low of two bars ago; again a price gap exists.
#### FVG Color Guide
- Transparent Yellow (`c_fvg_bull`) – Bullish FVG
Often acts like a magnet for price:
- Price tends to retrace into this zone,
- Fill the imbalance,
- And then continue higher.
- Transparent Purple (`c_fvg_bear`) – Bearish FVG
Price tends to:
- Retrace upward into the purple area,
- Fill the imbalance,
- And then resume downward movement.
#### Trading with FVGs
- FVGs are *not* standalone entry signals.
They are best used as:
- Targets (take-profit zones), or
- Reaction areas where you expect a pause or reversal.
Examples:
- If you are long, a bearish FVG above is often an excellent take-profit zone.
- If you are short, a bullish FVG below is often a good cover/exit zone.
### 3.5 Core SMC Trading Templates
#### Reversal Long
1. Price trades down into a green Order Block (Demand Zone).
2. A bullish confirmation candle (Close > Open) forms inside or just above the OB.
3. If this zone is close to or aligned with a bullish FVG (yellow), the signal is reinforced.
4. Entry:
- At the close of the confirmation candle, or
- Using a limit order near the upper boundary of the OB.
5. Stop-loss:
- Slightly below the OB.
- If the OB is broken decisively and price consolidates below it, the zone loses validity.
6. Targets:
- The next FVG,
- Or the next red Order Block (Supply Zone) above.
#### Reversal Short
The mirror scenario:
- Price rallies into a red Order Block (Supply).
- A bearish confirmation candle forms (Close < Open).
- FVG/premium structure above can act as a confluence.
- Stop-loss goes above the OB.
- Targets: lower FVGs or subsequent green OBs below.
## Chapter 4 – Smart DCA Strategy (RSI + Bollinger Bands)
### 4.1 Smart DCA Concept
- Classic DCA = buying at fixed time intervals regardless of price.
- Smart DCA = scaling in only when:
- Price is statistically cheaper than usual, and
- The market is in a clear oversold condition.
Code logic:
rsi_val = ta.rsi(close, rsi_len)
= ta.bb(close, bb_len, bb_mult)
dca_buy = show_dca and rsi_val < 30 and close < bb_lower
dca_sell = show_dca and rsi_val > 70 and close > bb_upper
Conditions:
- DCA Buy – Smart Scale-In Zone
- RSI < 30 → oversold.
- Close < lower Bollinger Band → price has broken below its typical volatility envelope.
- DCA Sell – Overbought/Distribution Zone
- RSI > 70 → overbought.
- Close > upper Bollinger Band → price is extended far above the mean.
### 4.2 Visual Representation on the Chart
- Green “DCA” Label Below Candle
- Shape: `labelup`.
- Color: lime background, white text.
- Meaning: statistically attractive level for laddered spot entries or short exits.
- Red “SELL” Label Above Candle
- Warning that the market is in an extended, overbought condition.
- Suitable for profit-taking on longs or considering short entries (with proper confluence and risk management).
- Light Green Background (`bgcolor`)
- When `dca_buy` is true, the candle background turns very light green (high transparency).
- This helps visually identify DCA Zones across the chart at a glance.
### 4.3 Practical Use in Trading
#### Spot Trading
Used to build a better average entry price:
- Every time a DCA label appears, allocate a fixed portion of capital (e.g., 2–5%).
- Combining DCA signals with:
- Green OBs (Demand Zones), and/or
- The Volume Profile POC
makes the zone structurally more important.
#### Futures Trading
- Longs
- Use DCA Buy signals as low-risk zones for opening or adding to longs when:
- Price is inside a green OB, or
- The Dashboard already leans LONG.
- Shorts
- Use DCA Sell signals as:
- Exit zones for longs, or
- Areas to initiate shorts with stops above structural highs.
## Chapter 5 – Volume Profile (Visible Range Simulation)
### 5.1 Concept
Traditional volume (histogram under the chart) shows volume over time.
Volume Profile shows volume by price level:
- At which prices has the highest trading activity occurred?
- Where did buyers and sellers agree the most (High Volume Nodes – HVNs)?
- Where did price move quickly due to low participation (Low Volume Nodes – LVNs)?
### 5.2 Implementation in the Script
Executed only when `show_vp` is enabled and on the last bar:
1. The last `vp_lookback` bars (default 150) are processed.
2. The minimum low and maximum high over this window define the price range.
3. This price range is divided into `vp_rows` segments (e.g., 30 rows).
4. For each row:
- All bars are scanned.
- If the mid-price `(high + low ) / 2` falls inside a row, that bar’s volume is added to the row total.
5. The row with the greatest volume is stored as `max_vol_idx` (the POC row).
6. For each row, a volume box is drawn on the right side of the chart.
### 5.3 Color Scheme
- Semi-transparent Orange
- The row with the maximum volume – the Point of Control (POC).
- Represents the strongest support/resistance level from a volume perspective.
- Semi-transparent Blue
- Other volume rows.
- The taller the bar → the higher the volume → the stronger the interest at that price band.
### 5.4 Trading Applications
- If price is above POC and retraces back into it:
→ POC often acts as support, suitable for long setups.
- If price is below POC and rallies into it:
→ POC often acts as resistance, suitable for short setups or profit-taking.
HVNs (Tall Blue Bars)
- Represent areas of equilibrium where the market has spent time and traded heavily.
- Price tends to consolidate here before choosing a direction.
LVNs (Short or Nearly Empty Bars)
- Represent low participation zones.
- Price often moves quickly through these areas – useful for targeting fast moves.
## Chapter 6 – Wyckoff Helper – Spring
### 6.1 Spring Concept
In the Wyckoff framework:
- A Spring is a false break of support.
- The market briefly trades below a well-defined support level, triggers stop losses,
then sharply reverses upward as institutional buyers absorb liquidity.
This movement:
- Clears out weak hands (retail sellers).
- Provides large players with liquidity to enter long positions.
- Often initiates a new uptrend.
### 6.2 Code Logic
Conditions for a Spring:
1. The current low is lower than the lowest low of the previous 50 bars
→ apparent break of a long-standing support.
2. The bar closes bullish (Close > Open)
→ the breakdown was rejected.
3. Volume is significantly elevated:
→ `volume > 2 × volume_MA` (Ultra Volume).
When all conditions are met and `show_wyc` is enabled:
- A pink diamond is plotted below the bar,
- With the label “Spring” – one of the strongest long signals in this system.
### 6.3 Trading Use
- After a valid Spring, markets frequently enter a meaningful bullish phase.
- The highest quality setups occur when:
- The Spring forms inside a green Order Block, and
- Near or on the Volume Profile POC.
Entries:
- At the close of the Spring bar, or
- On the first pullback into the mid-range of the Spring candle.
Stop-loss:
- Slightly below the Spring’s lowest point (wick low plus a small buffer).
## Chapter 7 – Confluence Engine & Dashboard
### 7.1 Scoring Logic
For each bar, the script:
1. Resets `score` to 0.
2. Adjusts the score based on different signals.
SMC Contribution
if show_smc
if is_in_demand
score += 1
if is_in_supply
score -= 1
- Being in Demand → `+1`
- Being in Supply → `-1`
DCA Contribution
if show_dca
if dca_buy
score += 2
if dca_sell
score -= 2
- DCA Buy → `+2` (strong, statistically driven long signal)
- DCA Sell → `-2`
Wyckoff Spring Contribution
if show_wyc
if wyc_spring
score += 2
- Spring → `+2` (entry of strong money)
### 7.2 Mapping Score to Dashboard Signal
- score ≥ 2 → STRONG LONG 🚀
Multiple bullish conditions aligned.
- score = 1 → WEAK LONG ↗
Some bullish bias, but only one layer clearly positive.
- score = 0 → NEUTRAL / WAIT
Rough balance between buying and selling forces; staying flat is usually preferable.
- score = -1 → WEAK SHORT ↘
Mild bearish bias, suited for cautious or short-term plays.
- score ≤ -2 → STRONG SHORT 🩸
Convergence of several bearish signals.
### 7.3 Dashboard Structure
The dashboard is a two-column table:
- Row 0
- Column 0: `"Mars Signals"` – black background, white text.
- Column 1: `"UIS v3.0"` – black background, yellow text.
- Row 1
- Column 0: `"Price:"` (light grey background).
- Column 1: current closing price (`close`) with a semi-transparent blue background.
- Row 2
- Column 0: `"SMC:"`
- Column 1:
- `"ON"` (green) if `show_smc = true`
- `"OFF"` (grey) otherwise.
- Row 3
- Column 0: `"DCA:"`
- Column 1:
- `"ON"` (green) if `show_dca = true`
- `"OFF"` (grey) otherwise.
- Row 4
- Column 0: `"Signal:"`
- Column 1: signal text (`status_txt`) with background color `status_col`
(green, red, teal, maroon, etc.)
- If `show_rec = false`, these cells are cleared.
## Chapter 8 – Visual Legend (Colors, Shapes & Actions)
For quick reading inside TradingView, the visual elements are described line by line instead of a table.
Chart Element: Green Box
Color / Shape: Transparent green rectangle
Core Meaning: Bullish Order Block (Demand Zone)
Suggested Trader Response: Look for longs, Smart DCA adds, closing or reducing shorts.
Chart Element: Red Box
Color / Shape: Transparent red rectangle
Core Meaning: Bearish Order Block (Supply Zone)
Suggested Trader Response: Look for shorts, or take profit on existing longs.
Chart Element: Yellow Area
Color / Shape: Transparent yellow zone
Core Meaning: Bullish FVG / upside imbalance
Suggested Trader Response: Short take-profit zone or expected rebalance area.
Chart Element: Purple Area
Color / Shape: Transparent purple zone
Core Meaning: Bearish FVG / downside imbalance
Suggested Trader Response: Long take-profit zone or temporary supply region.
Chart Element: Green "DCA" Label
Color / Shape: Green label with white text, plotted below the candle
Core Meaning: Smart ladder-in buy zone, DCA buy opportunity
Suggested Trader Response: Spot DCA entry, partial short exit.
Chart Element: Red "SELL" Label
Color / Shape: Red label with white text, plotted above the candle
Core Meaning: Overbought / distribution zone
Suggested Trader Response: Take profit on longs, consider initiating shorts.
Chart Element: Light Green Background (bgcolor)
Color / Shape: Very transparent light-green background behind bars
Core Meaning: Active DCA Buy zone
Suggested Trader Response: Treat as a discount zone on the chart.
Chart Element: Orange Bar on Right
Color / Shape: Transparent orange horizontal bar in the volume profile
Core Meaning: POC – price with highest traded volume
Suggested Trader Response: Strong support or resistance; key reference level.
Chart Element: Blue Bars on Right
Color / Shape: Transparent blue horizontal bars in the volume profile
Core Meaning: Other volume levels, showing high-volume and low-volume nodes
Suggested Trader Response: Use to identify balance zones (HVN) and fast-move corridors (LVN).
Chart Element: Pink "Spring" Diamond
Color / Shape: Pink diamond with white text below the candle
Core Meaning: Wyckoff Spring – liquidity grab and potential major bullish reversal
Suggested Trader Response: One of the strongest long signals in the suite; look for high-quality long setups with tight risk.
Chart Element: STRONG LONG in Dashboard
Color / Shape: Green background, white text in the Signal row
Core Meaning: Multiple bullish layers in confluence
Suggested Trader Response: Consider initiating or increasing longs with strict risk management.
Chart Element: STRONG SHORT in Dashboard
Color / Shape: Red background, white text in the Signal row
Core Meaning: Multiple bearish layers in confluence
Suggested Trader Response: Consider initiating or increasing shorts with a logical, well-placed stop.
## Chapter 9 – Timeframe-Based Trading Playbook
### 9.1 Timeframe Selection
- Scalping
- Timeframes: 1M, 5M, 15M
- Objective: fast intraday moves (minutes to a few hours).
- Recommendation: focus on SMC + Wyckoff.
Smart DCA on very low timeframes may introduce excessive noise.
- Day Trading
- Timeframes: 15M, 1H, 4H
- Provides a good balance between signal quality and frequency.
- Recommendation: use the full stack – SMC + DCA + Volume Profile + Wyckoff + Dashboard.
- Swing Trading & Position Investing
- Timeframes: Daily, Weekly
- Emphasis on Smart DCA + Volume Profile.
- SMC and Wyckoff are used mainly to fine-tune swing entries within larger trends.
### 9.2 Scenario A – Scalping Long
Example: 5-Minute Chart
1. Price is declining into a green OB (Bullish Demand).
2. A candle with a long lower wick and bullish close (Pin Bar / Rejection) forms inside the OB.
3. A Spring diamond appears below the same candle → very strong confluence.
4. The Dashboard shows at least WEAK LONG ↗, ideally STRONG LONG 🚀.
5. Entry:
- On the close of the confirmation candle, or
- On the first pullback into the mid-range of that candle.
6. Stop-loss:
- Slightly below the OB.
7. Targets:
- Nearby bearish FVG above, and/or
- The next red OB.
### 9.3 Scenario B – Day-Trading Short
Recommended Timeframes: 1H or 4H
1. The market completes a strong impulsive move upward.
2. Price enters a red Order Block (Supply).
3. In the same zone, a purple FVG appears or remains unfilled.
4. On a lower timeframe (e.g., 15M), RSI enters overbought territory and a DCA Sell signal appears.
5. The main timeframe Dashboard (1H) shows WEAK SHORT ↘ or STRONG SHORT 🩸.
Trade Plan
- Open a short near the upper boundary of the red OB.
- Place the stop above the OB or above the last swing high.
- Targets:
- A yellow FVG lower on the chart, and/or
- The next green OB (Demand) below.
### 9.4 Scenario C – Swing / Investment with Smart DCA
Timeframes: Daily / Weekly
1. On the daily or weekly chart, each time a green “DCA” label appears:
- Allocate a fixed fraction of your capital (e.g., 3–5%) to that asset.
2. Check whether this DCA zone aligns with the orange POC of the Volume Profile:
- If yes → the quality of the entry zone is significantly higher.
3. If the DCA signal sits inside a daily green OB, the probability of a medium-term bottom increases.
4. Always build the position laddered, never all-in at a single price.
Exits for investors:
- Near weekly red OBs or large purple FVG zones.
- Ideally via partial profit-taking rather than closing 100% at once.
### 9.5 Case Study 1 – BTCUSDT (15-Minute)
- Context: Price has sold off down towards 65,000 USD.
- A green OB had previously formed at that level.
- Near the lower boundary of this OB, a partially filled yellow FVG is present.
- As price returns to this region, a Spring appears.
- The Dashboard shifts from NEUTRAL / WAIT to WEAK LONG ↗.
Plan
- Enter a long near the OB low.
- Place stop below the Spring low.
- First target: a purple FVG around 66,200.
- Second (optional) target: the first red OB above that level.
### 9.6 Case Study 2 – Meme Coin (PEPE – 4H)
- After a strong pump, price enters a corrective phase.
- On the 4H chart, RSI drops below 30; price breaks below the lower Bollinger Band → a DCA label prints.
- The Volume Profile shows the POC at approximately the same level.
- The Dashboard displays STRONG LONG 🚀.
Plan
- Execute laddered buys in the combined DCA + POC zone.
- Place a protective stop below the last significant swing low.
- Target: an expected 20–30% upside move towards the next red OB or purple FVG.
## Chapter 10 – Risk Management, Psychology & Advanced Tuning
### 10.1 Risk Management
No signal, regardless of its strength, replaces risk control.
Recommendations:
- In futures, do not expose more than 1–3% of account equity to risk per trade.
- Adjust leverage to the volatility of the instrument (lower leverage for highly volatile altcoins).
- Place stop-losses in zones where the idea is clearly invalidated:
- Below/above the relevant Order Block or Spring, not randomly in the middle of the structure.
### 10.2 Market-Specific Parameter Tuning
- Calmer Markets (e.g., major FX pairs)
- `ob_period`: 3–5.
- `bb_mult`: 2.0 is usually sufficient.
- Highly Volatile Markets (Crypto, news-driven assets)
- `ob_period`: 7–10 to highlight only the most robust OBs.
- `bb_mult`: 2.5–3.0 so that only extreme deviations trigger DCA.
- `vol_ma_len`: increase (e.g., to ~30) so that Spring triggers only on truly exceptional
volume spikes.
### 10.3 Trading Psychology
- STRONG LONG 🚀 does not mean “risk-free”.
It means the probability of a successful long, given the model’s logic, is higher than average.
- Treat Mars Signals as a confirmation and context system, not a full replacement for your own decision-making.
- Example of disciplined thinking:
- The Dashboard prints STRONG LONG,
- But price is simultaneously testing a multi-month macro resistance or a major negative news event is imminent,
- In such cases, trade smaller, widen stops appropriately, or skip the trade.
## Chapter 11 – Technical Notes & FAQ
### 11.1 Does the Script Repaint?
- Order Blocks and Springs are based on completed pivot structures and confirmed candles.
- Until a pivot is confirmed, an OB does not exist; after confirmation, behavior is stable under classic SMC assumptions.
- The script is designed to be structurally consistent rather than repainting signals arbitrarily.
### 11.2 Computational Load of Volume Profile
- On the last bar, the script processes up to `vp_lookback` bars × `vp_rows` rows.
- On very low timeframes with heavy zooming, this can become demanding.
- If you experience performance issues:
- Reduce `vp_lookback` or `vp_rows`, or
- Temporarily disable Volume Profile (`show_vp = false`).
### 11.3 Multi-Timeframe Behavior
- This version of the script is not internally multi-timeframe.
All logic (OB, DCA, Spring, Volume Profile) is computed on the active timeframe only.
- Practical workflow:
- Analyze overall structure and key zones on higher timeframes (4H / Daily).
- Use lower timeframes (15M / 1H) with the same tool for timing entries and exits.
## Conclusion
Mars Signals – Ultimate Institutional Suite v3.0 (Joker) is a multi-layer trading framework that unifies:
- Price structure (Order Blocks & FVG),
- Statistical behavior (Smart DCA via RSI + Bollinger),
- Volume distribution by price (Volume Profile with POC, HVN, LVN),
- Liquidity events (Wyckoff Spring),
into a single, coherent system driven by a transparent Confluence Scoring Engine.
The final output is presented in clear, actionable language:
> STRONG LONG / WEAK LONG / NEUTRAL / WEAK SHORT / STRONG SHORT
The system is designed to support professional decision-making, not to replace it.
Used together with strict risk management and disciplined execution,
Mars Signals – UIS v3.0 (Joker) can serve as a central reference manual and operational guide
for your trading workflow, from scalping to swing and investment positioning.
Algorithm Predator - ML-liteAlgorithm Predator - ML-lite
This indicator combines four specialized trading agents with an adaptive multi-armed bandit selection system to identify high-probability trade setups. It is designed for swing and intraday traders who want systematic signal generation based on institutional order flow patterns , momentum exhaustion , liquidity dynamics , and statistical mean reversion .
Core Architecture
Why These Components Are Combined:
The script addresses a fundamental challenge in algorithmic trading: no single detection method works consistently across all market conditions. By deploying four independent agents and using reinforcement learning algorithms to select or blend their outputs, the system adapts to changing market regimes without manual intervention.
The Four Trading Agents
1. Spoofing Detector Agent 🎭
Detects iceberg orders through persistent volume at similar price levels over 5 bars
Identifies spoofing patterns via asymmetric wick analysis (wicks exceeding 60% of bar range with volume >1.8× average)
Monitors order clustering using simplified Hawkes process intensity tracking (exponential decay model)
Signal Logic: Contrarian—fades false breakouts caused by institutional manipulation
Best Markets: Consolidations, institutional trading windows, low-liquidity hours
2. Exhaustion Detector Agent ⚡
Calculates RSI divergence between price movement and momentum indicator over 5-bar window
Detects VWAP exhaustion (price at 2σ bands with declining volume)
Uses VPIN reversals (volume-based toxic flow dissipation) to identify momentum failure
Signal Logic: Counter-trend—enters when momentum extreme shows weakness
Best Markets: Trending markets reaching climax points, over-extended moves
3. Liquidity Void Detector Agent 💧
Measures Bollinger Band squeeze (width <60% of 50-period average)
Identifies stop hunts via 20-bar high/low penetration with immediate reversal and volume spike
Detects hidden liquidity absorption (volume >2× average with range <0.3× ATR)
Signal Logic: Breakout anticipation—enters after liquidity grab but before main move
Best Markets: Range-bound pre-breakout, volatility compression zones
4. Mean Reversion Agent 📊
Calculates price z-scores relative to 50-period SMA and standard deviation (triggers at ±2σ)
Implements Ornstein-Uhlenbeck process scoring (mean-reverting stochastic model)
Uses entropy analysis to detect algorithmic trading patterns (low entropy <0.25 = high predictability)
Signal Logic: Statistical reversion—enters when price deviates significantly from statistical equilibrium
Best Markets: Range-bound, low-volatility, algorithmically-dominated instruments
Adaptive Selection: Multi-Armed Bandit System
The script implements four reinforcement learning algorithms to dynamically select or blend agents based on performance:
Thompson Sampling (Default - Recommended):
Uses Bayesian inference with beta distributions (tracks alpha/beta parameters per agent)
Balances exploration (trying underused agents) vs. exploitation (using proven winners)
Each agent's win/loss history informs its selection probability
Lite Approximation: Uses pseudo-random sampling from price/volume noise instead of true random number generation
UCB1 (Upper Confidence Bound):
Calculates confidence intervals using: average_reward + sqrt(2 × ln(total_pulls) / agent_pulls)
Deterministic algorithm favoring agents with high uncertainty (potential upside)
More conservative than Thompson Sampling
Epsilon-Greedy:
Exploits best-performing agent (1-ε)% of the time
Explores randomly ε% of the time (default 10%, configurable 1-50%)
Simple, transparent, easily tuned via epsilon parameter
Gradient Bandit:
Uses softmax probability distribution over agent preference weights
Updates weights via gradient ascent based on rewards
Best for Blend mode where all agents contribute
Selection Modes:
Switch Mode: Uses only the selected agent's signal (clean, decisive)
Blend Mode: Combines all agents using exponentially weighted confidence scores controlled by temperature parameter (smooth, diversified)
Lock Agent Feature:
Optional manual override to force one specific agent
Useful after identifying which agent dominates your specific instrument
Only applies in Switch mode
Four choices: Spoofing Detector, Exhaustion Detector, Liquidity Void, Mean Reversion
Memory System
Dual-Layer Architecture:
Short-Term Memory: Stores last 20 trade outcomes per agent (configurable 10-50)
Long-Term Memory: Stores episode averages when short-term reaches transfer threshold (configurable 5-20 bars)
Memory Boost Mechanism: Recent performance modulates agent scores by up to ±20%
Episode Transfer: When an agent accumulates sufficient results, averages are condensed into long-term storage
Persistence: Manual restoration of learned parameters via input fields (alpha, beta, weights, microstructure thresholds)
How Memory Works:
Agent generates signal → outcome tracked after 8 bars (performance horizon)
Result stored in short-term memory (win = 1.0, loss = 0.0)
Short-term average influences agent's future scores (positive feedback loop)
After threshold met (default 10 results), episode averaged into long-term storage
Long-term patterns (weighted 30%) + short-term patterns (weighted 70%) = total memory boost
Market Microstructure Analysis
These advanced metrics quantify institutional order flow dynamics:
Order Flow Toxicity (Simplified VPIN):
Measures buy/sell volume imbalance over 20 bars: |buy_vol - sell_vol| / (buy_vol + sell_vol)
Detects informed trading activity (institutional players with non-public information)
Values >0.4 indicate "toxic flow" (informed traders active)
Lite Approximation: Uses simple open/close heuristic instead of tick-by-tick trade classification
Price Impact Analysis (Simplified Kyle's Lambda):
Measures market impact efficiency: |price_change_10| / sqrt(volume_sum_10)
Low values = large orders with minimal price impact ( stealth accumulation )
High values = retail-dominated moves with high slippage
Lite Approximation: Uses simplified denominator instead of regression-based signed order flow
Market Randomness (Entropy Analysis):
Counts unique price changes over 20 bars / 20
Measures market predictability
High entropy (>0.6) = human-driven, chaotic price action
Low entropy (<0.25) = algorithmic trading dominance (predictable patterns)
Lite Approximation: Simple ratio instead of true Shannon entropy H(X) = -Σ p(x)·log₂(p(x))
Order Clustering (Simplified Hawkes Process):
Tracks self-exciting event intensity (coordinated order activity)
Decays at 0.9× per bar, spikes +1.0 when volume >1.5× average
High intensity (>0.7) indicates clustering (potential spoofing/accumulation)
Lite Approximation: Simple exponential decay instead of full λ(t) = μ + Σ α·exp(-β(t-tᵢ)) with MLE
Signal Generation Process
Multi-Stage Validation:
Stage 1: Agent Scoring
Each agent calculates internal score based on its detection criteria
Scores must exceed agent-specific threshold (adjusted by sensitivity multiplier)
Agent outputs: Signal direction (+1/-1/0) and Confidence level (0.0-1.0)
Stage 2: Memory Boost
Agent scores multiplied by memory boost factor (0.8-1.2 based on recent performance)
Successful agents get amplified, failing agents get dampened
Stage 3: Bandit Selection/Blending
If Adaptive Mode ON:
Switch: Bandit selects single best agent, uses only its signal
Blend: All agents combined using softmax-weighted confidence scores
If Adaptive Mode OFF:
Traditional consensus voting with confidence-squared weighting
Signal fires when consensus exceeds threshold (default 70%)
Stage 4: Confirmation Filter
Raw signal must repeat for consecutive bars (default 3, configurable 2-4)
Minimum confidence threshold: 0.25 (25%) enforced regardless of mode
Trend alignment check: Long signals require trend_score ≥ -2, Short signals require trend_score ≤ 2
Stage 5: Cooldown Enforcement
Minimum bars between signals (default 10, configurable 5-15)
Prevents over-trading during choppy conditions
Stage 6: Performance Tracking
After 8 bars (performance horizon), signal outcome evaluated
Win = price moved in signal direction, Loss = price moved against
Results fed back into memory and bandit statistics
Trading Modes (Presets)
Pre-configured parameter sets:
Conservative: 85% consensus, 4 confirmations, 15-bar cooldown
Expected: 60-70% win rate, 3-8 signals/week
Best for: Swing trading, capital preservation, beginners
Balanced: 70% consensus, 3 confirmations, 10-bar cooldown
Expected: 55-65% win rate, 8-15 signals/week
Best for: Day trading, most traders, general use
Aggressive: 60% consensus, 2 confirmations, 5-bar cooldown
Expected: 50-58% win rate, 15-30 signals/week
Best for: Scalping, high-frequency trading, active management
Elite: 75% consensus, 3 confirmations, 12-bar cooldown
Expected: 58-68% win rate, 5-12 signals/week
Best for: Selective trading, high-conviction setups
Adaptive: 65% consensus, 2 confirmations, 8-bar cooldown
Expected: Varies based on learning
Best for: Experienced users leveraging bandit system
How to Use
1. Initial Setup (5 Minutes):
Select Trading Mode matching your style (start with Balanced)
Enable Adaptive Learning (recommended for automatic agent selection)
Choose Thompson Sampling algorithm (best all-around performance)
Keep Microstructure Metrics enabled for liquid instruments (>100k daily volume)
2. Agent Tuning (Optional):
Adjust Agent Sensitivity multipliers (0.5-2.0):
<0.8 = Highly selective (fewer signals, higher quality)
0.9-1.2 = Balanced (recommended starting point)
1.3 = Aggressive (more signals, lower individual quality)
Monitor dashboard for 20-30 signals to identify dominant agent
If one agent consistently outperforms, consider using Lock Agent feature
3. Bandit Configuration (Advanced):
Blend Temperature (0.1-2.0):
0.3 = Sharp decisions (best agent dominates)
0.5 = Balanced (default)
1.0+ = Smooth (equal weighting, democratic)
Memory Decay (0.8-0.99):
0.90 = Fast adaptation (volatile markets)
0.95 = Balanced (most instruments)
0.97+ = Long memory (stable trends)
4. Signal Interpretation:
Green triangle (▲): Long signal confirmed
Red triangle (▼): Short signal confirmed
Dashboard shows:
Active agent (highlighted row with ► marker)
Win rate per agent (green >60%, yellow 40-60%, red <40%)
Confidence bars (█████ = maximum confidence)
Memory size (short-term buffer count)
Colored zones display:
Entry level (current close)
Stop-loss (1.5× ATR)
Take-profit 1 (2.0× ATR)
Take-profit 2 (3.5× ATR)
5. Risk Management:
Never risk >1-2% per signal (use ATR-based stops)
Signals are entry triggers, not complete strategies
Combine with your own market context analysis
Consider fundamental catalysts and news events
Use "Confirming" status to prepare entries (not to enter early)
6. Memory Persistence (Optional):
After 50-100 trades, check Memory Export Panel
Record displayed alpha/beta/weight values for each agent
Record VPIN and Kyle threshold values
Enable "Restore From Memory" and input saved values to continue learning
Useful when switching timeframes or restarting indicator
Visual Components
On-Chart Elements:
Spectral Layers: EMA8 ± 0.5 ATR bands (dynamic support/resistance, colored by trend)
Energy Radiance: Multi-layer glow boxes at signal points (intensity scales with confidence, configurable 1-5 layers)
Probability Cones: Projected price paths with uncertainty wedges (15-bar projection, width = confidence × ATR)
Connection Lines: Links sequential signals (solid = same direction continuation, dotted = reversal)
Kill Zones: Risk/reward boxes showing entry, stop-loss, and dual take-profit targets
Signal Markers: Triangle up/down at validated entry points
Dashboard (Configurable Position & Size):
Regime Indicator: 4-level trend classification (Strong Bull/Bear, Weak Bull/Bear)
Mode Status: Shows active system (Adaptive Blend, Locked Agent, or Consensus)
Agent Performance Table: Real-time win%, confidence, and memory stats
Order Flow Metrics: Toxicity and impact indicators (when microstructure enabled)
Signal Status: Current state (Long/Short/Confirming/Waiting) with confirmation progress
Memory Panel (Configurable Position & Size):
Live Parameter Export: Alpha, beta, and weight values per agent
Adaptive Thresholds: Current VPIN sensitivity and Kyle threshold
Save Reminder: Visual indicator if parameters should be recorded
What Makes This Original
This script's originality lies in three key innovations:
1. Genuine Meta-Learning Framework:
Unlike traditional indicator mashups that simply display multiple signals, this implements authentic reinforcement learning (multi-armed bandits) to learn which detection method works best in current conditions. The Thompson Sampling implementation with beta distribution tracking (alpha for successes, beta for failures) is statistically rigorous and adapts continuously. This is not post-hoc optimization—it's real-time learning.
2. Episodic Memory Architecture with Transfer Learning:
The dual-layer memory system mimics human learning patterns:
Short-term memory captures recent performance (recency bias)
Long-term memory preserves historical patterns (experience)
Automatic transfer mechanism consolidates knowledge
Memory boost creates positive feedback loops (successful strategies become stronger)
This architecture allows the system to adapt without retraining , unlike static ML models that require batch updates.
3. Institutional Microstructure Integration:
Combines retail-focused technical analysis (RSI, Bollinger Bands, VWAP) with institutional-grade microstructure metrics (VPIN, Kyle's Lambda, Hawkes processes) typically found in academic finance literature and professional trading systems, not standard retail platforms. While simplified for Pine Script constraints, these metrics provide insight into informed vs. uninformed trading , a dimension entirely absent from traditional technical analysis.
Mashup Justification:
The four agents are combined specifically for risk diversification across failure modes:
Spoofing Detector: Prevents false breakout losses from manipulation
Exhaustion Detector: Prevents chasing extended trends into reversals
Liquidity Void: Exploits volatility compression (different regime than trending)
Mean Reversion: Provides mathematical anchoring when patterns fail
The bandit system ensures the optimal tool is automatically selected for each market situation, rather than requiring manual interpretation of conflicting signals.
Why "ML-lite"? Simplifications and Approximations
This is the "lite" version due to necessary simplifications for Pine Script execution:
1. Simplified VPIN Calculation:
Academic Implementation: True VPIN uses volume bucketing (fixed-volume bars) and tick-by-tick buy/sell classification via Lee-Ready algorithm or exchange-provided trade direction flags
This Implementation: 20-bar rolling window with simple open/close heuristic (close > open = buy volume)
Impact: May misclassify volume during ranging/choppy markets; works best in directional moves
2. Pseudo-Random Sampling:
Academic Implementation: Thompson Sampling requires true random number generation from beta distributions using inverse transform sampling or acceptance-rejection methods
This Implementation: Deterministic pseudo-randomness derived from price and volume decimal digits: (close × 100 - floor(close × 100)) + (volume % 100) / 100
Impact: Not cryptographically random; may have subtle biases in specific price ranges; provides sufficient variation for agent selection
3. Hawkes Process Approximation:
Academic Implementation: Full Hawkes process uses maximum likelihood estimation with exponential kernels: λ(t) = μ + Σ α·exp(-β(t-tᵢ)) fitted via iterative optimization
This Implementation: Simple exponential decay (0.9 multiplier) with binary event triggers (volume spike = event)
Impact: Captures self-exciting property but lacks parameter optimization; fixed decay rate may not suit all instruments
4. Kyle's Lambda Simplification:
Academic Implementation: Estimated via regression of price impact on signed order flow over multiple time intervals: Δp = λ × Δv + ε
This Implementation: Simplified ratio: price_change / sqrt(volume_sum) without proper signed order flow or regression
Impact: Provides directional indicator of impact but not true market depth measurement; no statistical confidence intervals
5. Entropy Calculation:
Academic Implementation: True Shannon entropy requires probability distribution: H(X) = -Σ p(x)·log₂(p(x)) where p(x) is probability of each price change magnitude
This Implementation: Simple ratio of unique price changes to total observations (variety measure)
Impact: Measures diversity but not true information entropy with probability weighting; less sensitive to distribution shape
6. Memory System Constraints:
Full ML Implementation: Neural networks with backpropagation, experience replay buffers (storing state-action-reward tuples), gradient descent optimization, and eligibility traces
This Implementation: Fixed-size array queues with simple averaging; no gradient-based learning, no state representation beyond raw scores
Impact: Cannot learn complex non-linear patterns; limited to linear performance tracking
7. Limited Feature Engineering:
Advanced Implementation: Dozens of engineered features, polynomial interactions (x², x³), dimensionality reduction (PCA, autoencoders), feature selection algorithms
This Implementation: Raw agent scores and basic market metrics (RSI, ATR, volume ratio); minimal transformation
Impact: May miss subtle cross-feature interactions; relies on agent-level intelligence rather than feature combinations
8. Single-Instrument Data:
Full Implementation: Multi-asset correlation analysis (sector ETFs, currency pairs, volatility indices like VIX), lead-lag relationships, risk-on/risk-off regimes
This Implementation: Only OHLCV data from displayed instrument
Impact: Cannot incorporate broader market context; vulnerable to correlated moves across assets
9. Fixed Performance Horizon:
Full Implementation: Adaptive horizon based on trade duration, volatility regime, or profit target achievement
This Implementation: Fixed 8-bar evaluation window
Impact: May evaluate too early in slow markets or too late in fast markets; one-size-fits-all approach
Performance Impact Summary:
These simplifications make the script:
✅ Faster: Executes in milliseconds vs. seconds (or minutes) for full academic implementations
✅ More Accessible: Runs on any TradingView plan without external data feeds, APIs, or compute servers
✅ More Transparent: All calculations visible in Pine Script (no black-box compiled models)
✅ Lower Resource Usage: <500 bars lookback, minimal memory footprint
⚠️ Less Precise: Approximations may reduce statistical edge by 5-15% vs. academic implementations
⚠️ Limited Scope: Cannot capture tick-level dynamics, multi-order-book interactions, or cross-asset flows
⚠️ Fixed Parameters: Some thresholds hardcoded rather than dynamically optimized
When to Upgrade to Full Implementation:
Consider professional Python/C++ versions with institutional data feeds if:
Trading with >$100K capital where precision differences materially impact returns
Operating in microsecond-competitive environments (HFT, market making)
Requiring regulatory-grade audit trails and reproducibility
Backtesting with tick-level precision for strategy validation
Need true real-time adaptation with neural network-based learning
For retail swing/day trading and position management, these approximations provide sufficient signal quality while maintaining usability, transparency, and accessibility. The core logic—multi-agent detection with adaptive selection—remains intact.
Technical Notes
All calculations use standard Pine Script built-in functions ( ta.ema, ta.atr, ta.rsi, ta.bb, ta.sma, ta.stdev, ta.vwap )
VPIN and Kyle's Lambda use simplified formulas optimized for OHLCV data (see "Lite" section above)
Thompson Sampling uses pseudo-random noise from price/volume decimal digits for beta distribution sampling
No repainting: All calculations use confirmed bar data (no forward-looking)
Maximum lookback: 500 bars (set via max_bars_back parameter)
Performance evaluation: 8-bar forward-looking window for reward calculation (clearly disclosed)
Confidence threshold: Minimum 0.25 (25%) enforced on all signals
Memory arrays: Dynamic sizing with FIFO queue management
Limitations and Disclaimers
Not Predictive: This indicator identifies patterns in historical data. It cannot predict future price movements with certainty.
Requires Human Judgment: Signals are entry triggers, not complete trading strategies. Must be confirmed with your own analysis, risk management rules, and market context.
Learning Period Required: The adaptive system requires 50-100 bars minimum to build statistically meaningful performance data for bandit algorithms.
Overfitting Risk: Restoring memory parameters from one market regime to a drastically different regime (e.g., low volatility to high volatility) may cause poor initial performance until system re-adapts.
Approximation Limitations: Simplified calculations (see "Lite" section) may underperform academic implementations by 5-15% in highly efficient markets.
No Guarantee of Profit: Past performance, whether backtested or live-traded, does not guarantee future performance. All trading involves risk of loss.
Forward-Looking Bias: Performance evaluation uses 8-bar forward window—this creates slight look-ahead for learning (though not for signals). Real-time performance may differ from indicator's internal statistics.
Single-Instrument Limitation: Does not account for correlations with related assets or broader market regime changes.
Recommended Settings
Timeframe: 15-minute to 4-hour charts (sufficient volatility for ATR-based stops; adequate bar volume for learning)
Assets: Liquid instruments with >100k daily volume (forex majors, large-cap stocks, BTC/ETH, major indices)
Not Recommended: Illiquid small-caps, penny stocks, low-volume altcoins (microstructure metrics unreliable)
Complementary Tools: Volume profile, order book depth, market breadth indicators, fundamental catalysts
Position Sizing: Risk no more than 1-2% of capital per signal using ATR-based stop-loss
Signal Filtering: Consider external confluence (support/resistance, trendlines, round numbers, session opens)
Start With: Balanced mode, Thompson Sampling, Blend mode, default agent sensitivities (1.0)
After 30+ Signals: Review agent win rates, consider increasing sensitivity of top performers or locking to dominant agent
Alert Configuration
The script includes built-in alert conditions:
Long Signal: Fires when validated long entry confirmed
Short Signal: Fires when validated short entry confirmed
Alerts fire once per bar (after confirmation requirements met)
Set alert to "Once Per Bar Close" for reliability
Taking you to school. — Dskyz, Trade with insight. Trade with anticipation.
lower_tfLibrary "lower_tf"
█ OVERVIEW
This library is an enhanced (opinionated) version of the library originally developed by PineCoders contained in lower_tf .
It is a Pine Script® programming tool for advanced lower-timeframe selection and intra-bar analysis.
█ CONCEPTS
Lower Timeframe Analysis
Lower timeframe analysis refers to the analysis of price action and market microstructure using data from timeframes shorter than the current chart period. This technique allows traders and analysts to gain deeper insights into market dynamics, volume distribution, and the price movements occurring within each bar on the chart. In Pine Script®, the request.security_lower_tf() function allows this analysis by accessing intrabar data.
The library provides a comprehensive set of functions for accurate mapping of lower timeframes, dynamic precision control, and optimized historical coverage using request.security_lower_tf().
█ IMPROVEMENTS
The original library implemented ten precision levels. This enhanced version extends that to twelve levels, adding two ultra-high-precision options:
Coverage-Based Precision (Original 5 levels):
1. "Covering most chart bars (least precise)"
2. "Covering some chart bars (less precise)"
3. "Covering fewer chart bars (more precise)"
4. "Covering few chart bars (very precise)"
5. "Covering the least chart bars (most precise)"
Intrabar-Count-Based Precision (Expanded from 5 to 7 levels):
6. "~12 intrabars per chart bar"
7. "~24 intrabars per chart bar"
8. "~50 intrabars per chart bar"
9. "~100 intrabars per chart bar"
10. "~250 intrabars per chart bar"
11. "~500 intrabars per chart bar" ← NEW
12. "~1000 intrabars per chart bar" ← NEW
The key enhancements in this version include:
1. Extended Precision Range: Adds two ultra-high-precision levels (~500 and ~1000 intrabars) for advanced microstructure analysis requiring maximum granularity.
2. Market-Agnostic Implementation: Eliminates the distinction between crypto/forex and traditional markets, removing the mktFactor variable in favor of a unified, predictable approach across all asset classes.
3. Explicit Precision Mapping: Completely refactors the timeframe selection logic using native Pine Script® timeframe properties ( timeframe.isseconds , timeframe.isminutes , timeframe.isdaily , timeframe.isweekly , timeframe.ismonthly ) and explicit multiplier-based lookup tables. The original library used minute-based calculations with market-dependent conditionals that produced inconsistent results. This version provides deterministic, predictable mappings for every chart timeframe, ensuring consistent precision behavior regardless of asset type or market hours.
An example of the differences can be seen side-by-side in the chart below, where the original library is on the left and the enhanced version is on the right:
█ USAGE EXAMPLE
// This Pine Script® code is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public License 2.0 at mozilla.org
// © andre_007
//@version=6
indicator("lower_tf Example")
import andre_007/lower_tf/1 as LTF
import PineCoders/Time/5 as PCtime
//#region ———————————————————— Example code
// ————— Constants
color WHITE = color.white
color GRAY = color.gray
string LTF1 = "Covering most chart bars (least precise)"
string LTF2 = "Covering some chart bars (less precise)"
string LTF3 = "Covering less chart bars (more precise)"
string LTF4 = "Covering few chart bars (very precise)"
string LTF5 = "Covering the least chart bars (most precise)"
string LTF6 = "~12 intrabars per chart bar"
string LTF7 = "~24 intrabars per chart bar"
string LTF8 = "~50 intrabars per chart bar"
string LTF9 = "~100 intrabars per chart bar"
string LTF10 = "~250 intrabars per chart bar"
string LTF11 = "~500 intrabars per chart bar"
string LTF12 = "~1000 intrabars per chart bar"
string TT_LTF = "This selection determines the approximate number of intrabars analyzed per chart bar. Higher numbers of
intrabars produce more granular data at the cost of less historical bar coverage, because the maximum number of
available intrabars is 200K.
\n\nThe first five options set the lower timeframe based on a specified relative level of chart bar coverage.
The last five options set the lower timeframe based on an approximate number of intrabars per chart bar."
string TAB_TXT = "Uses intrabars at the {0} timeframe.\nAvg intrabars per chart bar:
{1,number,#.#}\nChart bars covered: {2} of {3} ({4,number,#.##}%)"
string ERR_TXT = "No intrabar information exists at the {1}{0}{1} timeframe."
// ————— Inputs
string ltfModeInput = input.string(LTF3, "Intrabar precision", options = , tooltip = TT_LTF)
bool showInfoBoxInput = input.bool(true, "Show information box ")
string infoBoxSizeInput = input.string("normal", "Size ", inline = "01", options = )
string infoBoxYPosInput = input.string("bottom", "↕", inline = "01", options = )
string infoBoxXPosInput = input.string("right", "↔", inline = "01", options = )
color infoBoxColorInput = input.color(GRAY, "", inline = "01")
color infoBoxTxtColorInput = input.color(WHITE, "T", inline = "01")
// ————— Calculations
// @variable A "string" representing the lower timeframe for the data request.
// NOTE:
// This line is a good example where using `var` in the declaration can improve a script's performance.
// By using `var` here, the script calls `ltf()` only once, on the dataset's first bar, instead of redundantly
// evaluating unchanging strings on every bar. We only need one evaluation of this function because the selected
// timeframe does not change across bars in this script.
var string ltfString = LTF.ltf(ltfModeInput, LTF1, LTF2, LTF3, LTF4, LTF5, LTF6, LTF7, LTF8, LTF9, LTF10, LTF11, LTF12)
// @variable An array containing all intrabar `close` prices from the `ltfString` timeframe for the current chart bar.
array intrabarCloses = request.security_lower_tf(syminfo.tickerid, ltfString, close)
// Calculate the intrabar stats.
= LTF.ltfStats(intrabarCloses)
int chartBars = bar_index + 1
// ————— Visuals
// Plot the `avgIntrabars` and `intrabars` series in all display locations.
plot(avgIntrabars, "Average intrabars", color.silver, 6)
plot(intrabars, "Intrabars", color.blue, 2)
// Plot the `chartBarsCovered` and `chartBars` values in the Data Window and the script's status line.
plot(chartBarsCovered, "Chart bars covered", display = display.data_window + display.status_line)
plot(chartBars, "Chart bars total", display = display.data_window + display.status_line)
// Information box logic.
if showInfoBoxInput
// @variable A single-cell table that displays intrabar information.
var table infoBox = table.new(infoBoxYPosInput + "_" + infoBoxXPosInput, 1, 1)
// @variable The span of the `ltfString` timeframe formatted as a number of automatically selected time units.
string formattedLtf = PCtime.formattedNoOfPeriods(timeframe.in_seconds(ltfString) * 1000)
// @variable A "string" containing the formatted text to display in the `infoBox`.
string txt = str.format(
TAB_TXT, formattedLtf, avgIntrabars, chartBarsCovered, chartBars, chartBarsCovered / chartBars * 100, "'"
)
// Initialize the `infoBox` cell on the first bar.
if barstate.isfirst
table.cell(
infoBox, 0, 0, txt, text_color = infoBoxTxtColorInput, text_size = infoBoxSizeInput,
bgcolor = infoBoxColorInput
)
// Update the cell's text on the latest bar.
else if barstate.islast
table.cell_set_text(infoBox, 0, 0, txt)
// Raise a runtime error if no intrabar data is available.
if ta.cum(intrabars) == 0 and barstate.islast
runtime.error(str.format(ERR_TXT, ltfString, "'"))
//#endregion
█ EXPORTED FUNCTIONS
ltf(userSelection, choice1, choice2, ...)
Returns the optimal lower timeframe string based on user selection and current chart timeframe. Dynamically calculates precision to balance granularity with historical coverage within the 200K intrabar limit.
ltfStats(intrabarValues)
Analyzes an intrabar array returned by request.security_lower_tf() and returns statistics: number of intrabars in current bar, total chart bars covered, and average intrabars per bar.
█ CREDITS AND LICENSING
Original Concept : PineCoders Team
Original Lower TF Library :
License : Mozilla Public License 2.0
Price Action Brooks ProPrice Action Brooks Pro (PABP) - Professional Trading Indicator
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
📊 OVERVIEW
Price Action Brooks Pro (PABP) is a professional-grade TradingView indicator developed based on Al Brooks' Price Action trading methodology. It integrates decades of Al Brooks' trading experience and price action analysis techniques into a comprehensive technical analysis tool, helping traders accurately interpret market structure and identify trading opportunities.
• Applicable Markets: Stocks, Futures, Forex, Cryptocurrencies
• Timeframes: 1-minute to Daily (5-minute chart recommended)
• Theoretical Foundation: Al Brooks Price Action Trading Method
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
🎯 CORE FEATURES
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
1️⃣ INTELLIGENT GAP DETECTION SYSTEM
Automatically identifies and marks three critical types of gaps in the market.
TRADITIONAL GAP
• Detects complete price gaps between bars
• Upward gap: Current bar's low > Previous bar's high
• Downward gap: Current bar's high < Previous bar's low
• Hollow border design - doesn't obscure price action
• Color coding: Upward gaps (light green), Downward gaps (light pink)
• Adjustable border: 1-5 pixel width options
TAIL GAP
• Detects price gaps between bar wicks/shadows
• Analyzes across 3 bars for precision
• Identifies hidden market structure
BODY GAP
• Focuses only on gaps between bar bodies (open/close)
• Filters out wick noise
• Disabled by default, enable as needed
Trading Significance:
• Gaps signal strong momentum
• Gap fills provide trading opportunities
• Consecutive gaps indicate trend continuation
✓ Independent alert system for all gap types
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
2️⃣ RTH BAR COUNT (Trading Session Counter)
Intelligent counting system designed for US stock intraday trading.
FEATURES
• RTH Only Display: Regular Trading Hours (09:30-15:00 EST)
• 5-Minute Chart Optimized: Displays every 3 bars (15-minute intervals)
• Daily Auto-Reset: Counting starts from 1 each trading day
SMART COLOR CODING
• 🔴 Red (Bars 18 & 48): Critical turning moments (1.5h & 4h)
• 🔵 Sky Blue (Multiples of 12): Hourly markers (12, 24, 36...)
• 🟢 Light Green (Bar 6): Half-hour marker (30 minutes)
• ⚫ Gray (Others): Regular 15-minute interval markers
Al Brooks Time Theory:
• Bar 18 (90 min): First 90 minutes determine daily trend
• Bar 48 (4 hours): Important afternoon turning point
• Hourly markers: Track institutional trading rhythm
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
3️⃣ FOUR-LINE EMA SYSTEM
Professional-grade configurable moving average system.
DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
• EMA 20: Short-term trend (Al Brooks' most important MA)
• EMA 50: Medium-short term reference
• EMA 100: Medium-long term confirmation
• EMA 200: Long-term trend and bull/bear dividing line
FLEXIBLE CUSTOMIZATION
Each EMA can be independently configured:
• On/Off toggle
• Data source selection (close/high/low/open, etc.)
• Custom period length
• Offset adjustment
• Color and transparency
COLOR SCHEME
• EMA 20: Dark brown, opaque (most important)
• EMA 50/100/200: Blue-purple gradient, 70% transparent
TRADING APPLICATIONS
• Bullish Alignment: Price > 20 > 50 > 100 > 200
• Bearish Alignment: 200 > 100 > 50 > 20 > Price
• EMA Confluence: All within <1% = major move precursor
Al Brooks Quote:
"The EMA 20 is the most important moving average. Almost all trading decisions should reference it."
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
4️⃣ PREVIOUS VALUES (Key Prior Price Levels)
Automatically marks important price levels that often act as support/resistance.
THREE INDEPENDENT CONFIGURATIONS
Each group configurable for:
• Timeframe (1D/60min/15min, etc.)
• Price source (close/high/low/open/CurrentOpen, etc.)
• Line style and color
• Display duration (Today/TimeFrame/All)
SMART OPEN PRICE LABELS ⭐
• Auto-displays "Open" label when CurrentOpen selected
• Label color matches line color
• Customizable label size
TYPICAL SETUP
• 1st Line: Previous close (Support/Resistance)
• 2nd Line: Previous high (Breakout target)
• 3rd Line: Previous low (Support level)
Al Brooks Magnet Price Theory:
• Previous open: Price frequently tests opening price
• Previous high/low: Strongest support/resistance
• Breakout confirmation: Breaking prior levels = trend continuation
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
5️⃣ INSIDE & OUTSIDE BAR PATTERN RECOGNITION
Automatically detects core candlestick patterns from Al Brooks' theory.
ii PATTERN (Consecutive Inside Bars)
• Current bar contained within previous bar
• Two or more consecutive
• Labels: ii, iii, iiii (auto-accumulates)
• High-probability breakout setup
• Stop loss: Outside both bars
Trading Significance:
"Inside bars are one of the most reliable breakout setups, especially three or more consecutive inside bars." - Al Brooks
OO PATTERN (Consecutive Outside Bars)
• Current bar engulfs previous bar
• Two or more consecutive
• Labels: oo, ooo (auto-accumulates)
• Indicates indecision or volatility increase
ioi PATTERN (Inside-Outside-Inside)
• Three-bar combination: Inside → Outside → Inside
• Auto-detected and labeled
• Tug-of-war pattern
• Breakout direction often very strong
SMART LABEL SYSTEM
• Auto-accumulation counting
• Dynamic label updates
• Customizable size and color
• Positioned above bars
✓ Independent alerts for all patterns
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
💡 USE CASES
INTRADAY TRADING
✓ Bar Count (timing rhythm)
✓ Traditional Gap (strong signals)
✓ EMA 20 + 50 (quick trend)
✓ ii/ioi Patterns (breakout points)
SWING TRADING
✓ Previous Values (key levels)
✓ EMA 20 + 50 + 100 (trend analysis)
✓ Gaps (trend confirmation)
✓ iii Patterns (entry timing)
TREND FOLLOWING
✓ All four EMAs (alignment analysis)
✓ Gaps (continuation signals)
✓ Previous Values (targets)
BREAKOUT TRADING
✓ iii Pattern (high-reliability setup)
✓ Previous Values (targets)
✓ EMA 20 (trend direction)
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
🎨 DESIGN FEATURES
PROFESSIONAL COLOR SCHEME
• Gaps: Hollow borders + light colors
• Bar Count: Smart multi-color coding
• EMAs: Gradient colors + transparency hierarchy
• Previous Values: Customizable + smart labels
CLEAR VISUAL HIERARCHY
• Important elements: Opaque (EMA 20, bar count)
• Reference elements: Semi-transparent (other EMAs, gaps)
• Hollow design: Doesn't obscure price action
USER-FRIENDLY INTERFACE
• Clear functional grouping
• Inline layout saves space
• All colors and sizes customizable
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
📚 AL BROOKS THEORY CORE
READING PRICE ACTION
"Don't try to predict the market, read what the market is telling you."
PABP converts core concepts into visual tools:
• Trend Assessment: EMA system
• Time Rhythm: Bar Count
• Market Structure: Gap analysis
• Trade Setups: Inside/Outside Bars
• Support/Resistance: Previous Values
PROBABILITY THINKING
• ii pattern: Medium probability
• iii pattern: High probability
• iii + EMA 20 support: Very high probability
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
⚙️ TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
• Pine Script Version: v6
• Maximum Objects: 500 lines, 500 labels, 500 boxes
• Alert Functions: 8 independent alerts
• Supported Timeframes: All (5-min recommended for Bar Count)
• Compatibility: All TradingView plans, Mobile & Desktop
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
🚀 RECOMMENDED INITIAL SETTINGS
GAPS
• Traditional Gap: ✓
• Tail Gap: ✓
• Border Width: 2
BAR COUNT
• Use Bar Count: ✓
• Label Size: Normal
EMA
• EMA 20: ✓
• EMA 50: ✓
• EMA 100: ✓
• EMA 200: ✓
PREVIOUS VALUES
• 1st: close (Previous close)
• 2nd: high (Previous high)
• 3rd: low (Previous low)
INSIDE & OUTSIDE BAR
• All patterns: ✓
• Label Size: Large
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
🌟 WHY CHOOSE PABP?
✅ Solid Theoretical Foundation
Based on Al Brooks' decades of trading experience
✅ Complete Professional Features
Systematizes complex price action analysis
✅ Highly Customizable
Every feature adjustable to personal style
✅ Excellent Performance
Optimized code ensures smooth experience
✅ Continuous Updates
Constantly improving based on feedback
✅ Suitable for All Levels
Benefits beginners to professionals
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
📖 RECOMMENDED LEARNING
Al Brooks Books:
• "Trading Price Action Trends"
• "Trading Price Action Trading Ranges"
• "Trading Price Action Reversals"
Learning Path:
1. Understand basic candlestick patterns
2. Learn EMA applications
3. Master market structure analysis
4. Develop trading system
5. Continuous practice and optimization
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
⚠️ RISK DISCLOSURE
IMPORTANT NOTICE:
• For educational and informational purposes only
• Does not constitute investment advice
• Past performance doesn't guarantee future results
• Trading involves risk and may result in capital loss
• Trade according to your risk tolerance
• Test thoroughly in demo account first
RESPONSIBLE TRADING:
• Always use stop losses
• Control position sizes reasonably
• Don't overtrade
• Continuous learning and improvement
• Keep trading journal
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
📜 COPYRIGHT
Price Action Brooks Pro (PABP)
Author: © JimmC98
License: Mozilla Public License 2.0
Pine Script Version: v6
Acknowledgments:
Thanks to Dr. Al Brooks for his contributions to price action trading. This indicator is developed based on his theories.
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
Experience professional-grade price action analysis now!
"The best traders read price action, not indicators. But when indicators help you read price action better, use them." - Al Brooks
